Bar Admin Guide

BAR Administration Guide
Declarations
Document Notice
Copyright Copyright © 2005 by Pannaway Technologies, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Rights Pannaway Technologies, Inc. makes no representation that software programs and practices
described herein will not infringe on existing or future patent rights, copyrights, trademarks, trade
secrets or other proprietary rights of third parties and Pannaway Technologies, Inc. makes no
warranties of any kind, either express or implied, and expressly disclaims any such warranties,
including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular
purpose and any warranties of non-infringement. The descriptions contained herein do not imply the
granting of licenses to make, use, sell, license or otherwise transfer Pannaway Technologies, Inc.
products described herein. Pannaway Technologies, Inc. disclaims responsibility for errors which
may appear in this document, and it reserves the right, in its sole discretion and without notice, to
make substitutions and modifications in the products and practices described in this document.
Trademarks The Pannaway logo, Redefining Broadband Convergence, Service Convergence Network, PBG,
RGN, BAR, BAS and NMX are trademarks of Pannaway Technologies, Inc.
Revision History Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Router Administration Guide
Part Number: 850-0000011-03 (A)
Revision A drafted: 11/10/2005
i
Standard Limited Warranty

As the original purchaser you will receive the following warranties from Pannaway Technologies, Inc.
Under normal operating conditions for which the product was designed, Pannaway Technologies
warrants that all of its Service Convergence Network hardware components shall be free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the shipment date from Pannaway
Technologies, Inc.
Hardware In the event that Pannaway Technologies receives notice during the warranty period that any of its
hardware does not conform to its warranty, Pannaway Technologies will provide return-to-factory
repair, with a 10-business day turnaround from the date of receipt of the product at Pannaway
Technologies. Pannaway Technologies, at its sole option, will either repair or replace the
nonconforming hardware. Hardware replaced under the terms of any such warranty may be
refurbished or new equipment substituted at the option of Pannaway Technologies. All repaired or
replaced hardware shall carry a warranty that is equal to either the balance of the warranty on the
original purchase or 90 days, whichever is greater.
Items may only be returned with the prior approval of Pannaway Technologies. All approvals shall
reference a return material authorization (RMA) number issued by authorized Pannaway
Technologies Service personnel. Transportation costs, if any, incurred in connection with the return of
a defective component to Pannaway Technologies shall be paid by Pannaway Technologies. If,
however, Pannaway Technologies reasonably determines that the item is functional and not
defective, the customer shall pay all transportation costs.
Any shipment cost incurred for any component returned after the warranty period has expired shall
be the responsibility of the customer.
DOA Component For up to thirty (30) days from the delivery date of the product, Pannaway Technologies will provide
expedited replacement of inoperative hardware. Upon validation of a DOA request a new
replacement unit will be shipped within 2 business days.
Pannaway Technologies shall not be liable for any data contained within any returned warranty
components.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE ONLY WARRANTY MADE FOR THE HARDWARE AND
SOFTWARE OF THIS PRODUCT. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, NO OTHER WARRANTY
APPLIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights which may vary from state to state. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of liability for consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to
you.
IN NO EVENT SHALL PANNAWAY TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR

INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,
OR FOR DAMAGE TO ANY EQUIPMENT, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR ANY
OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS RESULTING FROM THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, USE,
PERFORMANCE, FAILURE, OR INTERRUPTION OF THIS PRODUCT.
ii
Return and Repair Policy

For any Pannaway Technologies product that needs to be returned or repaired please
contact the Pannaway Technologies Technical Assistance Center to obtain a Return
Material Authorization (RMA) number. RMA numbers are vital to ensure the proper
handling and repair/replacement of your returned product. Please do not return any
product to Pannaway Technologies without a valid RMA number. Product returned to
Pannaway Technologies without a valid RMA number may be refused and returned to
the shipper’s address.
Please refer to Pannaway Technologies Standard Limited Warranty Policy for further
information.
To obtain an RMA number, please contact the Pannaway Technologies Technical
Assistance Center in one of the following ways:
• Call 877-726-6299 (US toll-free) or 603-766-5175 (US long distance)
• Send an e-mail to [email protected]
Please have the following information available when requesting an RMA number:
• Product type
• Product serial number
• Return shipping address
• Contact name (must be located at the shipping address)
• Contact phone number
• Contact e-mail address
iii
iv
CONTENTS
DECLARATIONS
Document Notice .................................................................................................................................................................... i
Copyright .................................................................................................................................................................. i
Rights......................................................................................................................................................................... i
Trademarks ............................................................................................................................................................... i
Revision History ...................................................................................................................................................... i
Standard Limited Warranty.................................................................................................................................................... ii
Hardware.................................................................................................................................................................. ii
DOA Component................................................................................................................................................... ii
Return and Repair Policy ...................................................................................................................................................... iii
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Welcome ................................................................................................................................................................................1-1
Contents of this Chapter: ...................................................................................................................................1-1
About This Manual ..............................................................................................................................................................1-2
Manual Contents..................................................................................................................................................1-2
Audience ...............................................................................................................................................................1-3
Related Documents .............................................................................................................................................1-3
Using This Manual ...............................................................................................................................................................1-4
Document Conventions .....................................................................................................................................1-4
Management and Administration Overview....................................................................................................................1-5
Getting Technical Support .................................................................................................................................................1-5
CHAPTER 2: USING THE BAR CLI

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................2-1
Accessing CLI management ...............................................................................................................................................2-2
Local Console Interface......................................................................................................................................2-2
Remote Terminal Session...................................................................................................................................2-2
Entering Commands............................................................................................................................................................2-3
Using “no” Form Commands............................................................................................................................................2-3
Navigating Command Modes ............................................................................................................................................2-4
The Mode Structure ............................................................................................................................................2-4
Changing Modes ..................................................................................................................................................2-6
Understanding Errors..........................................................................................................................................................2-7
Unexpected Input Errors ...................................................................................................................................2-7
Incomplete Information Errors ........................................................................................................................2-8
Getting System Help............................................................................................................................................................2-8
Listing Available Commands .............................................................................................................................2-8
Auto-Completing Fields .....................................................................................................................................2-8
Showing Key Bindings........................................................................................................................................2-8
Identifying Interfaces...........................................................................................................................................................2-9
Physical Interfaces ...............................................................................................................................................2-9
Port-Channels.......................................................................................................................................................2-9
Routing Interfaces ...............................................................................................................................................2-9
CLI Documentation Conventions...................................................................................................................................2-10
CHAPTER 3: SWITCH CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Port Configuration Commands .........................................................................................................................................3-1
Switching Configuration Commands................................................................................................................................3-5
Switching Display Commands .........................................................................................................................................3-10
Spanning Tree Configuration Commands .....................................................................................................................3-12
Spanning Tree Display Commands.................................................................................................................................3-21
System Information and Statistics Commands..............................................................................................................3-30
CHAPTER 4: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Port-Channel Commands ...................................................................................................................................................4-1
VLAN Management Commands.......................................................................................................................................4-7
MAC Filtering Commands ...............................................................................................................................................4-16
LACP Protocol Commands .............................................................................................................................................4-19
Protocol-Based VLAN Commands ................................................................................................................................4-20
IGMP Commands..............................................................................................................................................................4-24
Dot1P Commands .............................................................................................................................................................4-28
VLAN Display Commands ..............................................................................................................................................4-30
CHAPTER 5: PROTOCOL INDEPENDENT ROUTING COMMANDS

General Routing Configuration Commands....................................................................................................................5-1
General Routing Display Commands ...............................................................................................................................5-6
ARP Configuration Commands.........................................................................................................................................5-9
ARP Display Commands ..................................................................................................................................................5-13
BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration Commands ..........................................................................................................5-16
BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands......................................................................................................................5-18
vi
CHAPTER 6: RIP ROUTING COMMANDS

RIP Configuration Commands ..........................................................................................................................................6-1
System-Level RIP Commands...........................................................................................................................6-1
Interface-level RIP Commands .........................................................................................................................6-6
RIP Display Commands......................................................................................................................................................6-9
CHAPTER 7: OSPF ROUTING COMMANDS

OSPF Configuration Commands ......................................................................................................................................7-1
System-Level OSPF Commands .......................................................................................................................7-1
Interface-Level OSPF Commands..................................................................................................................7-17
OSPF Display Commands................................................................................................................................................7-22
Interface-Level Monitoring Commands ........................................................................................................7-31
CHAPTER 8: VRRP ROUTING COMMANDS

VRRP Configuration Commands......................................................................................................................................8-1
VRRP Display Commands .................................................................................................................................................8-5
CHAPTER 9: MULTICAST COMMANDS

Multicast Configuration Commands.................................................................................................................................9-1
System-Level Commands ...................................................................................................................................9-1
Interface-Level Commands................................................................................................................................9-7
Multicast Query and Trace Commands .........................................................................................................9-16
Multicast Display Commands ..........................................................................................................................................9-18
CHAPTER 10: DHCP SERVER COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter...................................................................................................................................................10-1
DHCP Server Configuration Commands ......................................................................................................................10-1
DHCP Pool Configuration...............................................................................................................................................10-3
DHCP Server Display Commands..................................................................................................................................10-8
DHCP Server Clear Commands................................................................................................................................... 10-12
CHAPTER 11: SESSION CONTROL

Session Control Commands .............................................................................................................................................11-1
Session Monitoring and Display Commands.................................................................................................................11-9
vii
CHAPTER 12: HTTP AND SSH CONFIGURATION

Secure HTTP Commands.................................................................................................................................................12-1
Secure Shell (SSH) Commands ........................................................................................................................................12-4
CHAPTER 13: SNMP COMMANDS

SNMP Configuration Commands ...................................................................................................................................13-1
SNMP Display Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-12
CHAPTER 14: ACCESS CONTROL LISTS

ACL Control Commands..................................................................................................................................................14-1
CHAPTER 15: DEVICE UTILITIES

Utility Commands ..............................................................................................................................................................15-1
System Identification Commands ...................................................................................................................15-1
General System Commands.............................................................................................................................15-2
System Clock Commands .............................................................................................................................................. 15-14
Manual System Clock Setting........................................................................................................................ 15-14
Automatic System Clock Setting .................................................................................................................. 15-15
Timezone and Daylight Savings ................................................................................................................... 15-19
Clock and SNTP Display Commands......................................................................................................... 15-20
APPENDIX A: LIST OF CLI COMMANDS
viii
Chapter 1
Introduction
This guide provides administration and control information for the Pannaway
Technologies Broadband Aggregation Router (BAR). The features and commands
described in this Administration Guide are available on all Broadband Aggregation
Router platforms supplied by Pannaway Technologies.
Figure 1-1. The Pannaway BAR-GE12
The BAR Administration Guide covers the configuration and management of a BAR
that has been installed and powered up. Instructions for BAR physical installation and
initialization are provided in the Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Router Installation Guide.
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for taking the time to read the BAR Administration Guide. This manual
contains descriptions of BAR capabilities and instructions for configuring, monitoring,
and managing the BAR as a part of an active telecommunications network.
Contents of this This chapter provides information about the manual itself, a list of the chapters and
Chapter: appendices, and instructions for using the manual and the Pannaway documentation set
to your best advantage.
This chapter contains the following sections:
Topic on page
1.2 About This Manual
Using This Manual

1-2
1-4
About This Management and Administration Overview 1-5
Manual
Getting Technical Support 1-5
1.2 About This Manual

The following information describes the BAR Administration Guide, the contents of its
chapters, and the conventions it uses to present information.
Manual Contents This manual contains the following chapters:

Chapter 2, “Using the BAR CLI”, describes the BAR Command Line Interface (CLI) and
provides instructions and guidelines for using it to configure and manage the BAR. This
chapter includes an explanation of the presentation format used for all CLI commands
in the BAR Administration Guide.
Chapter 3, “Switch Configuration Commands”, lists commands that control and configure
the operation of the BAR’s network interface ports, switching fabric, and other network
switching operations.
Chapter 4, “VLAN Configuration Commands”, describes the commands that are used to
create Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and to set up filtering and forwarding
associations for those VLANs. The chapter also provides descriptions of commands
that monitor the operation of VLANs in the BAR.
Chapter 5, “Protocol Independent Routing Commands”, deals with the administration of
Internet Protocol routing settings in the BAR. This chapter provides information on
static route configuration, general IP routing settings, and the monitoring of IP routes.
Chapter 6, “RIP Routing Commands” presents the commands that configure the
operation of the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the BAR.
Chapter 7, “OSPF Routing Commands”, lists and describes the commands that control
Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing on the BAR. The commands in this section
set up and maintain associations between OSPF routers in the BAR’s connected
networks, and enable the BAR to participate as an OSPF router.
Chapter 8, “VRRP Routing Commands”, provides descriptions of the commands that
configure the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) settings of the BAR.
Chapter 9, “Multicast Commands”, presents the commands that configure Multicast
routing on the BAR, including the creation of multicast groups, the administration of
group memberships and notifications, and the operation of protocols such as the
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) on the BAR.
Chapter 10, “DHCP Server Commands”, lists the commands that enable the BAR to act as
a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The commands in this
chapter are important if the BAR will be controlling the assignment of network
addresses to connected devices and hosts.
1-2
Chapter 11, “Session Control”, details the commands that provide information about
active management sessions and the commands that give control over those sessions.
The commands in this chapter detail changing automated session timeouts, local
console port operation settings, and the administrative disconnection of active CLI
sessions.
Chapter 12, “HTTP and SSH Configuration”, presents the commands that control Secure 1.2
HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTPs) and Secure Shell (SSH) operation in the BAR. About This
These protocols are used to manage the BAR through web clients (Secure HTTP) or Manual
remote shells (SSH).
Chapter 13, “SNMP Commands”, presents and describes the commands that configure
and manage the operation of the BAR’s Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) management client. This chapter provides information on configuring the
BAR to send SNMP messages to a remote station, the modification of SNMP
communities, and the activation of SNMP traps.
Chapter 14, “Access Control Lists” describes the creation and modification of Access
Control Lists (ACLs) and rules for the BAR.
Chapter 15, “Device Utilities” provides descriptions of CLI commands that perform
utility functions on the BAR, including custom naming, configuration clearing, system
log operations, and file and configuration transfer.
Appendix A, “List of CLI Commands”, is an alphabetical list of all the CLI commands
presented in this document with page number references for their descriptions in the
main text. This list of commands may be useful for researching a particular command
or for finding a known command in the manual.
The manual also provides a topical Index, Table of Contents, and applicable notices and
statements of rights.
Audience This manual is intended for use by the following audience groups:
• Network Administrators and Engineers responsible for the configuration and
set-up of the Pannaway BAR.
• Network Administration and Management personnel responsible for
performing add/change operations, revising configurations, and rolling out new
services or capabilities.
• Network Management personnel tasked with tracking configurations,
monitoring operational statistics, and performing periodic examinations of
system operation.
• Troubleshooters attempting to isolate and correct network issues that may
involve the BAR.
The instructions and information in this manual assume that the network administrator
or engineer working with the BAR is knowledgeable about the signaling, routing, and
networking technologies being implemented. Further, the guide assumes familiarity
with the capabilities of the BAR itself.
Related Documents The BAR Administration Guide focuses on the configuration and management of the
BAR in a functioning network, and does not provide information about other
Pannaway products or about physical installation and physical plant troubleshooting.
Information on these topics may be found in other documents produced by Pannaway
Technologies.
1-3
Other Documents Other information about the configuration of the BAR, and the administration of the
Pannaway Service Convergence Network, may be found in the following documents:
• Pannaway BAR Installation Guide
• Pannaway BAR-GE12 Quick Installation Card
1.3 •
•
•
Pannaway BAS Installation and Administration Guide
Pannaway PBG User Guide
Pannaway RGN-ADSL User Guide
Using This
Manual Obtaining Documents Pannaway Technologies, Incorporated maintains its own document sets and provides
copies of documents to resellers and to supported customers directly. Pannaway
maintains current versions of the documentation set, and can supply versions applicable
to particular product releases if required.
If you require Pannaway documentation, you may call Pannaway Technologies to
request a documentation set. The documentation set can be provided in CD-ROM
format, or may be downloaded from the Pannaway Technologies support and service
web site.
1.3 Using This Manual

This Administration Guide provides the information and instructions needed to
prepare, install, and activate a Pannaway Technologies Broadband Aggregation Router,
or BAR. To make the best use of this document, an installation or service engineer must
understand the presentation and formatting of the document.
Document Throughout this document, certain presentations of text and other items are used
Conventions consistently.
Cautions This document provides text callouts that announce potential hazards. The callouts are
used to draw attention to important safety or performance issues. The type of hazard or
danger is dependent upon the type of callout that is provided.
CAUTION: Cautions provide notification that an action, if taken, may damage the
BAR or other equipment, cause degradation of network performance, or result in
unintentional misconfiguration of the BAR.
In all cases, pay particular attention to the Caution callouts. Other types of warning and
caution callouts may be found in the text, and should always be read before proceeding
with a step or action.
Notes and Tips The Note and Tip callouts in the text supply additional information to make
installation, management, and configuration of the BAR easier. These notes and tips
may not apply to all conditions or implementations.
NOTE: This format is used for Notes. Notes are used to provide additional
information concerning associated steps or actions.
TIP: This format is used for Tips. Tips are used to provide advanced information
which will enhance the understanding of the task in the future.
1-4
CLI Presentation All CLI commands presented in this document follow a consistent organization and use
a particular formatting. A description of this formatting is provided in Chapter 2, “Using
the BAR CLI”, which gives a general introduction to the Command Line Interface’s
capabilities and to the command descriptions in this Guide.
1.4 Management and Administration Overview 1.4

The Pannaway Technologies BAR is a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) router that manages the Management
converged traffic of up to ten Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Switch (BAS) systems and
or other Gigabit Ethernet network devices. The BAR is a key component of the Administration
Pannaway Service Convergence Network (SCN), and a robust, multifunctional router Overview
for many multicast networking situations.
Configuring the BAR for operation in the network involves setting up the behavior of
the device interfaces and ports, configuring switch settings (including Spanning Tree
operation), developing Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) designations and filtering
rules, and specifying routing behavior for unicast and broadcast communications, as
well as creating multicast groups.
Further configuration includes the specification of SNMP, Secure HTTP, and Secure
Shell management associations and behaviors, setting authentication parameters, user
accounts and passwords, and Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) services
and message handling.
The specific configuration and management of a multi-protocol router is highly
dependent upon the installation site and the protocols, users, and implementations to
be supported by the router. In this BAR Administration Guide, the configuration
information is grouped by technology or protocol, and the commands presented may
or may not apply to each specific implementation.
Once the BAR is operating properly, management tasks focus more closely on changing
and reconfiguring existing settings in order to roll out or roll back services and
capabilities. Monitoring the operation of the BAR and collecting statistics for interfaces,
groups, or protocols is also important for ongoing management, and these tasks are
described in this Administration Guide.
1.5 Getting Technical Support

If you experience any difficulties installing or maintaining your Pannaway Technologies
products you can contact the Pannaway Technologies Technical Assistance Center
(TAC) for support.
All Pannaway Technologies contracted customers have direct access to Pannaway
Technologies’ TAC, staffed with our experienced engineers. The TAC provides the
following services:
• Technical Assistance Center Support: For questions regarding product
functionality and services, please call 877-726-6299 (toll-free) or 603-766-5175
(long distance).
• Emergency After Hours Support: Available to our service contract
customers 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year.
• E-mail Support: E-Mail support is provided with a guaranteed 24 hour
acknowledgement. E-mail to [email protected].
For registered customers, Pannaway Technologies also provides a full self-service
support portal at http://www.pannaway.com/support/index.cfm. Log-in using your
provided registration information.
1-5
We stand ready at all times to assist you in maintaining your network.

Whenever possible, having the following information available when you report an
issue will help expedite resolution time:
1.5 •
•
•
Severity level of the issue
A brief problem description
Current firmware version
Getting • Pertinent log files
Technical • Serial numbers of affected hardware
Support • Pertinent network traces
• History of any network changes
Each issue reported to Pannaway Technologies will have an associated Service Request
(SR) number assigned. Be sure to obtain your SR number to properly track your issue.
For first-time service requests via web or e-mail, your SR number will be supplied to
you upon our initial response.
1-6
Chapter 2
Using the BAR CLI
This chapter explains the use of the Command Line Interface and the conventions used
in this document to present and describe CLI commands.
The Pannaway BAR provides a mode-based Command Line Interface that can be used
for the administration and monitoring of all BAR operations. Every configurable setting
in the BAR may be accessed and modified through the system CLI.
2.1 Contents of this Chapter

The information in this chapter describes the use of the system CLI to perform BAR
management. The following information is presented in this chapter:
Topic on page
Accessing CLI management 2-2
Entering Commands 2-3
Using “no” Form Commands 2-3
Navigating Command Modes 2-4
Understanding Errors 2-7
Getting System Help 2-8
Identifying Interfaces 2-9
CLI Documentation Conventions 2-10

2.2 Accessing CLI management

The Pannaway BAR CLI can be accessed with a terminal or terminal emulator either
locally or remotely. The interface, presentation and options available are the same no
matter which access method is used.
2.2 Local Console The BAR CLI can be accessed by a terminal or emulator connected to the front panel
Accessing CLI
Interface Console port of the BAR. This DB9 serial interface provides a direct, local connection
management to the system CLI.
The initial configuration of the BAR, as described in the Pannaway BAR Installation
Guide, must be performed through the front panel console connection. Only after the
completion of the minimum field configuration can the BAR be accessed by a remote
terminal session.
Instructions for connecting a terminal to the BAR console port and initiating a CLI
management session are provided in the Pannaway BAR Installation Guide. Once
connected, all management operations can be performed through the local connection
as presented in this Administration Guide. The default settings for a local console
management session are as follows:
• 9600 bps
• 8 data bits, 1 stop bit
• no parity
Remote Terminal The BAR CLI responds to remote, in-band terminal sessions. These sessions connect
Session to the BAR through existing and operating network interfaces, and can be initiated
remotely by any station that knows the BAR’s IP address and has a valid network
connection to any of its operating interfaces.
To establish a remote terminal session, a network management station must open a
Telnet or SSH connection to the BAR’s IP address - either via a terminal emulation
session or directly from the management station’s command line (if supported by
the OS).
Once the session is established, the BAR will prompt for a username and password
combination. The field configuration of the Pannaway BAR includes modifying the
default system password for improved security. Contact the responsible field installation
personnel to determine the password configured for the BAR.
A successful login places the terminal session in the “user exec” mode. From this mode,
some BAR statistics and settings may be examined or changed. To perform more
sensitive or detailed configuration, it is necessary to move through the various
command modes of the BAR CLI. These modes, and the means of changing between
them, are described in Section 2.5 , “Navigating Command Modes”.
2-2
2.3 Entering Commands

All CLI commands consist of standard characters and numbers typed in a single line
and submitted with the ENTER or RETURN key. Some commands are single words or
short groups of words, while other commands provide for user-entered parameters that
describe operation or settings.
A command in the BAR CLI will always contain a base “command” field.
2.3
Entering
Commands The “command” portion of a CLI command is the identification of the command itself. Commands
This foundation of the command identifies what operation the BAR is to perform.
When a command is supplied to a management session, this command portion is
parsed by the CLI and compared to a table of known commands (the command tree).
Parameters A command may also require that certain values or settings be supplied. If the
parameters are needed for the command to be processed by the CLI, they are
considered mandatory parameters. If the additional parameters perform actions that
are not essential to the command, or that provide additional control information, they
are considered optional parameters.
A command parsed by the BAR CLI is examined for any mandatory parameters and
optional parameters that may specify a particular use of the command, or to determine
what settings to apply to the command. The CLI documentation provides indications
of both mandatory and optional parameters for every command.
Values Many parameters require the submission of values. Values may be alphanumeric strings
describing a configured field, numerical values representing configuration data, or a
combination of the two. Some values require input that falls within a certain acceptable
range. If a value is outside of the range, or provided in the wrong form, the CLI will
produce an error message and ignore the command. In all cases, the CLI
documentation will explain the expected type and acceptable ranges of command
values.
2.4 Using “no” Form Commands

“No” is a specific form of an existing command and does not represent a new or
distinct command. Only the configuration commands are available in the “no” form.
Almost every configuration command has a “no” form. In general, use the “no” form
to reverse the action of a command or reset a value back to the default. For example,
the “no shutdown interface’ configuration command reverses the shutdown of an
interface. Use the command without the keyword no to re-enable a disabled feature or
to enable a feature that is disabled by default.
If a “no” form of a command is available, the CLI documentation will specify the
accepted form of the “no” command and describe the operation of that command.
2-3
2.5 Navigating Command Modes

Configuring and administering the Pannaway BAR requires the use of the command
modes of the CLI. Each mode provides control over a set of functions, interfaces, or
configuration settings in the BAR.
2.5 The Mode Structure The BAR CLI separates groups of control and monitoring commands into modes.
Navigating
These various modes each support specific aspects of BAR software operation. The
Command commands available to an operator at any given point in a management session depend
Modes on the current model of the CLI session. A mode’s commands are not available until
the management session has entered that mode. Once a session enters a mode, the
commands outside of that mode are not available to the management session.
NOTE: The “Privileged Exec” mode is an exception to this rule - in the Privileged
Exec mode, all commands of the “User Exec” mode are available to the
management session.
All CLI sessions begin in the “User Exec” mode. This mode provides a limited number
of commands and control options. Other modes can be reached by moving through the
mode hierarchy, as described in “Changing Modes” on page 2-6.
Figure 2-1. BAR CLI Modes
The BAR CLI provides the following command modes:
User Exec When the operator logs into the CLI, the User Exec mode is the initial mode. The User
Exec mode contains a limited set of commands.
2-4
Privileged Exec To have access to the full suite of commands, the operator must enter the Privileged
Exec mode. The Privileged Exec mode requires password authentication. From
Privileged Exec mode, the operator can issue any Exec command or enter the Global
Configuration mode.
Global Config This mode permits the operator to make modifications to the running configuration.
General setup commands are grouped in this mode. From the Global Configuration
2.5
mode, the operator can enter the System Configuration mode, the Physical Port config, Navigating
the Interface Configuration mode, or the Protocol Specific modes specified below. Command
From the Global Config mode, the operator may enter the following config modes: Modes
VLAN This mode groups all the commands pertaining to VLANs.
Interface Config Many features are enabled for a particular interface. The Interface commands enable or
modify the operation of an interface.
In this mode, a physical port is set up for a specific logical connection operation. The
Interface Config mode provides access to the router interface configuration commands.
Line Config This mode allows the operator to configure the console interface. The operator may
configure the interface from the directly connected console or the virtual terminal used
with a terminal emulation program.
Policy Map Use the policy-map command to access the QoS policy map configuration mode to
configure the QoS policy map.
Policy Class Use the class command to access the QoS policy-classmap mode to configure the QoS
policy map.
Class Map This mode consists of class creation/deletion and matching commands. The class
match commands specify layer 2, layer 3 and general match criteria. Use the class-map
commands to access the QoS class map configuration mode to configure QoS class
maps.
Router Config OSPF In this mode, the operator is allowed to access the router OSPF configuration
commands.
Router Config RIP In this mode, the operator is allowed to access the router RIP configuration commands.
Router Config BGP In this mode, the operator is allowed to access the router BGP4 configuration
commands.
Bwprovisioning Config Use the bwprovisioning command to access the Bandwidth provisioning Config Mode
to configure bandwidth provisioning.
Bwprovisioning - Use the traffic-class command to access the Bandwidth provisioning Config Mode to
Trafficclass configure bandwidth traffic class.
Bwprovisioning- Use the bwallocation command to access the Bandwidth provisioning Config Mode to
bwallocation configure bandwidth allocation.
DHCP Pool Configuration Use the ip dhcp pool <pool-name> command to access the DHCP Pool Config Mode.
2-5
Changing Modes Movement between the various modes is accomplished by submitting commands. To
enter the Privileged Exec mode, for example, the “enable” command is entered at a
User Exec prompt. The system then asks for a password (as the Privileged Exec mode
2.5 is password-secured) and changes the mode. To indicate the new mode, a series of
characters is added to the BAR’s name prompt. This “command suffix” identifies the
mode of the CLI.
Navigating
Command Entering Modes Other mode changes require the submission of specific commands. The table that
Modes follows presents each mode by name, describes the command needed to enter that
mode, and shows the prompt suffix that identifies the mode.
.
Table 2-1. Command Line Interface Modes
Command Mode Access Method Prompt suffix
User Exec This is the first level of access. >

Perform basic tasks and list
system information.
Privileged Exec From the User Exec Mode, #

enter the enable command.
VLAN From the Privileged Exec (Vlan)#

mode, enter the vlan database
command.
Global Config From the Privileged Exec (Config)#

mode, enter the configure
command.
Interface Config From the Global Configuration (Interface-"s/p")#

mode, enter the interface
<slot/port> command.
Line Config From the Global Configuration (line)#

mode, enter the lineconfig
command.
Policy Map From the Global Configuration (Config-policy-map)#

mode, enter the policy map
command.
Policy Class From the Policy Map mode (Config-policy-classmap)#

enter the class command.
Class Map From the Global Config mode, (Config-class-map)#

enter the class-map
command.
Router Config OSPF From the Global Configuration (Config-router)#

mode, enter the router ospf
command
Router Config RIP From the Global Config mode, (Config-router)#

enter the router rip command
Router Config BGP From the Global Config mode, (Config-router bgp)#
enter the router bgp command
Bwprovisioning From the Global Config mode, (Config-bwp)#

enter the bwprovisioning
command
2-6
Table 2-1. Command Line Interface Modes (Continued)
Command Mode Access Method Prompt suffix
Bwprovisioning - From the Bwprovisioning mode (Config-bwp - trafficclass)#

Trafficclass
Bwprovisioning -
enter the traffic-class
command
From the Bwprovisioning mode (Config-bwp - bwallocation)#

2.6
BWallocation enter the bwallocation Understanding
command Errors
DHCP Pool From the Global Configuration (Config-dhcp-pool)
Configuration mode, enter the ip dhcp pool
<pool-name> command.
Exiting Modes A management session may exit any CLI mode by either “backing out” to the next
highest mode, or by jumping directly to the User Exec mode. The following methods
are used to close and exit CLI modes:
• Type the “exit” command to leave a CLI mode and back out to the previous
mode. For example, entering the “exit” command when in the VLAN mode
will back the session out to the Privileged Exec mode.
• Press the CONTROL and Z keys on the terminal keyboard to send a session
reset signal to the BAR. If the CLI is in a configuration mode, it will “back out”
to the Privileged Exec mode. If the CLI is in Privileged Exec mode or another
non-configuration mode, the CLI will immediately exit the current CLI mode
and return the session to the User Exec mode.
• Type “logout” at the User Exec or Privileged Exec mode prompt to close the
terminal session and exit CLI management.
2.6 Understanding Errors

When a command is parsed by the CLI, it is compared to a tree of expected commands,
parameters, and values. If the CLI encounters a portion of any command that cannot be
parsed, or that violates the acceptable ranges of a field, it produces an error message.
Unexpected Input The error messages produced by the BAR indicate the point at which the parsing of the
Errors command was interrupted. This point may show a misspelling of a command, or may
show that a parameter that is not part of the command was supplied mistakenly.
For instance, supposing the operator intends to enter the show arp brief routing
command, but accidentally types “show arpp brief”. The command parser would
display the following error message:
(Pannaway BAR>show arpp brief

^
$% Invalid input detected at ‘^’ marker.
The user could then re-enter the command with the correct spelling, submit the
command, and get the summary arp information for the BAR (the expected output of
the command).
2-7
Incomplete If the CLI receives a command from the management session that lacks a required field
Information Errors or needs additional specificity, the CLI will produce an incomplete information error
message. This type of error message indicates only that the command requires some
2.7 additional input from the user. Following the error message, the command as it was
submitted is automatically entered at the current system prompt.
If, for example, an operator submitted the port-channel <name> CLI command, which
Getting System
creates a VLAN port channel, but did not provide the <name> parameter, the CLI
Help
would respond as shown below:
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel
Incorrect input! Use 'port-channel <name>'.
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#
The operator could then refer to the documentation for the command, enter an
appropriate name for the new port channel, and re-submit the command.
2.7 Getting System Help

The BAR CLI system provides means for getting additional information or direction
from the CLI itself. These system help options provide a limited set of information to
give direction and reminders. They are not intended to replace the information in this
Administration Guide.
Listing Available All modes of the BAR CLI provide access to a list of available commands for the
Commands current mode. To display the list of commands that may be entered, type the question
mark (“?”) character at the command prompt. A list of commands, in alphabetical
order, will be displayed.
Auto-Completing The BAR CLI supports an auto-completion function that can supply the full text of a
Fields command component or parameter. Auto-completion examines the content of the
current command line entry and compares any partially-completed command input to
the table of expected input for the command. If a match is found, the CLI can fill in the
remaining portion of the element or parameter, and the operator can continue typing or
submitting the command.
To call on the auto-completion function, press the Space Bar of the management client
after typing a portion of the command. If there is enough text available that the CLI
interface can determine the item or argument being entered, the text of that item will be
automatically filled in. If the information at the end of the command is insufficient for
the BAR CLI to make a completion determination, the CLI will simply add a space to
the current line of text.
The CLI cannot perform auto-completion for operator-supplied parameters such as
addresses, names, or configuration values.
Showing Key At any CLI prompt, the operator may type the “help” command to show a list of the
Bindings special keys that the CLI session supports. These special keys offer shortcuts for
common or useful operations, such as ending terminal sessions, moving the cursor
through a line of command text, or other special operations.
2-8
2.8 Identifying Interfaces

The BAR CLI uses a two-part naming method to specify single physical and virtual
ports and interfaces on the system. In the documentation of each CLI command,
individual interfaces are identified by a combination of a “slot” number and a port
number. An interface could be identified in a CLI command or a statistics screen as
“1/5”, indicating slot one, port five. 2.8
As the BAR is not a modular chassis, the term “slot” is an abstraction of the separate Identifying
subgroups of physical and virtual ports in the BAR. The BAR defines three groups of Interfaces
ports, or “slots”:
• Physical ports on the rear panel of the BAR, including the SFP and RJ45 ports.
• Port-channels (Link Aggregations) created during the administration of
aggregated links.
• Routing slots created during the administration of routing in the BAR.
The sections below describe the nature and numbering of the slots, and the ranges
of ports that exist or can be defined in them.
Physical Interfaces The physical interfaces of the BAR are grouped into slot “0” (zero). This slot contains
all the addressable physical interfaces in the BAR, including the Gigabit Ethernet Small
Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver ports and the two fixed-media RJ45 ports.
Ports in slot 0 are numbered from 1 to 12, with ports 1 through 10 representing the SFP
ports, and ports 11 and 12 representing the Cat5 10/100/1000BASE-T ports. The
numbering scheme for the ports corresponds to the numbering of the connectors
printed on the rear panel of the BAR chassis.
Port-Channels If link aggregation is enabled on the BAR, the slot/port designation is also used to
identify the link aggregations, or “port-channels”. All port-channels in the BAR are part
of slot “1” (one). This slot is a “logical”, or virtual slot, which is used by the BAR to
associate, concentrate, and direct traffic to and from an attached LAG-capable device.
Ports in slot 1 are numbered from 1 (one) to 6 (six). Port-channel port numbers are
automatically generated by the BAR through the use of the port-channel <name>
command, as described on page 4-2. Any currently defined port-channel interfaces can
be seen by using the command show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39.
NOTE: If the BAR being managed is operating with version 1.0.x firmware, the
Port-channel interfaces are assigned to ports 1 through 8.
Routing Interfaces If routing is enabled on a physical BAR interface, a routing interface is also created. All
routing interfaces in the BAR are members of slot “3” (three). Routing interfaces are
logical, or virtual interfaces that are used for the direction of routed traffic in the BAR.
Ports in slot 3 are numbered from 1 (one) to 16 (sixteen). The logical ports are
automatically generated by the BAR when routing is enabled on a particular BAR
interface.
NOTE: If the BAR being managed is operating with version 1.0.x firmware, the
routing interfaces are members of slot “2”.
2-9
2.9 CLI Documentation Conventions

All commands in this Administration Guide are presented in the same fashion and
follow the same basic conventions for showing their content. Each command is
described following a “command heading” that identifies the components and content
2.9 of the command.

The following example shows the appearance and types of information that may be
CLI provided in a command heading:
Documentation
Conventions command name {mandatory | parameter} <value> [optional | parameter <optional value>]
The command heading begins with the command name (in this example, “command
name”). This is the basic form of the command. Any text in the heading that is shown
without any brackets, braces, or parenthesis around it is a mandatory part of the
command, and must be typed exactly as shown, and in the same relative position to
other elements in the command.
TIP: Commands are presented on color-coded backgrounds to make locating them

easier: Configuration commands are white-on-violet, while display and monitoring
commands are white-on-gray.
If the command uses additional parameters (called tokens or arguments by some

resources), they are enclosed in special text characters that indicate the type of
parameter and its use in the command.
Angle Brackets < > Angle brackets indicate a value, usually a numerical value or a string of alphanumeric
characters, that the operator must supply. An item in angle brackets must be provided to
a command unless it is specifically connected to, and enclosed in the square brackets of,
an optional parameter.
Square Brackets [ ] Square brackets show that the items enclosed in the brackets are optional parameters
that may be used. These optional parameters provide additional detail or greater
customization of a command or setting.
Curved Braces { } The use of curved braces around a value, command text, or a group of selections
indicates that the items inside the braces are mandatory.
Selections | If the brackets or braces contain multiple items separated by the “pipe” symbol ( | ),
those items are selections. When entering the CLI command, a value or item from the
selections provided is expected.
The following page shows an example of the CLI documentation format as it is
presented in the rest of the BAR Administration Guide.
2-10
command name [mandatory parameter] <value> {optional | parameter <optional value>}
2.9
Summary The Summary presents a short description of the command, and is provided as an aid
to scanning the command documentation.
Required Mode The Required Mode information lists the operational mode that must be active in order
CLI
to submit the command.
Documentation
User-Entered [mandatory parameter] Conventions
Parameters Each mandatory and optional parameter, its meaning, and any description of how it is
used is presented in this section.
<value>
Any values that the command uses are also listed here, with descriptions of the units,
format, and acceptable ranges of the value.
Description The Description field presents a more detailed explanation of the command. If any
additional information is useful for understanding the command, the effects of the
command, or calculating values that should be used, that information will be
presented here.
“no” Form no command name

If a “no” form of the command is available, it will be presented here. The description
following the “no” command will explain the effects of the “no” command.
Defaults The Defaults section identifies the default condition or settings of the command. If the
mandatory parameters, optional parameters, or values have default states in the BAR,
those items will be presented here. Similarly, if a command activates or deactivates a
particular function in the BAR, the default state of that function will be identified.
Example This portion of the command documentation shows an example of the command as it
would be entered in a CLI session. If the command returns formatted output or
statistics, an example of that will be shown beneath the command.
(Pannaway BAR) # command name parameter 255
Command Output Commands that provide statistics or system configuration information will provide this
Command Output section. This section lists the items shown on screen and explains
the importance or meaning of the information. If the information requires additional
description, a table may be provided.
Screen Item Meaning, representation, or description.
Screen Item Field explanation or description.
Display Text Information about the displayed text.
Related Commands If a command has any other commands directly associated with it, those commands will
be listed here, with a reference to the chapter and page number where the command is
described.
2-11
2.9
CLI
Documentation
Conventions
2-12
Chapter 3
Switch Configuration
Commands
This chapter provides a list and descriptions of the switch configuration and set up
commands used to configure and control switching, port, and network behavior in the
Pannaway BAR.

This chapter contains CLI commands that configure and manage the operation of the
interface ports on the BAR, the operation of the Spanning Tree Protocol for switching,
and switch recovery from broadcast storms and other flow problems.
Topic on page
Port Configuration Commands 3-1
Switching Configuration Commands 3-5
Switching Display Commands 3-10
Spanning Tree Configuration Commands 3-12
Spanning Tree Display Commands 3-21
System Information and Statistics Commands 3-30
3.2 Port Configuration Commands

The commands in this section control the operational mode of the Gigabit Ethernet
interfaces of the BAR.
auto-negotiate
Summary Set the interface to auto-negotiate.
Required Mode Interface Config
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command configures the current interface to auto-negotiation. This allows the
interface to react to the network it is connected to and negotiate the highest allowable
throughput.
“no” Form no auto-negotiate

The “no” form of this command disables auto-negotiation on a port.
Defaults Mode enabled
Example
3.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/3)#auto-negotiate
Related Commands auto-negotiate all on page 3-2

Port speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2
Configuration show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36
Commands show running-config on page 15-10
auto-negotiate all
Summary Set all interfaces to auto-negotiation
Required Mode Global Config
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets all interfaces on the Pannaway BAR to auto-negotiation mode. This
allows the interface to react to the network it is connected to and negotiate the highest
allowable throughput.
“no” Form no auto-negotiate all

The “no” form of this command disables auto-negotiation on all ports.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#auto-negotiate all
Related Commands auto-negotiate on page 3-1

speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2
show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36
show running-config on page 15-10
speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex}
Summary Manually set speed and duplex mode for current interface.
User-Entered <portspeed>
Parameters The interface operational mode to set the selected interface to. Valid choices are as
follows:
• 1000: 1000BASE-T
• 100: 100BASE-T
• 10: 10BASE-T
full-duplex
If the full duplex parameter is specified, the interface is set to full-duplex mode.
3-2
half-duplex
If the half-duplex parameter is supplied, the interface is configured for half-duplex
operation.
NOTE: Half-duplex mode is available for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T port speeds
only. The 1000BASE-T port speed operates in full-duplex mode only. 3.2
Port
Configuration
Description This command sets the speed and duplex setting for the currently configured interface.
Commands
NOTE: If the port is currently set to auto-negotiate, you get a message informing
you that auto-negotiation must be disabled to change the physical port
configuration.
You cannot change the physical attributes of ports currently in a port-channel
(LAG).
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/10)#speed 10 full-duplex

speed all <portspeed> on page 3-3
speed all <portspeed>
Summary Manually force speed and duplex mode for all interfaces.
User-Entered <portspeed>:
Parameters The interface operational mode to set the BAR interfaces to. Valid choices are as
follows:
• 1000: 1000BASE-T
• 100: 100BASE-T
• 10: 10BASE-T
full-duplex
If the full duplex parameter is specified, all BAR interfaces are set to full-duplex mode.
half-duplex
If the half-duplex parameter is supplied, all interfaces are configured for half-duplex
operation.
NOTE: Half-duplex mode is available for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T port speeds
only. The 1000BASE-T port speed operates in full-duplex mode only.
3-3
Description This command sets the speed and duplex setting for all Gigabit Ethernet capable
interfaces in the BAR.
3.2
NOTE: If the port is currently set to auto-negotiate, you get a message informing
you that auto-negotiation must be disabled to change the physical port
configuration.
Port You cannot change the physical attributes of ports currently in a port-channel
Configuration (LAG).
Commands
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#speed all 100 full-duplex

shutdown
Summary Turn off the current port.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command administratively disables the currently selected port of the BAR. The
port will not participate in the connected network, but the Link and Activity LEDs will
continue to show the status of the physical connection to any attached media.
“no” Form no shutdown

The “no” form of this command enables an interface that was previously shut down.
Defaults Port enabled (no shutdown)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/9)#shutdown
Related Commands shutdown all on page 3-4
shutdown all
Summary Turn off all BAR interface ports.
Required Mode Global Config.
User-Entered None
Parameters
3-4
Description This command places all the network interface ports of the BAR into a disabled mode.
When in this mode, the interfaces will not participate in their connected networks. Link
and Activity LEDs on the BAR will show the physical status of the attached media but
the ports will pass no traffic.
“no” Form no shutdown all

The “no” form of this command enables all ports that had been administratively
3.3
disabled with the shutdown command. Switching
Configuration
Defaults Ports enabled (no shutdown) Commands
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#shutdown all
Related Commands shutdown on page 3-4
3.3 Switching Configuration Commands

The following CLI commands configure the switching operation of the BAR.
bridge aging-time <age-time> [<fdbid> | all]
Summary Set the bridge aging time.
User-Entered <age-time>
Parameters The bridge entry aging time to be configured, measured in seconds. This value may be
from 10 to 1000000.
[<fdbid> | al]]
The selection of either the forwarding database ID of a particular forwarding database,
or “all”, specifying all forwarding databases on the BAR.
Description This command configures the forwarding database address aging timeout in seconds.
“no” Form no bridge aging-time [<fdbid> |all]

The “no” form of this command restores the forwarding database aging timeout to its
default 300 seconds.
Defaults Age-time: 300
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bridge aging-time 350 all
Related Commands show forwardingdb agetime [fdbid | all] on page 3-40
3-5
mtu <mtu-size>
Summary Configure MTU size.
3.3 Required Mode Interface Config
Switching User-Entered <mtu-size>

Configuration Parameters The MTU size, in octets, that physical and logical switch interfaces will use. Values from
Commands 1522 to 9216 are allowable.
Description This command sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size (in bytes) for physical
and port-channel (LAG) interfaces.
“no” Form no mtu

The “no” form of this command resets the MTU size to its default 1522 bytes.
Defaults MTU-size: 1522
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#mtu 1545
network mac-type {local | burnedin}
Summary Set the type of MAC address the BAR will use.
Required Mode Privileged Exec
User-Entered [local | burnedin]

Parameters The selection of the MAC address the BAR will present to the network. If the “local”
setting is specified, the administratively configured (soft) MAC address is used. If the
“burnedin” setting is specified, the factory-set (hard) MAC address is used.
Description This command specifies whether the burned-in MAC address or the locally-
administered MAC address is used.
“no” Form no network mac type

The “no” form of the command resets the value of the MAC address to its default.
Defaults MAC-type: burnedin
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #network mac-type local
Related Commands network mac-address <macaddr> on page 3-7

show network on page 3-10
3-6
network mac-address <macaddr>
Summary Set a locally-administered MAC address.
Required Mode Privileged Exec 3.3

User-Entered <macaddr> Switching
Parameters Specifies the locally administered MAC address to be used by the BAR. The parameter Configuration
is expressed in hexadecimal format, and is subject to the following rules: Commands
Bit 6 of byte 0 (called the U/L or “Universal/Local” bit) indicates whether the address
is universally administered (‘b0’) or locally administered (‘b1’). A locally administered
address must have bit 6 On (‘b1’).
Bit 7 of byte 0 (called the I/G or “Individual/Group” bit) indicates whether the
destination address is an individual address (‘b0’) or a group address (‘b1’). A locally
administered address must have bit 7 Off (‘b0’).
The second character of the twelve character macaddr parameter must be 2, 6, A or E.
Description This command sets a locally administered MAC addresses for the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #network mac-address 5a:12:34:a3:25:c3
Related Commands network mac-type {local | burnedin} on page 3-6

network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes]
Summary Set a self-configuration protocol for the BAR.
User-Entered {none | bootp | dhcp}

Parameters The network protocol that the BAR will use to obtain network addressing and
configuration information at initialization.
• “bootp” indicates that the switch will periodically send requests to a Bootstrap
Protocol (BootP) server for boot-up configuration information.
• “dhcp” indicates that the switch will send requests to a DHCP server until a
response is received.
• “none” indicates that the switch should be manually configured with IP
information.
[yes]
Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting
you to confirm your action.
3-7
Description This command specifies the network configuration protocol to be used. If you modify
this value, the change is effective immediately, and any current IP configuration is
discarded. For example, switching from dhcp to none will release the DHCP-assigned
IP address.
3.3 “no” Form None
Switching Defaults None

Configuration
Example
Commands
(Pannaway BAR) #network protocol none
Changing protocol mode will reset ip configuration.

Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n)y
Related Commands network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>] on page 3-8

network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>]
Summary Set IP addressing information.
User-Entered <ipaddr>
Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, to assign to the BAR’s IP interface.
<netmask>
The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, that identifies the network and host
portions of the IP address.
<gateway>
The default gateway for the IP interface of the BAR. This value is the IP address, in
dotted decimal notation, of the gateway interface.
Description This command sets the IP address, subnet mask and gateway of the BAR. The IP
address and the gateway must be on the same subnet. The network protocol must be set
to “none” to manually configure IP network information.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #network parms 172.16.1.149 255.255.0.0 172.16.1.1
Related Commands network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes] on page 3-7
3-8
storm-control broadcast
Summary Enable broadcast storm recovery mode.
Required Mode Global Config 3.3

User-Entered None Switching
Parameters Configuration
Description This command enables broadcast storm recovery mode. If the mode is enabled,
Commands
broadcast storm recovery with high and low thresholds is implemented.
The threshold implementation follows a percentage pattern. If the broadcast traffic on
any Ethernet port exceeds the high threshold percentage (as represented in “Broadcast
Storm Recovery Thresholds” table) of the link speed, the switch discards the broadcast
traffic until the broadcast traffic returns to the low threshold percentage or less. The full
implementation is depicted in the table below:
Link Speed High Low
10 Mbps 20 10
100 Mbps 5 2
1000 Mbps 5 2
“no” Form no switchconfig storm-control broadcast

The “no” form of this command disables broadcast storm recovery mode.
Defaults Mode disabled
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#storm-control broadcast
storm-control flowcontrol
Summary Set 802.3x flow control for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables 802.3x flow control for the switch.
NOTE: This command only applies to full-duplex mode ports.
“no” Form no storm-control flowcontrol

The “no” form of this command disables 802.3x flow control for the switch. This is the
default state.
3-9
Example
3.4
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#storm-control flowcontrol
3.4 Switching Display Commands

Switching
The commands in this section provide statistics and configuration information about
Display
the BAR’s switching interfaces and settings.
Commands
show network
Summary Show network interface configuration.
Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays configuration settings associated with the switch’s network
interface. The network interface is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity
with the switch via any of the switch’s network (Gigabit Ethernet) ports. The
configuration parameters associated with the switch’s network interface do not affect
the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show network
IP Address..................................... 10.10.4.137
Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway................................ 10.10.4.1
Burned In MAC Address.......................... 00:0A:9F:50:00:18
Locally Administered MAC Address............... 5A:12:34:A3:25:C3
MAC Address Type............................... Burned In
Network Configuration Protocol Current......... DHCP
Management VLAN ID............................. 1
Web Mode....................................... Enable
Java Mode...................................... Enable
Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the show network command:
IP Address The IP address of the interface. The factory default

value is 0.0.0.0.
Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for this interface. The factory
default value is 0.0.0.0.
Default Gateway The default gateway for this IP interface. The factory
default value is 0.0.0.0.
Burned In MAC Address The burned in MAC address used for in-band
connectivity.
3-10
Locally Administered MAC Address The local MAC address that has been adminstratively
configured for in-band connectivity (if set);
00:00:00:00:00:00 indicates a local MAC address is
not set.
MAC Address Type The currrently used MAC address type for in-band
connectivity (Burned In or Locally Administered). The
default setting is Burned In).
3.4
Switching
Network Configuration Protocol The network protocol being used.
Current Display
Commands
Management VLAN ID Indicates the management VLAN ID.
Web Mode Indicates if the switch is configured to allow web

browser connection to the embedded browser
management application on the BAR.
Java Mode Indicates if the switch allows access to the Java applet
in the header frame of the Web management
application. Enabled indicates the applet can be
viewed; the default is disabled.
Related Commands network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>] on page 3-8

network mac-address <macaddr> on page 3-7
network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes] on page 3-7
network mgmt_vlan <vlanid> on page 4-7
ip http server on page 12-3
network javamode on page 11-8
show storm-control
Summary Show the broadcast storm and flow control settings of the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays switch configuration information for the BAR, focusing on the
broadcast storm recovery and flow control settings.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show storm-control
Broadcast Storm Recovery Mode.................. Enable

802.3x Flow Control Mode....................... Disable
3-11
Command Output: The following information is shown in response to the show storm-control command:
Broadcast Storm Recovery Indicates whether Broadcast Storm Recovery mode is enabled
Mode or disabled; the default is disabled.
3.5 802.3x Flow Control Mode Indicates whether 802.3x Flow Control is enabled or disabled;
the default is disabled.
Spanning Tree
Related Commands storm-control broadcast on page 3-9
Configuration storm-control flowcontrol on page 3-9
Commands
3.5 Spanning Tree Configuration Commands

The commands in the following section control the operation of the Spanning Tree
protocol in the BAR.
spanning-tree
Summary Enable spanning tree mode.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to enabled.
“no” Form no spanning-tree

The “no” form of this command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to disabled
(default). While disabled, the spanning-tree configuration is retained and can be
changed, but is not activated.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree
spanning-tree {<logical slot/port> | all} {off | 802.1d | fast}
Summary Specify the spanning tree mode used on the BAR.
User-Entered {<logical slot/port> | all}:

Parameters The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the
combination of slot number and port number), or “all”, specifying all interfaces on
the BAR.
{off | 802.1d | fast}
The spanning tree mode operational setting for the BAR. The available options are:
• off: disable spanning tree operation on the BAR.
• 802.1d: use IEEE 802.1d compliant spanning tree mode.
• fast: Use fast STP mode for spanning tree operation.
3-12
Description This command sets the STP mode for a specific port-channel (LAG). This is the value
specified for STP Mode on the Port Configuration Menu. The interface is a logical slot
and port for a configured port-channel. The all option sets all configured port-channels
(LAGs) with the same option.
“no” Form None 3.5

Defaults Spanning Tree Mode: 802.1d Spanning Tree
Configuration
Example
Commands
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree all fast
spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Enable Bridge Protocol Data Unit migration checking.
User-Entered {<slot/port> | all}:

the BAR.
Description This command enables BPDU migration check on a specified interface. The all option
enables BPDU migration check on all interfaces.
“no” Form no spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port> | all}

The “no” form of this command disables BPDU migration check on a given interface.
The all option disables BPDU migration check on all interfaces.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck 1/1
spanning-tree configuration name <name>
Summary Name the current Spanning Tree configuration.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters A descriptive name of up to 32 characters.
NOTE: You must surround the Spanning Tree configuration name in quotation
marks (““) to use spaces in the name. If you enter a space in the text string without
using surrounding quotes, you get an invalid input error.
Description This command sets the Configuration Identifier Name for use in identifying the
configuration that this switch is currently using.
3-13
“no” Form no spanning-tree configuration name <name>

The “no” form of this command sets the Configuration Identifier Name back to its
default (the base MAC address).
3.5 Defaults Name: the base MAC address displayed using hexadecimal notation as specified in the
IEEE 802 standard.
Spanning Tree Example

Configuration (Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree configuration name “MCAST TREE”
Commands
Related Commands show spanning-tree summary on page 3-29
spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level> on page 3-14
spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level>
Summary Assign a configuration revision number to the current Spanning Tree settings.
User-Entered <revision-level>
Parameters A number from 0 to 65535 that indicates the revision or iteration of the Spanning Tree
configuration of the BAR.
Description This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in identifying
the configuration that this switch is currently using.
“no” Form no spanning-tree configuration revision

The “no” form of this command restores the Revision Level to its default value.
Defaults Revision-level: 0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree configuration revision 2

spanning-tree configuration name <name> on page 3-13
spanning-tree edgeport
Summary Identify the current interface as an edge port.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command specifies that the currently configured port is an Edge Port within the
common and internal spanning tree. This will allow this port to transition to
Forwarding State without delay.
3-14
“no” Form no spanning-tree edgeport

The “no” form of this command specifies that this port is not an Edge Port within the
common and internal spanning tree.
Defaults
Example
None
3.5
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/11)#spanning-tree edgeport
Spanning Tree
Configuration
Commands
spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>
Summary Set the Force Protocol Version for the BAR.
User-Entered <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>

Parameters This selection specifies the force protocol version that will be used on the BAR.
• 802.1d: ST BPDUs are transmitted rather than MST BPDUs (IEEE 802.1d
functionality supported)
• 802.1w: RST BPDUs are transmitted rather than MST BPDUs (IEEE 802.1w
functionality supported)
• 802.1s: MST BPDUs are transmitted (IEEE 802.1s functionality supported)
Description This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to a new value.
“no” Form no spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>

The “no” version of this command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter back to
its default value of 802.1s.
Defaults Force version: 802.1s
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree forceversion 802.1s
spanning-tree forward-time <f-time>
Summary Set the Bridge Forward Delay.
User-Entered <f-time>
Parameters The forwarding time, in seconds, that will be used by the BAR. The range for this value
is from 4 to 30, with the value being greater than or equal to:
 BridgeMaxAge
---------------------------------------- + 1
 2 
Description This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter to a new value for the
3-15
“no” Form no spanning-tree forward-time

The “no” form of this command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter back to its
default value of 15.
3.5 Defaults
Example
F-time: 15
Spanning Tree (Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree forward-time 16

Configuration
Commands
Related Commands show spanning-tree [brief] on page 3-21
spanning-tree hello-time <h-time> on page 3-16
spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age> on page 3-16
spanning-tree hello-time <h-time>
Summary Set the bridge hello time for the BAR.
User-Entered <h-time>
Parameters The hello time interval, in seconds, to be used on the BAR. The range for this value is
from 1 to 10, with the value being less than or equal to:
 BridgeMaxAge
---------------------------------------- – 1
 2 
Description This command sets the Hello Time parameter to a new value for the common and
internal spanning tree.
“no” Form no spanning-tree hello-time

The “no” form of this command sets the Hello Time parameter for the common and
internal spanning tree to its default value.
Defaults H-time: 2
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree hello-time 3

spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age> on page 3-16
spanning-tree forward-time <f-time> on page 3-15
spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age>
Summary Set the bridge maximum age parameter for spanning tree operation on the BAR.
User-Entered <bridge-max-age>
Parameters The maximum age time, in seconds, that the BAR will use for both common and
internal spanning tree operation. The value may be from 6 to 40, with the value being
less than or equal to:
( BridgeForwardDelay – 1 ) × 2
3-16
Description This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter to a new value for the common and
“no” Form no spanning-tree max-age

The “no” form of this command sets the Bridge-Max-Age parameter back to its default
value of 20. 3.5
Defaults Bridge-max-age: 20 Spanning Tree
Configuration
Example
Commands
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree max-age 30

spanning-tree forward-time <f-time> on page 3-15
spanning-tree hello-time <h-time> on page 3-16
spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto}
Summary Set spanning tree path cost for the interface.
User-Entered <mstid>
Parameters If the <mstid> parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance,
then the configurations are done for that multiple spanning tree instance. However,
if 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the configurations
are performed for the common and internal spanning tree instance.
{<cost-value> | auto}
The path cost for this port within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and
internal spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter. The <cost-
value> is a number in the range of 1 to 200000000. If the “auto” selection is specified,
the pathcost value will be automatically determined based on Link Speed.
Description This command sets the Path Cost for the currently configured port within the multiple
spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree.
“no” Form no spanning-tree mst <mstid> cost

The “no” form of this command sets the Path Cost for this port within the multiple
spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree to the default value
of “auto”.
Defaults Cost: auto
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/11)#spanning-tree mst 2 cost 10000
Related Commands show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port> on page 3-25
3-17
spanning-tree mst <mstid> port-priority <priority-value>
Summary Set spanning tree priority value for the interface.
Spanning Tree User-Entered <mstid>

Configuration Parameters If the <mstid> parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance,
Commands then the configurations are performed for that multiple spanning tree instance. If
however 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the
configurations are performed for the common and internal spanning tree instance.
<priority-value>
The port priority number assigned to the current interface. The priority is a number in
the range of 0 to 240 in increments of 16.
Description This command sets the Port Priority for the currently configured port within the
multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree.
“no” Form no spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost | port-priority}

The “no” form of this command sets the Port Priority for this port within the multiple
spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree to the default value.
Defaults Priority-value: 128
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/11)#spanning-tree mst 2 port-priority 16
spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>
Summary Add a multiple spanning tree instance.
Parameters The ID of the new multiple spanning tree instance being created on the BAR. The
<mstid> is a number within the range of 1 to 4094.
Description This command adds a multiple spanning tree instance to the switch. The maximum
number of multiple instances supported by the Pannaway BAR is 4.
“no” Form no spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>

The “no” form of this command removes a multiple spanning tree instance from the
switch and reallocates all VLANs allocated to the deleted instance to the common and
internal spanning tree. The instance <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the
desired existing multiple spanning tree instance to be removed.
Defaults None
3-18
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree mst instance 2
3.5
spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority> Spanning Tree
Configuration
Summary Set priority for an MST instance. Commands
Parameters The identification of an existing multiple spanning tree instance on the BAR. The
<bridge-priority>
The bridge priority value for the MSTID. The priority value is a number within a range
of 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096.
NOTE: If the bridge priority value supplied is not a multiple of 4096, the system will
round the value supplied to the nearest multiple and provide a message to the
current CLI session.
Description This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instance.
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this command sets
the Bridge Priority parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning
tree.
“no” Form no spanning-tree mst priority <mstid>

The “no” form of this command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple
spanning tree instance to its default value of 32768.
Defaults Bridge-priority: 32678
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree mst priority 3 8292
Priority specified was converted to 8192 (according to IEEE 802.1s) and stored
successfully.
Related Commands show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid> on page 3-24
spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>
Summary Associate a VLAN with a multiple spanning tree instance.
Parameters The identification of an existing multiple spanning tree instance on the BAR. The
3-19
<vlanid>
The VLAN ID of an existing VLAN on the BAR.
Description This command adds an association between a multiple spanning tree instance and a
3.5
VLAN. The VLAN will no longer be associated with the common and internal
spanning tree.
Spanning Tree “no” Form no spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>

Configuration The “no” form of this command removes an association between a multiple spanning
Commands tree instance and a VLAN.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree mst vlan 3 2
Related Commands vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8

show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid> on page 3-24
spanning-tree port mode
Summary Activate administrative switch port state.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for the currently configured
port to enabled.
“no” Form no spanning-tree port mode

The “no” form of this command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for the
current port to disabled (the default state).
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/9)#spanning-tree port mode
Related Commands show spanning-tree interface <slot/port> on page 3-23
spanning-tree port mode all
Summary Activate administrative switch port state.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to enabled.
3-20
“no” Form no spanning-tree port mode all

The “no” form of this command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports
to disabled (the default state).
Defaults
Example
Mode disabled
3.6
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree port mode all
Spanning Tree
Display
Commands
3.6 Spanning Tree Display Commands

The commands listed in this section provide access to Spanning Tree statistics and lists
of configuration settings.
show spanning-tree [brief]
Summary Display a summary of spanning tree settings.
User-Entered [brief]
Parameters This optional parameter provides less extensive output.
Description This command displays spanning tree settings for the common and internal spanning
tree.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree
Bridge Priority................................ 32768

Bridge Identifier.............................. 80:00:00:0A:9F:50:00:18
Time Since Topology Change..................... 0 day 0 hr 0 min 0 sec
Topology Change Count.......................... 0
Topology Change in progress.................... FALSE
Designated Root................................ 80:00:00:0A:9F:50:00:18
Root Path Cost................................. 0
Root Port Identifier........................... 00:00
Bridge Max Age................................. 20
Bridge Forwarding Delay........................ 15
Hello Time..................................... 2
Bridge Hold Time............................... 3
CST Regional Root.............................. 80:00:00:0A:9F:50:00:18
Regional Root Path Cost........................ 0
Associated FIDs Associated VLANs

--------------- ----------------
1 1
2 2
3-21
Command Output: The following information is shown in response to the command:
Bridge Priority The current decimal value of the bridge priority value setting
of the BAR.
3.6 Bridge Identifier The octal value of the bridge priority, combined with the
bridge MAC address to form a unique identification.
Spanning Tree Time Since Topology Change The number of seconds that have elapsed since the last
Spanning Tree Topology Change notification was received.
Display
Commands Topology Change Count The number of topology change notifications received since
the last reset.
Topology Change in Progress Boolean value of the Topology Change parameter for the
switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any
port assigned to the common and internal spanning tree.
Designated Root The octal value of the Root Bridge’s priority value and the
MAC address of that bridge port, combined to identify the
current designated root bridge.
Root Path Cost Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and
Root Port Identifier Identification of the root port.
Root Port Max Age Configured maximum age for the root port’s eligibility.
Shown for root ports only.
Root Port Bridge Forward Delay Derived forwarding delay for the port. This value is
displayed for root ports only.
Hello Time Configured value.
Bridge Hold Time Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge

Protocol Data Units (BPDUs)
CST Regional Root Port priority and MAC address of the regional root bridge.
Regional Root Path Cost Path cost parameter for the regional root bridge.
Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers currently associated

with this instance.
Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs currently associated with this instance.
When the “brief” optional parameter is included, this command displays spanning tree settings for
the bridge. In this case, the following details are displayed.
Bridge Priority The octal value of the bridge priority, combined with the
bridge MAC address to form a unique identification.
Bridge Identifier Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and
Bridge Max Age Configured maximum age for the root port’s eligibility.
Bridge Hello Time Derived value.
Bridge Forward Delay Configured value.
Bridge Hold Time Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge

Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).
3-22

show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid> on page 3-24
show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port> on page 3-25
show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/port> | all} on page 3-27
show spanning-tree mst summary on page 3-28
show spanning-tree summary on page 3-29
show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid> on page 3-30
3.6
Spanning Tree
Display
show spanning-tree interface <slot/port> Commands
Summary Show spanning tree settings for a switch port.
User-Entered <slot/port>
Parameters A unique interface on the BAR identified by the combination of slot number and port
number.
Description This command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree interface 0/11
Port Mode...................................... Enabled

Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared....... 2 day 23 hr 5 min 10 sec
STP BPDUs Transmitted.......................... 0
STP BPDUs Received............................. 0
RSTP BPDUs Transmitted......................... 0
RSTP BPDUs Received............................ 0
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted......................... 75
MSTP BPDUs Received............................ 0
Command Output: The following details are displayed on execution of the command:
Port Mode The operational mode of the selected port.
Port Up Time Since Counters Time since port was reset, displayed in days, hours, minutes,
Last Cleared and seconds.
STP BPDUs Transmitted Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.
STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.
RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.
RSTP BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
received.
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
sent.
MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
received.
3-23

spanning-tree port mode on page 3-20
clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes] on page 15-2
3.6 show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid>
Spanning Tree Summary Show spanning tree settings for a multiple spanning tree instance.
Display
Commands Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec
Parameters The numerical ID of an existing Multiple Spanning Tree instance.
Description This command displays settings and parameters for the specified multiple spanning tree
instance. The instance <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing
multiple spanning tree instance ID.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst detailed 2
MST Instance ID................................ 2

MST Bridge Priority............................ 32768
MST Bridge Identifier.......................... 80:02:00:0A:9F:50:00:18
Time Since Topology Change..................... 0 day 0 hr 26 min 39 sec
Topology Change Count.......................... 3
Topology Change in progress.................... FALSE
Root Path Cost................................. 0
Root Port Identifier........................... 00:00

--------------- ----------------
2 2
Command Output: The command returns the following information:
MST Instance ID The identification number of the Multiple Spanning Tree

instance.
MST Bridge Priority The decimal priority value of the MST interface.
MST Bridge Identifier The octal value of the bridge priority, combined with the bridge
MAC address to form a unique identification.
Time Since Topology Change The number of seconds that have elapsed since the last
Spanning Tree Topology Change notification was received.
Topology Change Count Number of times the topology has changed for this multiple
spanning tree instance.
Topology Change in Progress Value of the Topology Change parameter for the multiple
Designated Root Identifier of the Regional Root for this multiple spanning tree
instance.
3-24
Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for this multiple spanning
tree instance.
Root Port Identifier Port to access the Designated Root for this multiple spanning
3.6
tree instance.
Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this

instance.
Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.

Spanning Tree
Display
Related Commands spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto} on page 3-17 Commands
spanning-tree mst instance <mstid> on page 3-18
spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority> on page 3-19
spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid> on page 3-19
show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port>
Summary Show detailed settings for a port within a multiple spanning tree instance.
<slot/port>
A unique interface on the BAR identified by the combination of slot number and port
number.
Description This command displays the detailed settings and parameters for a specific switch port
within a particular multiple spanning tree instance.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst port detailed 2 0/11
MST Instance ID................................ 2

Port Identifier................................ 80:0B
Port Priority.................................. 128
Port Forwarding State.......................... Forwarding
Port Role...................................... Designated
Auto-calculate Port Path Cost.................. Enabled
Port Path Cost................................. 200000
Designated Port Cost........................... 0
Designated Bridge.............................. 80:02:00:0A:9F:50:00:18
Designated Port Identifier..................... 80:0B
3-25
MST Instance ID The identification number of the Multiple Spanning Tree instance.
3.6
Port Identifier Octal value identifying the MST port.
Port Priority The priority value of the specified port.
Port Forwarding State Current spanning tree state of this port

Spanning Tree
Display Port Role The operational role of the port.
Commands
Auto-calculate Port Path The setting (enabled or disabled) of Spanning Tree’s port path
Cost auto-calculation capability.
Port Path Cost Configured value of the Internal Port Path Cost parameter.
Designated Root The Identifier of the designated root for this port.
Designated Port Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.
Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port.
Designated Port Identifier Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the
LAN.
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this command
displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and
internal spanning tree. The <slot/port> is the desired switch port. In this case, the
following are displayed.
Port Identifier The port identifier for this port within the CST.
Port Priority The priority of the port within the CST.
Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of the port within the CST.
Port Role The role of the specified interface within the CST.
Port Path Cost The configured path cost for the specified interface.
Designated Root Identifier of the designated root for this port within the CST.
Designated Port Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.
Designated Bridge The bridge containing the Designated Port.
Designated Port Identifier Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the
LAN.
Topology Change Value of flag in next Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Unit
Acknowledgement (BPDU) transmission indicating if a topology change is in
progress for this port.
Hello Time The hello time in use for this port.
Edge Port The configured value indicating if this port is an edge port.
Edge Port Status The derived value of the edge port status. True if operating as an
edge port; false otherwise.
Point To Point MAC Status Derived value indicating if this port is part of a point to point link.
CST Regional Root The regional root identifier in use for this port.
CST Port Cost The configured path cost for this port.
3-26
Related Commands spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto} on page 3-17
spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority> on page 3-19
show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/port> | all}

3.6
Spanning Tree
Summary Show settings of one or more ports in a multiple spanning tree instance. Display
Commands
{<slot/port> | all}:
The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the
combination of slot number and port number), or “all”, specifying all interfaces on the
BAR.
Description This command displays the settings of one or all ports within the specified multiple
If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the status summary
is displayed for one or all ports within the common and internal spanning tree.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst port summary 2 all
STP STP Port

Slot/Port Mode Type State Role
--------- -------- ------- ----------------- ----------
0/1 Disabled Disabled Disabled
0/3 Disabled Probe Disabled Disabled
0/4 Disabled PC Mbr Disabled Disabled
0/11 Enabled Mirror Forwarding Designated
0/12 Enabled Forwarding Designated
Command Output: The following information is displayed in response to the command:
Slot/Port The interface being displayed.
STP Mode This field shows the condition (Enabled or Disabled) of Spanning Tree
operation on the port. The enabled condition indicates that 802.1d or
fast spanning tree mode is active on the port.
3-27
Type This field is not fully supported in the current implementation of the
Spanning Tree display commands.
STP State The forwarding state of the port in the specified spanning tree instance.
3.6 Port Role The role of the specified port within the spanning tree.
Related Commands addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5

Spanning Tree monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30
Display spanning-tree port mode on page 3-20
Commands
show spanning-tree mst summary
Summary Show information about all multiple spanning tree instances on the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays summary information about all multiple spanning tree
instances in the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst sum
MST Instance ID................................ 2

--------------- ----------------
2 2
Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the command:
MST Instance ID List List of multiple spanning trees IDs currently configured.
For each MSTID, the following additional information is supplied:
Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance.
Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.
Related Commands spanning-tree mst instance <mstid> on page 3-18

3-28
show spanning-tree summary
Summary Show spanning tree settings and operational parameters.
Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec 3.6

User-Entered None Spanning Tree
Parameters Display
Description This command displays spanning tree settings and parameters for the switch.
Commands
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree summary
Spanning Tree Adminmode........... Enabled

Spanning Tree Version............. IEEE 802.1s
Configuration Name................ 00-0A-9F-50-00-18
Configuration Revision Level...... 0
Configuration Digest Key.......... 0xac36177f50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62
Configuration Format Selector..... 0
MST Instances..................... 2
Spanning Tree Adminmode Administrative mode of Spanning Tree operation on the

switch (enabled or disabled).
Spanning Tree Version Version of 802.1 currently supported (IEEE 802.1s, IEEE
802.1w, or IEEE 802.1d) based upon the Force Protocol
Version parameter.
Configuration Name An assigned name identifying the spanning tree

configuration.
Configuration Revision Level The revision level of the current spanning tree configuration.
Configuration Digest Key A generated key used to uniquely identify the configuration.
Configuration Format Selector The selector value used by the configuration.
MST Instances Number of multiple spanning tree instances configured on the

switch.
Related Commands spanning-tree on page 3-12

spanning-tree configuration name <name> on page 3-13
spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level> on page 3-14
spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s> on page 3-15
3-29
show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid>
Summary Show associations between a VLAN and a multiple spanning tree instance.
3.7 Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec
System User-Entered <vlanid>

Information and Parameters The VLAN ID of an existing VLAN on the BAR.
Statistics
Description This command displays the association between a VLAN and a multiple spanning tree
Commands
instance.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree vlan 2
VLAN Identifier................................ 2
Associated MST Instance........................ 2
VLAN Identifier The identification number of the VLAN being examined.
Associated MST Identifier for the associated multiple spanning tree instance or "CST"
Instance if associated with the common and internal spanning tree.
Related Commands spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid> on page 3-19
3.7 System Information and Statistics Commands

The display commands in this section provide information about overall switching
configuration and interface characteristics.
show arp switch
Summary Show the ARP settings of the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays connectivity between the switch and other devices. The
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache identifies the MAC addresses of the IP
stations communicating with the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
3-30
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show arp switch

MAC Address IP Address Slot/Port
------------------- ---------------- ------------
00:0A:9F:00:03:29
00:0A:9F:40:00:0B
10.10.4.1
10.10.4.40
0/12
0/12 3.7
System
Information and
Statistics
MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering
information. The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are Commands
separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB
IP Address The IP address assigned to each interface.
Slot/Port Slot and port combination indicating the BAR interface that the ARP
information (response) was received on.
show interface {<slot/port> | switchport}
Summary Show switch interface configuration.
User-Entered {<slot/port> | switchport}:

combination of slot number and port number), or “switchport”, specifying the sum of
all switch interfaces on the BAR.
Description This command displays a summary of statistics for a specific port or a count of all CPU
traffic based upon the argument.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show interface 0/11
Packets Received Without Error................. 172

Packets Received With Error.................... 0
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 6
Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 519
Transmit Packet Errors......................... 0
Collision Frames............................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 0 day 0 hr 18 min 34 sec
Command Output: The display output when the <slot/port> parameter is supplied are as follows:
Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets (including broadcast packets
and multicast packets) received by the processor.
Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors
preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer
protocol.
3-31
Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to
the broadcast address. Note that this does not include
multicast packets.
3.7
Packets Transmitted Without The total number of packets transmitted out of the
Errors interface.
Transmit Packets Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be
System transmitted because of errors.
Information and Collision Frames The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this
Statistics Ethernet segment.
Commands Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds
since the statistics for this port were last cleared.
The display output when the <switchport> parameter is supplied is as follows:
Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets (including broadcast packets
and multicast packets) received by the processor.
Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to
the broadcast address. Note that this does not include
multicast packets.
Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors
preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer
protocol.
Packets Transmitted Without The total number of packets transmitted out of the
Errors interface.
Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested to be transmitted to the Broadcast address,
including those that were discarded or not sent.
Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be
transmitted because of errors.
Address Entries Currently In Use The total number of Forwarding Database Address Table
entries now active on the switch, including learned and
static entries.
VLAN Entries Currently In Use The number of VLAN entries presently occupying the
VLAN table.
Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds
since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.
show interface ethernet {<slot/port> | switchport}
Summary Show the Ethernet traffic and operational statistics for one or more BAR ports.
User-Entered {<slot/port> | switchport}:

combination of slot number and port number), or “switchport”, specifying the sum of
all switch interfaces on the BAR.
Description This command displays detailed statistics for a specific port or for all CPU traffic based
upon the argument.
3-32
“no” Form None
Defaults None
3.7
Example
(Pannaway BAR) > show interface ethernet switchport

Octets Received................................ 376449509
Unicast Packets Received....................... 55583 System
Multicast Packets Received..................... 444855 Information and
Broadcast Packets Received..................... 188103 Statistics
Receive Packets Discarded...................... 0
Commands
Octets Transmitted............................. 9721208
Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 56457
Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 50741
Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 1975
Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 3741
Transmit Packets Discarded..................... 0
Most Address Entries Ever Used................. 94

Address Entries Currently in Use............... 19
Maximum VLAN Entries........................... 228

Most VLAN Entries Ever Used.................... 1
Static VLAN Entries............................ 1
Dynamic VLAN Entries........................... 0
VLAN Deletes................................... 0
Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 44 day 20 hr 5 min 29 sec
Command Output: The display parameters when the argument is ‘<slot/port>’ are as follows:
Packets Received:
Octets Received The total number of octets of data (including those in bad
packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits
but including FCS octets). This object can be used as a
reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization.
Packets Received < 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
received that were < 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Received 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing
bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Received 65-127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length
inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
octets).
octets).
3-33
received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in
length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
3.7 Packets Received 1024-1518

Octets
The total number of packets (including bad packets)
received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in
length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS
System octets).
Information and Packets Received 1519-1522 The total number of packets (including bad packets)
Statistics Octets received that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in
Commands length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Packets Received > 1522 Octets The total number of packets received that were longer
than 1522 octets (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Packets Received Successfully:
Total The total number of packets received that were without errors.
Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a

higher-layer protocol.
Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed
to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include
packets directed to the broadcast address.
Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed
to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include
multicast packets.
Packets Received with MAC Errors:
Total The total number of inbound packets that contained errors

preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Jabbers Received The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that this definition of
jabber is different than the definition in IEEE-802.3 section 8.2.1.5
(10BASE5) and section 10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents
define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms.
The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms.
Fragments/Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than
Received 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Alignment Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518
octets, inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
a non-integral number of octets.
Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518
octets, inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
an integral number of octets
Overruns The total number of frames discarded as this port was overloaded
with incoming packets, and could not keep up with the inflow.
3-34
Received Packets not forwarded:
Total A count of valid frames received which were discarded (i.e.

filtered) by the forwarding process.
Local Traffic Frames The total number of frames dropped in the forwarding
process because the destination address was located off of
this port.
3.7
System
802.3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface.
Information and
This counter does not increment when the interface is
operating in half-duplex mode. Statistics
Commands
Unacceptable Frame Type The number of frames discarded from this port due to being
an unacceptable frame type.
VLAN Membership Mismatch The number of frames discarded on this port due to ingress
filtering.
VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup
on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN
table is being modified, or if the VLAN has not been
configured.
Multicast Tree Viable Discards The number of frames discarded when a lookup in the
multicast tree for a VLAN occurs while that tree is being
modified.
Reserved Address Discards The number of frames discarded that are destined to an
IEEE 802.1 reserved address and are not supported by the
system.
Broadcast Storm Recovery The number of frames discarded that are destined for
FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF when Broadcast Storm Recovery is
enabled.
CFI Discards The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set and
the addresses in RIF are in non-canonical format.
Upstream Threshold The number of frames discarded due to lack of cell

descriptors available for that packet’s priority level.
Packets Transmitted Octets:
Total Bytes The total number of octets of data (including those in

bad packets) transmitted to the network (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can
be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization.
Packets Transmitted 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted 65-127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in
length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
FCS octets).
3-35
FCS octets).
3.7 Packets Transmitted 512-1023 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets)
System FCS octets).
Information and Packets Transmitted 1024-1518 The total number of packets (including bad packets)
Statistics Octets transmitted that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in
Commands length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including
FCS octets).
Packets Transmitted 1519-1522 The total number of packets (including bad packets)
Octets transmitted that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in
FCS octets).
Max Info The maximum size of the Info (non-MAC) field that this
port will receive or transmit.
Packets Transmitted Successfully:
Total The number of frames that have been transmitted by this

port to its segment.
Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address,
Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to a Multicast address, including
those that were discarded or not sent.
requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address,
Transmit Errors:
Total Errors The sum of Single, Multiple, and Excessive Collisions.
Tx FCS Errors The total number of packets transmitted that had a length (excluding
framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets.
Oversized The total number of frames that exceeded the max permitted frame size.
This counter has a max increment rate of 815 counts per sec. at
10 Mb/s.
Underrun Errors The total number of frames discarded because the transmit FIFO buffer
became empty during frame transmission.
3-36
Transmit Discards:
Total Discards The sum of single collision frames discarded, multiple collision
frames discarded, and excessive frames discarded.
Single Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a

particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly
one collision.
3.7
System
Multiple Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a
Information and
particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more
than one collision. Statistics
Commands
Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface
fails due to excessive collisions.
Port Membership The number of frames discarded on egress for this port due to
egress filtering being enabled.
VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a
particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN table is
being modified, or if the VLAN has not been configured.
Protocol Statistics:
BPDU’s received The count of BPDU’s (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received
in the spanning tree layer.
BPDU’s Transmitted The count of BPDU’s transmitted from the spanning tree
layer.
802.3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface.
This counter does not increment when the interface is
operating in half-duplex mode.
GVRP PDU’s Received The count of GVRP PDU’s received in the GARP layer.
GVRP PDU’s Transmitted The count of GVRP PDU’s transmitted from the GARP layer.
GVRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GVRP registrations could
not be completed.
GMRP PDU’s received The count of GMRP PDU’s received in the GARP layer.
GMRP PDU’s Transmitted The count of GMRP PDU’s transmitted from the GARP
layer.
GMRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GMRP registrations could
not be completed.
STP BPDUs Transmitted Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.
STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
received.
RST BPDUs Transmitted Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
sent.
RSTP BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
received.
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
sent.
MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units
received.
3-37
Dot1x Statistics:
EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have
been received by this authenticator.
3.7 EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been
transmitted by this authenticator.
System Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds
since the statistics for this port were last cleared.
Information and
Statistics
Commands The display parameters when the argument is ‘switchport’ is as follows:
Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the

processor (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).
Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to

a higher-layer protocol.
Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed
to a multicast address. Note that this number does not
include packets directed to the broadcast address.
Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed
to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include
multicast packets.
Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to
be discarded even though no errors had been detected
to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer
protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could
be to free up buffer space.
Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the

interface, including framing characters.
Packets Transmitted without Errors The total number of packets transmitted out of the
interface.
Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast
address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols
requested be transmitted to a Multicast address,
requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address,
Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets which were chosen to
be discarded even though no errors had been detected
to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer
protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could
be to free up buffer space.
Most Address Entries Ever Used The highest number of Forwarding Database Address
Table entries that have been learned by this switch since
the most recent reboot.
Address Entries Currently in Use The number of Learned and static entries in the
Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch.
3-38
Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of Virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed
on this switch.
Most VLAN Entries Ever Used The largest number of VLANs that have been active on
3.7
this switch since the last reboot.
Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this
switch that have been created statically.
Dynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this
System
switch that have been created by GVRP registration. Information and
Statistics
VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that have been
created and then deleted since the last reboot. Commands
Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds,
since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.
Related Commands clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes] on page 15-2
show mac-addr-table [<macaddr> | all]
Summary Show contents of the MAC address table.
User-Entered [<macaddr> | all]

Parameters The optional selection of either an identified unique MAC address, specified in standard
hexadecimal format, or “all”, specifying all switch interfaces on the BAR.
Description This command displays the forwarding database entries. If the command is entered
with no parameter, the entire table is displayed.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show mac-addr-table

MAC Address Slot/Port ifIndex Status
----------------------- --------- --------- ------------
00:01:00:01:E7:1E:4B:81 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:05:1B:00:44:42 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:07:E9:75:83:FC 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:08:A1:04:1A:AF 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:09:5B:0A:64:4F 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:0A:9F:00:00:00 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:0A:9F:00:03:29 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:0A:9F:00:03:5E 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:0A:9F:00:03:64 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:0A:9F:00:0A:61 0/12 12 Learned
00:01:00:0A:9F:50:00:18 0/1 1 Management
3-39
MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or
filtering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers
3.7
that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL
system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes. In an SVL
system, the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes.
System slot/port The combination of slot and port identifying the BAR interface that the
Information and MAC address was learned on.
Statistics if Index The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.
Commands
Status The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are:
• Static: The value of the corresponding instance was added by the
system or a user when a static MAC filter was defined. It cannot be
relearned.
• Learned: The value of the corresponding instance was learned by
observing the source MAC addresses of incoming traffic, and is
currently in use.
• Management: The value of the corresponding instance (system
MAC address) is also the value of an existing instance of
dot1dStaticAddress. It is identified with interface 0/1 and is
currently used when enabling VLANs for routing.
• Self: The value of the corresponding instance is the address of
one of the switch’s physical interfaces (the system’s own MAC
address).
• GMRP: Learned The value of the corresponding was learned via
GMRP and applies to Multicast.
• Other: The value of the corresponding instance does not fall into
one of the other categories.
show forwardingdb agetime [fdbid | all]
Summary Show the configured age time of a forwarding database or the entire BAR.
User-Entered [fdbid | all]

Parameters The selection of either forwarding database ID, indicating a particular forwarding
database, or “all”, specifying all forwarding databases on the BAR.
Description This command displays the timeout for address aging.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show forwardingdb agetime

ForwardingDB ID Address Aging Timeout in Seconds
----------------- ----------------------------------
1 300
3-40
Command Output: The following information is presented for each forwarding database:
Forwarding DB ID The ID number of the forwarding database that the

information in the table row describes.
Address Aging Timeout in Seconds The aging timer setting (in seconds) for the associated
database. The range is 10-1,000,000 seconds; the default
is 300.
3.7
System
Related Commands bridge aging-time <age-time> [<fdbid> | all] on page 3-5 Information and
Statistics
Commands
3-41
3.7
System
Information and
Statistics
Commands
3-42
Chapter 4
VLAN Configuration
Commands
This chapter describes the commands that configure and monitor Virtual Local Area
Network (VLAN) operation in the BAR.

This chapter describes the commands that configure and manage Virtual Local Area
Networks (VLANs) of various types on the Pannaway BAR. The following sections are
presented in this chapter:
Topic on page
Port-Channel Commands 4-1
VLAN Management Commands 4-7
MAC Filtering Commands 4-16
LACP Protocol Commands 4-19
Protocol-Based VLAN Commands 4-20
IGMP Commands 4-24
Dot1P Commands 4-28
VLAN Display Commands 4-30
4.2 Port-Channel Commands

The commands in this section are used to create and administer port-channels, or link
aggregations (LAGs), on the BAR.
port-channel staticcapability
Summary Enable port-channel support on the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the support of port-channels (static link aggregations – LAGs)
on the device. By default, the static capability for all port-channels is disabled.
“no” Form no port channel staticcapability

The “no” form of this command disables the support of port-channels (static link
aggregations – LAGs) on the device.
4.2 Defaults
Example
Mode disabled
Port-Channel (Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel staticcapability

Commands
Related Commands show port-channel brief on page 4-40
mtu <mtu-size> on page 3-6
addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5
delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6
deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5
port-channel <name> on page 4-2
port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3
port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4
port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name> on page 4-3
show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39
port-channel <name>
Summary Create a port-channel.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The name assigned to the port-channel being created. This name must be made up of
alphanumeric characters and not include any spaces or special characters. The name
may be up to 15 characters in length.
Description This command configures a new port-channel (LAG) and generates a logical slot and
port number for it.
NOTE: Before adding a port to a port-channel, set the physical mode of the port.
Refer to “Switching Configuration Commands” starting on page 3-5 for port physical
mode and speed commands.
Once the port-channel is created, the BAR assigns a logical slot and port number
combination to it. This combination of <logical slot-port> is needed for some
configuration commands. To find the port-channel logical slot and port combination,
use the command show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel Area2
4-2
Related Commands speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2

port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1
show port-channel brief on page 4-40
4.2
port-channel <name> on page 4-2 Port-Channel
port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3 Commands
port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name>
Summary Assign a name to an existing port-channel or to all port channels.
User-Entered <logical slot/port>

Parameters A combination of logical slot and logical port that identifies a single port-channel.
all
This argument applies the command to all existing port-channels.
<name>
The name being newly assigned to the port-channel. This name must be made up of
alphanumeric characters and not include any spaces or special characters. The name
may be up to 15 characters in length.
Description This command defines a name for the port-channel (LAG). This command is used to
modify the name that was associated with the port-channel when it was created.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel name 1/3 AreaX
Related Commands port-channel <name> on page 4-2

port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all}
Summary Place a port-channel in administrative mode, enabling it.

4-3
all
Description This command enables a port-channel (LAG).
4.2 “no” Form no port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all}

The “no” form of this command disables a port-channel (LAG).
Port-Channel
Defaults None
Commands
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel adminmode 1/1
Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1

port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all}
Summary Enable link trap notifications for a port-channel.

all
Description This command enables link trap notifications for the port-channel (LAG).
“no” Form no port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all}

The “no” form of this command disables link trap notifications for the port-channel
<logical slot/port> interface or all interfaces. This is the default setting.
Defaults Mode Disabled
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel linktrap 1/1
Related Commands snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-8

snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew> on page 13-8
snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-9
4-4
addport <logical slot/port>
Summary Add the current interface to a port-channel.
Required Mode Interface Config 4.2

User-Entered <logical slot/port> Port-Channel
Parameters A combination of logical slot and logical port that identifies a single port-channel. Commands
Description This command adds one port to the port-channel (LAG). The first interface is a logical
slot and port number of a configured port-channel.
NOTE: Before adding a port to a port-channel, set the physical mode of the port.
Refer to “Switching Configuration Commands” starting on page 3-5 for port physical
mode and speed commands.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/3)#addport 1/1
Related Commands speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2

deleteport <logical slot/port>
Summary Delete the current interface from a port-channel.

Description This command deletes the currently configured port from an existing port-channel
(LAG) configuration.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/4)#deleteport 1/1
4-5

4.2 delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6

Port-Channel
Commands deleteport all
Summary Delete all ports from port-channels.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command removes all configured ports from their port-channels.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#deleteport all

delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all}
Summary Delete the currently selected interface from the named port-channel.

all
Description This command deletes a specific interface or all interfaces from an existing port-
channel (LAG). The interface is a logical slot and port in a configured port-channel.
The all option removes all configured port-channels (LAGs).
“no” Form None
Defaults None
4-6
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/3)#delete interface all

4.3
deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5 VLAN
show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39 Management
Commands
clear port-channel [yes]
Summary Clear port channels from the BAR.
User-Entered yes]
Parameters Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting
Description This command clears all port-channels (LAGs).
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear port-channel
Are you sure you want to clear all port-channels? (y/n)y

4.3 VLAN Management Commands

These commands control the creation and administration of Virtual LAN IDs, VLAN
modes, and the operation of VLAN filters.
network mgmt_vlan <vlanid>
Summary Set management VLAN ID.
User-Entered <vlanid>
Parameters A numerical valid VLAN identification number. The range for this field is 1-4036.
Description This command configures the Management VLAN ID. The Management VLAN ID
may have the value 1 to 4036; the default value is 1.
“no” Form None
4-7
Defaults VlanID: 1
Example
4.3
(Pannaway BAR) #network mgmt_vlan 2
VLAN vlan <vlanid>

Management
Commands Summary Create a new VLAN.
Required Mode VLAN database
Parameters A numerical valid VLAN identification number. The range for this field is 2-4036 (ID 1
is reserved for the default management VLAN).
Description This command creates a new VLAN in the BAR VLAN database and assigns it an ID.
“no” Form no vlan <vlanid>

The “no” form of the command deletes an existing VLAN, as specified by its
<vlanid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Vlan) #vlan 3
Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22

vlan name <vlanid> <name> on page 4-9
show vlan <vlanid> on page 4-41
show vlan brief on page 4-42
vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all}
Summary Set the frame acceptance mode for the current interface.
User-Entered vlanonly
Parameters This parameter sets the frame acceptance mode for the interface to accept only VLAN
tagged frames. Other frames (untagged or priority frames are discarded).
all
The “all” parameter configures the interface to accept all frames and assign the VLAN
ID of the current port to them.
Description This command sets the frame acceptance mode (VLAN only or all) for the currently
configured interface. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in
accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN specification.
“no” Form no vlan acceptframe

The “no” form of this command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface to “all”
(the default setting).
4-8
Defaults Value: all
Example
4.3
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/8)#vlan acceptframe vlanonly
Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29

show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43 VLAN
vlan ingressfilter on page 4-9 Management
vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10 Commands
vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11
vlan pvid <vlanid> on page 4-14
t
vlan ingressfilter
Summary Enable ingress filtering.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables ingress filtering on the currently configured interface. When
filtering is enabled, received frames whose VLAN ID does not match the VLAN
membership of the interface are discarded.
“no” Form no vlan ingressfilter

The “no” version of this command disables ingress filtering (the default state) on the
currently configured interface.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/8)#vlan ingressfilter

show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43
vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all} on page 4-8
vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10
vlan name <vlanid> <name>
Summary Assign a name to an existing VLAN.
Required Mode VLAN database
Parameters The VLAN ID number (from 2-4036) of the existing VLAN.
4-9
NOTE: VLAN ID 1 is reserved, and always has the name “Default”.
4.3 <name>
The name to be assigned to the VLAN. This name is an alphanumeric string of up to 16
characters. You must surround the VLAN name in quotation marks (“ ”) to use spaces
VLAN
Management in the name.
Commands Description This command changes the name of a VLAN.
“no” Form no vlan name <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command resets the name of a previously named VLAN back to
the default (blank) string.
Defaults The <name> string of new VLANs is empty by default.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Vlan) #vlan name 3 "Sbscrber VLAN 3"

vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8
vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid>
Summary Set participation mode of a VLAN.
User-Entered <participation-mode>
Parameters The participation mode, or option, that the VLAN will operate under. Participation
options are:
• “include” – The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “fixed”.
• “exclude” – The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “forbidden”.
• “auto” – (not supported).
<vlanid>
The VLAN ID number (from 2-4036) of an existing, non-default VLAN.
Description This command specifies the degree of participation for the currently configured
interface in a VLAN.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/8)#vlan participation include 3
4-10

vlan ingressfilter on page 4-9
vlan tagging <vlanid> on page 4-14
4.3
VLAN
Management
vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> Commands
Summary Configure participation for all interfaces in a VLAN.
User-Entered <participation-mode>
Parameters The participation mode, or operation, that the VLAN will operate under. Participation
options are:
• “include” – The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “fixed”.
• “exclude” – The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “forbidden”.
• “auto” – (not supported)
<vlanid>
The VLAN ID number (from 1-4036) of an existing VLAN. This command can
include VLAN ID number 1, the default VLAN.
Description This command configures the degree of participation for all interfaces in a VLAN. The
ID is a valid VLAN identification number, and the interface is a valid interface number.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan participation all include 3

vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12
vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13
vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all}
Summary Set frame acceptance for all VLAN interfaces.
4-11
User-Entered vlanonly
Parameters This parameter sets the frame acceptance mode for the interface to accept only VLAN
tagged frames. Other frames (untagged or priority frames) are discarded.
4.3
all
The “all” parameter configures the interface to accept all frames and assign the VLAN
ID of the current port to them.
VLAN
Description This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces. Regardless of mode,
Management
VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
Commands
Specification.
“no” Form no vlan port acceptframe all

The “no” form of this command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces to
“all” (the default setting).
Defaults Accept all frames
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port acceptframe all vlanonly

vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-11
vlan port pvid all <vlanid> on page 4-13
vlan port ingressfilter all
Summary Enable ingress filtering for all interfaces.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables ingress filtering for all interfaces.
“no” Form no vlan port ingressfilter all

The “no” version of this command disables ingress filtering (the default state) on all
interfaces. In this case, frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN
membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are
members of that VLAN.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port ingressfilter all
4-12

vlan port pvid all <vlanid> on page 4-13
vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13 4.3
VLAN
vlan port pvid all <vlanid> Management
Commands
Summary Change the VLAN IDs of all VLANs to a single VLAN ID.
Parameters The VLAN ID number (from 1-4036) of an existing VLAN. This command can
Description This command changes the VLAN ID for all interfaces to the specified VLAN ID.
“no” Form no vlan port pvid all <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command sets the VLAN ID for all interfaces to the default
VLAN (VLAN ID = 1).
Defaults VLAN ID: 1 (default VLAN)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port pvid all 3

vlan port tagging all <vlanid>
Summary Set tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN.
Description This command enables the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN. If tagging is
enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames.
“no” Form no vlan port tagging all <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command configures the tagging behavior of all interfaces in a
VLAN to disabled. In this case, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames.
Defaults None
4-13
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port tagging all 3
4.3 Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29

VLAN vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11
Management vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12
Commands vlan port pvid all <vlanid> on page 4-13
vlan pvid <vlanid>
Summary Change the ID of the current interface’s VLAN.
Description This command changes the VLAN ID for the current interface.
“no” Form no vlan pvid <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command sets the VLAN ID for the current interface to the
default VLAN ID of 1.
Defaults Vlanid: 1
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#vlan pvid 3

vlan tagging <vlanid>
Summary Set traffic tagging for the current interface.
Description This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a VLAN to
enabled. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames.
4-14
“no” Form no vlan tagging <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command configures tagging behavior for this interface to
disabled. In this case, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames.
Defaults
Example
None
4.3
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#vlan tagging 2
VLAN
Management
Commands
clear vlan [yes]
Summary Reset all VLAN configuration settings.
User-Entered yes]
Description This command resets VLAN configuration parameters to the factory defaults. All
previously configured VLANs are deleted, so that only the default VLAN remains.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear vlan
Are you sure you want to restore all VLANs to default? (y/n)y
VLANs Restored!
Related Commands show vlan brief on page 4-42
4-15
4.4 MAC Filtering Commands

The commands in this section control the creation and operation of MAC layer filters
and filtering rules.
4.4 macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>

MAC Filtering
Summary Create a MAC address filter for a VLAN.
Commands
User-Entered <macaddr>
Parameters The Media Access Control (MAC) address that the VLAN will filter for. The parameter
must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of
“nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn”.
The restricted MAC Addresses are: 00:00:00:00:00:00, 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to
01:80:C2:00:00:0F, 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21, and FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
<vlanid>
Description This command adds a static MAC filter entry for the MAC address <macaddr> on the
VLAN <vlanid>.
Up to 100 static MAC filters may be created.
“no” Form no macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>

This “no” form of this command removes all filtering restrictions and the static MAC
filter entry for the MAC address <macaddr> on the VLAN <vlanid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#no macfilter 00:01:31:02:2F:CC 2
Related Commands macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16

macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17
macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18
macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18
show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34
show mac-address-table staticfiltering on page 4-34
macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>
Summary Add the current interface to a MAC address destination filter.
4-16
The restricted MAC Addresses are: 00:00:00:00:00:00, 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to

01:80:C2:00:00:0F, 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21, and FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.
<vlanid>
4.4
Description This command adds the interface to the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC Filtering
given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>. Commands
“no” Form no macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>
The “no” form of this command removes a port from the destination filter set for the
MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#adddest 00:01:31:02:2F:CC 2
Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16

macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid>
Summary Add all ports in a VLAN to a destination MAC address filter.
<vlanid>
Description This command adds all interfaces to the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the
given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.
“no” Form no macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command removes all ports from the destination filter set for
the MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#adddest all 00:01:31:02:2F:CC 2
4-17

macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16
4.4 show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34

MAC Filtering i
Commands macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>
Summary Add the current interface to a MAC source filter.
Parameters The Media Access Control (MAC) address identifying the MAC filter. The parameter
<vlanid>
Description This command adds the interface to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the
MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.
“no” Form no macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command removes a port from the source filter set for the MAC
filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#addsrc 0A:21:0E:32:1D:A3 4093

macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>
Summary Assign all interfaces to a source filter.
Parameters The Media Access Control (MAC) address identification of the source filter. The
parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of
4-18
<vlanid>
The VLAN ID number (from 1-4036) identifying the source filter.
Description This command adds all interfaces to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the
4.5
MAC address <macaddr> and <vlanid>.
“no” Form no macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>

This “no” form of this command removes all interfaces to the source filter set for the LACP Protocol
MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>. Commands
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#addsrc all 0A:21:0E:32:1D:A3 4093

4.5 LACP Protocol Commands

The commands in the following section detail Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) configuration and management.
port lacpmode
Summary Enable LACP operation on the interface.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a port.
“no” Form no port lacpmode

The “no” form of the command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
on the port (default).
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#port lacpmode
Related Commands port lacpmode all on page 4-20

4-19
port lacpmode all
Summary Enable LACP operation on all interfaces.
4.6 Required Mode Global Config
Protocol-Based User-Entered None

VLAN Parameters
Commands Description This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on all ports.
“no” Form no port lacpmode all

The “no” form of this command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
on all ports.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port lacpmode all
Related Commands port lacpmode on page 4-19

4.6 Protocol-Based VLAN Commands

The following commands provide the configuration and administration of protocol-
based VLANs on the Pannaway BAR.
vlan protocol group <groupname>
Summary Create a protocol-based VLAN group.
User-Entered <groupname>
Parameters A character string of 1 to 16 characters representing the name of the protocol group.
Description This command adds a protocol-based VLAN group to the system. When it is created,
the protocol group will be assigned a unique number that will be used to identify the
group in subsequent commands.
TIP: The protocol group identification number (groupid) can be found by entering the
“show port protocol {<groupid> | all} command.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan protocol group IPTV
4-20

protocol vlan group <groupid> on page 4-23
protocol vlan group all <groupid> on page 4-23
show port protocol {<groupid> | all} on page 4-38
vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> on page 4-21
vlan protocol group remove <groupid> on page 4-21 4.6
Protocol-Based
vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> VLAN
Commands
Summary Add a network protocol to a protocol-based VLAN.
User-Entered <groupid>
Parameters The ID number assigned to the VLAN protocol group.
<protocol>
The protocol to be added to the protocol-based VLAN. Values include:
• IP: to add Internet Protocol to the VLAN.
• ARP: adds Address Resolution Protocol to the VLAN.
• IPX: adds the Internet Protocol Exchange to the VLAN.
• PPPOE: adds Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet to the VLAN.
Description This command adds the specified protocol to the protocol-based VLAN identified by
the <groupid> parameter. A group may have more than one protocol associated with it.
Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group. If
adding a protocol to a group causes any conflicts with interfaces currently associated
with the group, this command will fail and the protocol will not be added to the group.
“no” Form no vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified <protocol> (ip, arp, ipx or
pppoe) from the protocol-based VLAN.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan protocol group add protocol 2 ip

vlan protocol group remove <groupid> on page 4-21
ii
vlan protocol group remove <groupid>
Summary Remove a protocol-based VLAN.
4-21
Parameters The ID number assigned to the VLAN protocol group to be removed.
Description This command removes the protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by the
4.6
specified <groupid> value.
“no” Form None

Protocol-Based
Defaults None
VLAN
Commands Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan protocol group remove 1

vlan protocol group remove <groupid> on page 4-21
protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>
Summary Assign a VLAN to a protocol-based VLAN group.
Required Mode VLAN Config
Parameters The identification number of an existing protocol group.
<vlanid>
Description This command attaches a VLAN to a protocol-based VLAN identified by the

<groupid> value.
NOTE: A group may only be associated with one VLAN at a time.
“no” Form no protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>

The “no” form of this command removes the <vlanid> from this protocol-based
VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Vlan) #protocol group 1 1040
4-22
Related Commands protocol vlan group <groupid> on page 4-23

vlan protocol group <groupname> on page 4-20
4.6
show port protocol {<groupid> | all} on page 4-38 Protocol-Based
VLAN
Commands
protocol vlan group <groupid>
Summary Assign the current interface to a protocol-based VLAN.
Description This command adds the currently configured physical interface to the protocol-based
VLAN identified by <groupid>. A group may have more than one interface associated
with it. Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group.
If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently
associated with the group, this command will fail and the interface(s) will not be added
to the group.
“no” Form no protocol vlan group <groupid>

The “no” form of this command removes the current interface from the protocol-
based VLAN group identified by this <groupid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#protocol vlan group 2

protocol vlan group all <groupid>
Summary Assign all interfaces to the identified Protocol-based VLAN group.
4-23
Description This command adds all physical interfaces to the protocol-based VLAN identified by
<groupid>. A group may have more than one interface associated with it. Each
interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group. If adding an
interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the
4.7 “no” Form

group, this command will fail and the interface(s) will not be added to the group.
no protocol vlan group all <groupid>

IGMP The “no” form of this command removes all interfaces from this protocol-based
Commands VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#protocol vlan group all 2

4.7 IGMP Commands

The commands in this section control the operation of the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) on the BAR.
set igmp
Summary Enable IGMP snooping.
Required Mode Global Config or Interface Config
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables IGMP Snooping mode on the system. The IGMP application
supports the following:
• Global configuration or per interface configuration. Per VLAN configuration is
not supported in the IGMP snooping application.
• Validation of the IP header checksum (as well as the IGMP header checksum)
and discarding of the frame upon checksum error.
• Maintenance of the forwarding table entries based on the MAC address versus
the IP address.
• Flooding of unregistered multicast data packets to all ports in the VLAN.
If the command is entered in Interface Config mode, IGMP Snooping is activated on
the current interface. If the command is entered in Global Config mode, IGMP
Snooping is activated for all interfaces.
“no” Form no set igmp

The “no” form of this command disables IGMP Snooping on the system.
4-24
Example
4.7
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp
Related Commands set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26

set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25 IGMP
set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25 Commands
set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time> on page 4-26
show igmpsnooping on page 4-31
set igmp interfacemode all
Summary Enable IGMP snooping on all BAR interfaces.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces. If an interface which has
IGMP Snooping enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port-
channel (LAG), IGMP Snooping functionality will be disabled on that interface. IGMP
Snooping functionality will subsequently be re-enabled if routing is disabled or port-
channel (LAG) membership is removed from an interface that has IGMP Snooping
enabled.
“no” Form no set igmp interfacemode all

The “no” form of the command disables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces (the
default).
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp interfacemode all
Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24

set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26
set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25
set igmp maxresponse <response-interval>
Summary Set the maximum response interval time for IGMP operation on the BAR.
User-Entered <response-interval>
Parameters The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR will wait to receive a response after
sending a query. This value must be less than the IGMP Query Interval time value. The
range is 1 to 3600.
4-25
Description This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on the system.
“no” Form no set igmp maxresponse

The “no” form of this command sets the system IGMP Maximum Response time back
4.7 Defaults
to its default of 10 seconds.
Response-interval: 10
IGMP
Example
Commands
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp maxresponse 20

set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25
set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval>
Summary Set the IGMP membership interval for the BAR.
User-Entered <membership-interval>
Parameters The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR will wait for a report or response from
the IGMP group before deleting the interface from the membership list of the group.
The interval is measured in seconds, from 1 to 3600.
Description This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the system. The
Group Membership Interval value must be greater than the IGMP Maximum Response
time value.
“no” Form no set igmp groupmembershipinterval

The “no” form of the command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on
the system to the default
Defaults Membership-interval: 260
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp groupmembershipinterval 500

set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time>
Summary Set maximum MCRT expire time on the BAR.
Required Mode Global Config.
4-26
User-Entered <expire-time>
Parameters This is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait for a query to be received
on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast
routers attached. The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
NOTE: To set an infinite timeout (no expiration) set the <expire-time> value to 0.
4.7
IGMP
Commands
Description This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time on the system.
“no” Form no set igmp mcrtexpiretime

The “no” form of this command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time on
the system to 0.
Defaults Expire-time: 0 (no expiration)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp mcrtexpiretime 3600

clear igmpsnooping [yes]
Summary Clear the contents of the IGMP snooping tables.
User-Entered yes]
Description This command clears the tables managed by the IGMP Snooping function and will
attempt to delete these entries from the Multicast Forwarding Database.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear igmpsnooping
Are you sure you want to clear all IGMP snooping entries? (y/n)y
IGMP Snooping Entries Cleared.

4-27
4.8 Dot1P Commands

The following commands describe the configuration and monitoring of IEEE 802.1p
port and user priority associations in the BAR.
4.8 classofservice dot1pmapping <userpriority> <trafficclass>

Dot1P
Summary Set an 802.1p priority for a traffic class.
Commands
Required Mode Global Config or Interface Config
User-Entered <userpriority>
Parameters The numerical value of the 802.1p user priority assigned to the traffic class. This value
may be from 0 to 7.
<trafficclass>
The number of the internal or external traffic class. This value may be from 0 to 7.
Description This command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class for a device when in
‘Global Config’ mode. The number of available traffic classes may vary with the
platform. Userpriority and trafficclass can both be the range from 0-7. Under ‘Interface
Config’ mode, this command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class for a
specific interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#classofservice dot1pmapping 2 2
Related Commands show classofservice dot1pmapping <slot/port> on page 4-29
vlan port priority all <priority>
Summary Set the 802.1p port priority for all interfaces on the BAR.
User-Entered <priority>
Parameters The 802.1p priority value that will be assigned to all interfaces. This value may be an
integer from 0 to 7.
Description This command configures the port priority assigned for untagged packets for all ports
presently plugged into the device. The range for the priority is 0-7. Any subsequent per
port configuration will override this configuration setting.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
4-28
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port priority all 3

show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43 4.8
Dot1P
vlan priority <priority> Commands
Summary Set a VLAN 802.1p priority.
Parameters The 802.1p priority value for the interface. This value may be an integer from 0 to 7.
Description This command configures the default 802.1p port priority assigned for untagged
packets for a specific interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#vlan priority 2
Related Commands vlan port priority all <priority> on page 4-28

show classofservice dot1pmapping <slot/port>
Summary Display the current 802.1p class of service mappings.
Parameters The combination of a slot in the BAR chassis and a port on that slot that identifies a
unique network interface.
Description This command displays the current 802.1p priority mapping to internal traffic classes
for a specific interface, as specified by the slot/port parameter.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
4-29
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show classofservice dot1pmapping 0/1
User Priority Traffic Class
4.9 -------------
0
1
-------------
2
0
VLAN Display 2 2
3 3
Commands
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
Command Output: The command displays a table of the User priorities configured on the BAR and the ID
of the traffic class associated with each user priority.
Related Commands classofservice dot1pmapping <userpriority> <trafficclass> on page 4-28
4.9 VLAN Display Commands

The commands in this section are used to show the settings, configuration, and
operational characteristics of existing VLANs. These commands also provide
operational statistics for current VLANs on the BAR.
These commands also control the operation of port and session monitoring, enabling
the monitoring of interfaces and groups across a VLAN association.
monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port>
Summary Create a port monitoring association between two interfaces.
User-Entered <slot/port>:
Parameters This parameter identifies a unique slot and port combination. This parameter is used
twice in the command; once to identify the source (monitored) port and then again to
identify the destination (probe) port.
Description This command configures a probe port and a monitored port for session monitoring
(port monitoring).
“no” Form no monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port>

The “no” form of the command eliminates the monitoring relationship between the
two specified ports and removes the probe port from all VLANs.
NOTE: If the probe port is a member of a VLAN, it must be manually re-assigned to

that VLAN following the use of the “no monitor session source” command.
Defaults None
4-30
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#monitor session source 0/11 destination 0/12
Related Commands monitor session mode on page 4-31

show monitor on page 4-36 4.9
VLAN Display
monitor session mode Commands
Summary Enables the port monitoring mode.
User-Entered None.
Parameters
Description This command enables the BAR’s port monitoring mode. The probe and monitored
ports must be configured before port monitoring can be enabled. If enabled, the probe
port will monitor all traffic received and transmitted on the physical monitored port. It
is not necessary to disable port monitoring before modifying the probe and monitored
ports.
“no” Form no monitor session mode

The “no” form of this command sets the monitor session (port monitoring) mode to
disable (the default).
Defaults Disabled
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)# monitor session mode
Related Commands monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30
show monitor on page 4-36
show igmpsnooping
Summary Show IGMP snooping information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays IGMP Snooping information. Configured information is

displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping is enabled. Status information is only
displayed when IGMP Snooping is enabled.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
4-31
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show igmpsnooping
Admin Mode..................................... Enable
4.9 Group Membership Interval......................

Max Response Time..............................
Multicast Router Present Expiration Time.......
500
10
0
VLAN Display Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping........... 0/1
Multicast Control Frame Count.................. 0
Commands
Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU............... 0
Command Output: The following information is displayed on the show igmpsnooping screen:
Admin Mode Indicates the status of IGMP Snooping (enabled or disabled) on the
switch.
Group Membership Shows the IGMP Group membership interval configured for the
Interval group. The membership interval is the amount of time, in seconds,
that the BAR will wait for a report or response from the IGMP group
before deleting the interface from the membership list of the group.
Max Response Time Indicates the amount of time the switch will wait after sending a query
on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular
group on that interface.
Multicast Router If a query is not received on an interface within this amount of time,
Present Expiration Time the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast
routers attached.
Interfaces Enabled The list of interfaces on which IGMP Snooping is enabled.

for IGMP Snooping
Multicast Control The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the
Frame Count CPU. This status value is only displayed when IGMP Snooping is
enabled.
Data Frames Forwarded Shows the number of data frames that have been forwarded under
by the CPU IGMP snooping operation.

show mac-address-table igmpsnooping
Summary Show IGMP snooping entries.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the IGMP Snooping entries in the Multicast Forwarding
Database (MFDB) table.
“no” Form None
4-32
Defaults None
Command Output: The show mac-address-table igmpsnooping screen shows the following information:
Mac Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering
information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are
separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the
MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes. In an SVL system, the MAC
4.9
address will be displayed as 6 bytes.
VLAN Display
Commands
Type Displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by
the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning
process or protocol.
Description The text description of this multicast table entry.
Interfaces The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering
(Flt:).
show mac-address-table multicast [<macaddr> | all]
Summary Show MFDB information.
Parameters This optional parameter is the MAC address of an interface that the command will
present the MFDB table for.
all
The optional all parameter specifies that the MFDB table should be retrieved for all
interfaces.
Description This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) information. If
the command is entered with no parameter, the entire table is displayed. The user can
display the table entry for one MAC Address by specifying <macaddr> as an optional
parameter.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output: The following information is shown on the mac-address-table multicast screen:
Mac Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or
filtering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal
numbers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.
In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes. In an
SVL system, the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes.
Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the
end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a
learning process or protocol.
Component The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast
Forwarding Database. Possible values are IGMP Snooping, GMRP,
and Static Filtering.
Description A text description of this multicast table entry.
4-33
Interfaces A list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and
filtering (Flt:).
Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the
4.9
component forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are
listed as the static filtering interfaces.
VLAN Display show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all}

Commands
Summary Show static MAC filtering information.
User-Entered <macaddr> <vlanid>

Parameters Entering the combination of a MAC address value and existing VLAN ID instructs the
CLI to show only the Static MAC Filter table for that combination of VLAN and MAC
address.
all
Entering this parameter instructs the CLI to show all Static MAC filters in the BAR.
Description This command displays the Static MAC Filtering information for all Static MAC Filters.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output: The following information is presented on the show mac-address-table static screen:
Mac Address The MAC address of the static MAC filter entry.
VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the static MAC filter entry.
Source Port(s) Indicates the source port filter set’s slot and port(s).
Destination Port(s) Indicates the destination port filter set’s slot and port(s).

show mac-address-table staticfiltering
Summary Show static MAC filtering entries.
Required Mode Privileged Exec.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the Static Filtering entries in the Multicast Forwarding
Database (MFDB) table.
“no” Form None
4-34
Defaults None
Command Output The following information is presented in response to the show mac-address-table
staticfiltering command:
Mac Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering
information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are
4.9
separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the VLAN Display
MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes. In an SVL system, the MAC address
will be displayed as 6 bytes. Commands
Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end
user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or
protocol.
Description A text description of this multicast table entry.
Interfaces The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:).

show mac-address-table stats
Summary Show the MFDB statistics for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) statistics.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show mac-address-table stats
Max MFDB Table Entries......................... 256

Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset............. 65
Current Entries................................ 31
Command Output: The show mac-address-table stats command provides the following information:
Max MFDB Table Entries The total number of entries that can possibly be in the Multicast
Forwarding Database table.
Most MFDB Entries Since The largest number of entries that have been present in the
Last Reset Multicast Forwarding Database table. This value is also known as
the MFDB high-water mark.
Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database
table.
4-35
show monitor
Summary Show port monitoring information.
4.9 Required Mode Privileged Exec
VLAN Display User-Entered None

Commands Parameters
Description This command displays the port monitoring information for the system.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show monitor
Port Monitor Mode.............................. Enable

Probe Port Slot/Port........................... 0/3
Mirrored Port Slot/Port........................ 0/11
Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the show monitor command:
Port Monitor Mode Indicates whether the Port Monitoring feature is enabled or disabled.
Probe Port Slot/Port The slot/port that is configured as the probe port. If this value has not
been configured, ‘Not Configured’ will be displayed.
Monitored Port Slot/Port The slot/port that is configured as the monitored port. If this value has
not been configured, ‘Not Configured’ will be displayed.
Related Commands monitor session mode on page 4-31

monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30
show port {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show settings and information for a BAR port.
Parameters A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a single interface on the BAR.
all
This argument applies the command to all BAR interfaces.
Description This command displays port information for a specified port, or all ports.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
4-36
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show port all
Slot/ Admin Physical Physical Link Link LACP

Port
-----
0/1
Type Mode
------ -------
Enable
Mode Status Status
---------- ---------- ------
Auto Down
Trap
-------
Enable
Mode
-------
Enable
4.9
0/2 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable VLAN Display
0/3 Probe Enable Auto Down Enable Enable
Commands
0/4 PC Mbr Enable Auto Down Enable Enable
0/7 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable
0/11 Mirror Enable Auto 1000 Full Up Enable Enable
0/12 Enable Auto 100 Half Up Enable Enable
1/1 Enable Down Enable Enable
Command Output: The following information is presented on the show port screen:
Slot/Port The combination of a slot and physical port identifying an interface on the
BAR.
Type If not blank, this field indicates that this port is a special type of port. The
possible values are:
• Mirror: This port is performing port monitoring of the probe port.
• PC Mbr: This port is a member of a port-channel (LAG).
• Probe: This port is a probe port.
Admin Mode Displays the Port control administration state (enabled or disabled). The port
must be enabled (the default) in order for it to be allowed into the network.
Physical Mode Indicates the configured port speed and duplex mode. If auto-negotiation
support is selected, then the duplex mode and speed were set from the
auto-negotiation process. Otherwise, this object displays the port’s duplex
mode and transmission rate.
Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode configured for the port.
Link Status Indicates whether the Link is up or down.
Link Trap Indicates whether or not the port sends a trap when link status changes. The
default is to send traps (enabled).
LACP Mode Displays whether LACP is enabled or disabled on this port.

monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30
port lacpmode on page 4-19
shutdown on page 3-4
snmp trap link-status on page 13-9
4-37
show port protocol {<groupid> | all}
Summary Show protocol-based VLAN settings for the BAR.
VLAN Display User-Entered <groupid>

Commands Parameters This parameter is the Group ID of a specific VLAN protocol group. When the
command is submitted with this parameter, the BAR shows information related only to
that group.
all
This parameter causes the CLI to show Protocol-Based VLAN information for all
VLAN groups in the BAR.
Description This command displays the Protocol-Based VLAN information for either the entire
system, or for the indicated group.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show port protocol all
Group
Group Name ID Protocol(s) VLAN Interface(s)
---------------- ------ ----------- ---- ------------------------
MCAST 1 IP 2 0/6,0/7
Command Output: The show port protocol command presents the following information as output:
Group Name Displays the group name of an entry in the Protocol-based VLAN table.
Group ID Displays the group identifier of the protocol group.
Protocol(s) Indicates the type of protocol(s) for this group.
VLAN Indicates the VLAN associated with this protocol group.
Interface(s) Lists the slot/port interface(s) that are associated with this protocol group.

4-38
show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all}
Summary Show a summary of port-channels on the BAR.

User-Entered <logical slot/port> VLAN Display
Parameters A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a single port-channel (LAG) on Commands
the BAR.
all
Description This command displays an overview of all port-channels (LAGs) on the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show port-channel all
Log. Port- Link

Slot/ Channel Admin Trap STP Mbr Port Port
Port Name Link Mode Mode Mode Type Ports Speed Active
----- --------------- ---- ----- ---- ------ ------- ------ --------- ------
1/1 Area1Link Down En. En. Dis. Dynamic 0/1 Auto False
0/2 Auto False
0/3 Auto False
0/4 Auto False
Command Output: The show port-channel command displays the following information:
Log. Slot/Port The logical slot and the logical port that identify the LAG.
Port-Channel The name of this port-channel (LAG). This may be any string of up to 15
Name alphanumeric characters.
Link Indicates whether the Link is up or down.
Admin Mode The administrative status of this port-channel LAG: enabled (factory default)
or disabled.
Link Trap Mode Indicates whether the port-channel (LAG) is configured to send a trap when
link status changes. Enabled (En.) indicates traps are sent; disabled (Dis.)
indicates no traps are sent. The default is enabled.
STP Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or
port-channel (LAG).
Type Displays the status designating whether a particular port-channel (LAG) is

statically maintained (Static) or dynamically maintained (Dynamic).
Mbr Ports A listing of the ports that are members of this port-channel (LAG), in slot/port
notation. There can be a maximum of eight ports assigned to a given port-
channel (LAG).
Port Speed Speed of the port-channel port.
Port Active The activity condition of the indicated member port. True indicates the port
is active, False indicates the port is inactive.
4-39

4.9 port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4

VLAN Display speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2
Commands spanning-tree {<logical slot/port> | all} {off | 802.1d | fast} on page 3-12
show port-channel brief
Summary Show static capability and state of port-channels.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the static capability of all port-channels (LAGs) on the device
as well as a summary of individual port-channels.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
Pannaway BAR) #show port-channel brief
Static Capability: Enabled
Logical Slot/Port Port-Channel Name Link State Mbr Ports Active Ports
----------------- ----------------- ---------- --------- ------------
1/1 test Down 0/1,0/2,
0/3
Command Output: The following information is presented in the port-channel brief information table:
Static Capability This field displays whether or not the device has static capability
enabled.
Logical Slot/Port The logical slot and the logical port identifying the LAG.
Port-Channel Name Displays the name of the port-channel.
Link State Indicates whether the link is up or down.
Mbr Ports Lists the ports that are members of this port-channel, in slot/port notation.
Active Ports Lists the ports that are actively participating in this port-channel.
4-40

4.9
port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4 VLAN Display
port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name> on page 4-3 Commands
show vlan <vlanid>
Summary Show statistics for a single VLAN on the BAR.
Parameters The unique identification number of a specific VLAN on the BAR.
Description This command displays detailed information, including interface information, for the
VLAN specified by the valid VLAN identification number.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show vlan 2
VLAN ID: 2
VLAN Name: VLAN 2
VLAN Type: Static
slot/port Current Configured Tagging

---------- -------- ----------- --------
0/1 Exclude Exclude Untagged
0/2 Exclude Exclude Untagged
0/4 Exclude Autodetect Untagged
0/7 Include Include Tagged
4-41
Command Output: The following information is shown on the show vlan screen:
VLAN ID The VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with the VLAN, ranging from 1 to 4036.
4.9
VLAN Name The optional text description associated with this VLAN (up to 16 alphanumeric
characters long, including blanks). The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always has
a name of ‘Default.’
VLAN Display VLAN Type The type of VLAN: Default (VLAN ID = 1) or Static (one that is configured and
permanently defined).
Commands
slot/port Indicates by slot ID and port number which port is controlled by the fields on
this line.
Current Determines the degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The
permissible values are:
• Include: This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “fixed” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
• Exclude: This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “forbidden” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Configured Determines the configured degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The
permissible values are:
• Include: This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “fixed” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
• Exclude: This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to
registration “forbidden” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
Tagging Displays the tagging behavior for this port in this VLAN. Possible values are:
• Tagged: This port transmits traffic for this VLAN as tagged frames.
• Untagged: This port transmits traffic for this VLAN as untagged frames.

vlan tagging <vlanid> on page 4-14
show vlan brief
Summary Show a list of VLANs.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays a list of all configured VLANs.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
4-42
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show vlan brief
VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type

-------
1
2
-------------------------------- ---------
Default
VLAN 2
Default
Static
4.9
VLAN Display
Command Output: The show vlan brief command output provides the following information: Commands
VLAN ID The VLAN Identifier (vlanid) associated with each VLAN. The range of the
VLAN ID is 1 to 4036.
VLAN Name The optional descriptive text string associated with this VLAN (up to 16
characters). A blank entry indicates that no custom name has been assigned
to the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 always has a name of ‘Default’.
VLAN Type The type of VLAN: Default (VLAN ID = 1) or Static (one that is configured and
permanently defined).

show vlan port {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show settings for a VLAN port.
Parameters A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a unique interface on the BAR.
all
Description This command displays VLAN port information.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show vlan port 0/7
Port Acceptable Ingress Default

slot/port VLAN ID Frame Types Filtering GVRP Priority
--------- ------- ------------ ----------- ------- --------
0/7 1 Admit All Disable Disable 0
4-43
Command Output: The show vlan port command displays the following information:
slot/port Indicates by slot ID and port number which port is controlled by the
fields on this line.
4.9 Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that this port will assign to untagged frames or priority
tagged frames received on this port. The value must be for an
existing VLAN. The factory default is 1 (the default VLAN).
VLAN Display
Acceptable Frame Types The types of frames that may be received on this port. The options
Commands are ’VLAN only’ and ’Admit All’. When set to ’VLAN only’, untagged
frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are discarded.
When set to ’Admit All’, untagged frames or priority tagged frames
received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the
Port VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames
are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.
Ingress Filtering Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled or disabled. When

enabled, the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the
VLAN with which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the
VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag. In an untagged frame,
the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this
frame. When disabled, all frames are forwarded in accordance with
the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification. The factory default is
disabled.
GVRP Indicates that the GVRP protocol is disabled (not supported).
Default Priority The 802.1p priority assigned to tagged packets arriving on the port.
Related Commands vlan port priority all <priority> on page 4-28

vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29
vlan ingressfilter on page 4-9
4-44
Chapter 5
Protocol Independent
Routing Commands
This chapter presents the CLI commands that are used to configure and monitor
protocol-independent routing operations for the Pannaway BAR.

This chapter provides detailed explanations of routing commands related to routing
operations that do not rely on specific routing protocols such as RIP, OSPF, or VRRP.
The CLI commands in this section affect the operation of system-wide routing, such as
routing table administration, ARP response parameters, and other basic routing
controls. The following sections are provided in this chapter:
Topic on page
General Routing Configuration Commands 5-1
General Routing Display Commands 5-6
ARP Configuration Commands 5-9
ARP Display Commands 5-13
BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration 5-16

Commands
BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands 5-18
Commands for OSPF, VRRP, and RIP routing configuration and monitoring are found
in chapters specifically focused on those technologies.
5.2 General Routing Configuration Commands

The following commands configure the general routing characteristics of the BAR
interfaces and the behavior of routing protocols on the BAR.
ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask>
Summary Assigns an IP address to the current interface.
Required Mode Interface Config.

User-Entered <ipaddress>
Parameters The IP address of the interface in Dotted Decimal Notation. This IP address must be
on a different subnetwork than the subnetwork to which the BAR’s network IP port
belongs.
5.2 <subnetmask>
The subnet mask value for the interface in Dotted Decimal Notation.
General Routing
Description Set an IP address and subnet mask combination for the current interface.
Configuration
Commands “no” Form no ip address <ipaddr> <subnetmask>
The “no” form of this command deleted the specified IP address and subnet mask
combination.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip address 10.10.5.115 255.255.255.0
Related Commands show ip interface <slot/port> on page 5-6
routing
Summary Enable routing operation on the current interface.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables routing for an interface.
“no” Form no routing

The “no” form of this command disables routing for the interface.
Defaults Mode disabled.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#routing
encapsulation [ethernet | snap]
Summary Set link layer encapsulation type on the current interface.
User-Entered [ethernet | snap]

Parameters Required parameter naming the type of encapsulation used on the interface. Selections
are ethernet or snap (Service Network Access Protocol).
5-2
Description This command sets the Link Layer Encapsulation type that the currently selected
interface will use.
“no” Form None
Defaults
Example
Type: Ethernet
5.2
General Routing
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#encapsulation snap Configuration
Commands
Related Commands None
ip irdp
Summary Enable Internet Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) on the interface.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the Internet Router Discovery Protocol on the current
interface.
“no” Form no ip irdp

The “no” form of the command disables IRDP operation on the currently selected
interface.
Defaults Mode Enabled
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#no ip irdp
Related Commands ip irdp address <ipaddress> on page 5-3

ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4
ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval> on page 5-4
ip irdp holdtime <time> on page 5-5
ip irdp preference <irdp-preference> on page 5-5
show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8
ip irdp address <ipaddress>
Summary Configure the advertised router address for the current interface.
User-Entered <ipaddress>:
Parameters The IP address that the interface will advertise as its router address. The valid values are
224.0.0.1 and 255.255.255.255.
Description This command configures the address to be used to advertise the router for the
interface.
5-3
“no” Form no ip ardp address

The “no” form of this command configures the interface to use the default address for
advertisement.
5.2 Defaults
Example
IP Address: 224.0.0.1
General Routing (Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp address 255.255.255.255

Configuration
Commands
Related Commands show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8
ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval>
Summary Configure maximum time allowed between IRDP advertisements.
User-Entered <maxadvertinterval>
Parameters The maximum number of seconds allowed between router advertisements. Acceptable
values are from 4 to 1800.
Description This command configures the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between sending
router advertisements from the interface.
“no” Form no ip irdp maxadvertinerval

The “no” form of this command sets the maximum advertisement interval to its default
of 600 seconds.
Defaults Maxadvertinterval: 600
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp maxadvertinterval 1000
Related Commands ip irdp holdtime <time> on page 5-5

ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval>
Summary Set minimum IRDP advertising interval for the interface.
User-Entered <minadvertinterval>
Parameters This parameter is the duration, in seconds, of the interval between router
advertisements from the interface. Values for this parameter are from 3 seconds up to
the current maxadvertinterval value for the interface.
Description This command configures the minimum time, in seconds, allowed between sending
router advertisements from the interface.
5-4
“no” Form no ip irdp minadvertinterval

The “no” form of this command sets the minimum advertisement interval to its default
of (0.75 * maxadvertinterval).
Defaults
Example
Minadvertinterval: (0.75 * maxadvertinterval)
5.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp minadvertinterval 800
General Routing
Configuration
Commands
Related Commands ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4
ip irdp holdtime <time>
Summary Set hold time for IRDP advertisements from this interface.
User-Entered <time>
Parameters The amount of time, in seconds, that the router will hold IRDP advertisements from
this interface. Values for this parameter may be from the configured maxadvertinterval
value (maximum advertising interval, default of 600 seconds) up to 9000 seconds.
Description This command configures the value, in seconds, of the holdtime field of the router
advertisement sent from this interface.
“no” Form no ip irdp holdtime

The “no” form of this command configures the default value for IRDP holdtime
(3 * maxadvertinterval).
Defaults Time: (maxadvertinterval ∗ 3)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp holdtime 4000
Related Commands ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4

ip irdp preference <irdp-preference>
Summary Set IRDP router preference value for the interface.
User-Entered <irdp-preference>
Parameters Preference value of the interface. This value may be from
-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,648. Enter the value without commas.
Description This command configures the preferability of the address as a default router address,
relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.
5-5
“no” Form no ip irdp preference

The “no” form of this command sets the default router preference to its default value
of 0.
5.3 Defaults
Example
IRDP-preference: 0
General Routing (Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp preference 3

Display
Commands
Related Commands show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8
ip netdirbcast
Summary Set IP Network Directed Broadcasting mode on the interface.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command activates the Network Directed Broadcasting mode for the BAR
interface.
“no” Form no ip netdirbcast

The “no” form of this command disables the forwarding of network directed
broadcasts, so that they are dropped.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip netdirbcast
5.3 General Routing Display Commands

The following commands are used to display routing-specific information about an
interface.
show ip interface <slot/port>
Summary Shows IP configuration and statistics for the specified interface.
Description This command displays the IP network settings for the BAR, including the IP address,
subnet mask, and some router operational modes.
“no” Form None
5-6
Defaults None
Example
5.3
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip interface 0/5
IP Address..................................... 66.15.30.2
Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.252
Routing Mode................................... Enable General Routing
Administrative Mode............................ Enable Display
Forward Net Directed Broadcasts................ Disable
Active State................................... Active
Commands
Link Speed Data Rate........................... 1000 Full
MAC Address.................................... 00:0A:9F:50:00:96
Encapsulation Type............................. Ethernet
Command Output The show ip interface statistics screen displays the following information:
IP Address An IP address representing the subnet configuration of the

router interface. This is a configured value.
Subnet Mask A mask of the network and host portion of the IP address
for the router interface. This is a configured value.
Routing Mode The administrative mode of router interface participation:

enabled or disabled. This is a configured value.
Administrative Mode The administrative mode of the specified interface: enabled

or disabled. This is a configured value.
Forward Net Directed Broadcasts Indicates whether forwarding of network-directed

broadcasts is enabled or disabled. This is a configured
value.
Active State Indicates whether the interface is active or inactive. An

interface is considered active if its link is up and it is in
forwarding state.
Link Speed Data Rate An integer representing the physical link data rate of the
specified interface. This is measured in Megabits per
second (Mbps).
MAC Address The burned in physical address of the specified interface.

The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are
separated by colons.
Encapsulation Type The encapsulation type for the specified interface. The
types are: Ethernet or SNAP. This is a configured value.
Related Commands encapsulation [ethernet | snap] on page 5-2

ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1
routing on page 5-2
ip netdirbcast on page 5-6
5-7
show ip interface brief
Summary Show basic IP information for BAR interfaces.
General Routing User-Entered None

Display Parameters
Commands Description This command provides a summary of the IP networking settings of the BAR’s network
interfaces.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip interface brief

Netdir Multi
Slot/Port IP Address IP Mask Bcast CastFwd
--------- --------------- --------------- -------- --------
0/5 66.15.30.2 255.255.255.252 Disable Enable
3/1 111.222.100.1 255.255.255.128 Disable Disable
Command Output The show ip interface brief screen displays the following information:
Slot/Port The interface being displayed on the row.
IP Address The IP address of the routing interface in 32-bit dotted decimal format.
IP Mask The IP mask of the routing interface in 32-bit dotted decimal format.
Netdir Bcast Indicates if net-directed broadcasts are forwarded on this interface. Possible
values are Enable or Disable.
MultiCast Fwd Indicates the multicast forwarding administrative mode on the interface.
Possible values are Enable or Disable.
Related Commands ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1

ip netdirbcast on page 5-6
show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all]
Summary Display IRDP settings for the specified interface or all interfaces on the BAR.
User-Entered <slot/port>:
all:
Description This command supplies a table of IRDP settings reflecting the configuration of each
IRDP-enabled interface in the BAR.
5-8
“no” Form None
Defaults None
5.4
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip irdp 0/2

Intf Ad Mode Advertise Address Max Int Min Int Hold Time Preference
---- ------- ----------------- ------- ------- -------- ----------- ARP
0/2 Enable 224.0.0.1 1000 750 3000 0 Configuration
Commands
Command Output The show ip irdp screen shows the following information:.
Intf The slot and port combination identifying the IRDP interface.
Ad Mode The advertise mode which indicates whether router discovery is enabled
or disabled on this interface.
Advertise Address The advertised address for the IRDP interface.
Max Int The maximum advertise interval which is the maximum time allowed
between sending router advertisements from the interface in seconds.
Min Int The minimum advertise interval which is the minimum time allowed
between sending router advertisements from the interface in seconds.
Hold Time The amount of time for IRDP advertisements on the interface.
Preferences The preference of the address as a default router address, relative to

other router addresses on the same subnet.
Related Commands ip irdp on page 5-3

ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4
ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval> on page 5-4
ip irdp preference <irdp-preference> on page 5-5
5.4 ARP Configuration Commands

The commands in this section configure the operation of the Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) on the BAR.
arp <ipaddress> <macaddr>
Summary Manually creates an ARP table entry.
User-Entered <ipaddress>
Parameters IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface.
<macaddress>
The unicast MAC address for the device identified by the <ipaddress> parameter. The
format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons.
Description This command creates an entry in the BAR’s system Address Resolution Protocol table.
“no” Form no arp <ipaddress> <macaddress>

The “no” form of the command deletes the ARP entry defined by the <ipaddress> and
<macaddress> pair.
5-9
Defaults None
Example
5.4
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp 10.10.4.252 00:00:1d:5f:a3:15
Related Commands show arp on page 5-13

ARP
Configuration
arp cachesize <entries>
Commands
Summary Configures the size of the ARP cache.
User-Entered <entries>
Parameters The size, in entries, of the ARP cache. The acceptable range of this value is 152 - 3304.
Description This command manually configures the maximum number of entries that can be stored
in the BAR system ARP cache. When the ARP cache entry limit is reached, newer ARP
table entries will automatically overwrite older ones.
“no” Form no arp cachesize

Resets the ARP cache to the default size.
Defaults Entries: 3304
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp cachesize 3300
arp dynamicrenew
Summary Enables automatic renewal of dynamic ARP entries.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the system ARP component to automatically renew ARP entries
of the “dynamic” type when they age out.
“no” Form no arp dynamicrenew

Disables the automatic renewal of ARP entries upon age out.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp dynamicrenew
5-10
Related Commands arp purge <ipaddr> on page 5-11

arp timeout <seconds> on page 5-12
clear arp-cache [gateway] on page 5-13
show arp on page 5-13
arp purge <ipaddr>

5.4
ARP
Summary Purge the specified IP address from the ARP cache. Configuration
Commands
Parameters The IP address to be purged from the ARP cache.
Description This command causes the IP address specified by <ipaddr> to be removed from the
ARP cache. Only entries of type dynamic or gateway are affected by this command.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #arp purge 10.10.4.253
arp resptime <resp-timeout>
Summary Set the response timeout for ARP requests.
User-Entered <resp-timeout>
Parameters Duration of the timeout in seconds. The range of this value is from 1-10 in whole
number increments.
Description This command configures the ARP request response timeout. The value for
<resp-timeout> is a valid positive integer, ranging from 1-10, which represents the IP
ARP entry response timeout time in seconds.
“no” Form no arp resptime

The “no” form of the command resets the ARP response timeout to the default value.
Defaults Resp-timeout: 1
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp resptime 3
Related Commands arp retries <retries> on page 5-12

5-11
arp retries <retries>
Summary Sets maximum retry count for ARP requests.
ARP User-Entered <retries>

Configuration Parameters Number of retries allowed. Values range from 1-10.
Commands
Description This command configures the ARP count of maximum request for retries.
“no” Form no arp retries

The “no” form of the command resets the arp retries count to the default of 4.
Defaults Retries: 4
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp retries 6
Related Commands arp resptime <resp-timeout> on page 5-11

arp timeout <seconds>
Summary Sets the ARP entry age time.
User-Entered <seconds>
Parameters The number of seconds that ARP entries will be held in the ARP cache. Values are from
15 - 21600, in whole number increments only.
Description This command configures the ARP entry ageout time, in seconds.
“no” Form no arp timeout

Sets the ARP timeout value to the default.
Defaults <seconds>: 1200
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp timeout 2400
5-12
clear arp-cache [gateway]
Summary Clear the ARP cache of dynamic entries.

User-Entered [gateway] ARP Display
Parameters This optional parameter causes the command to clear both dynamic entries and ARP Commands
cache entries of the “gateway” category.
Description This command clears the contents of the BAR’s ARP cache.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear arp-cache gateway
5.5 ARP Display Commands
show arp
Summary Show the ARP cache and ARP settings for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache. The displayed
results are not the total ARP entries. To view the total ARP entries, you should view the
show arp results in conjunction with the results of show arp switch on page 3-30.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
5-13
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show arp

Age Time (seconds)............................. 1200
Response Time (seconds)........................ 1
5.5 Retries........................................
Cache Size.....................................
Dynamic Renew Mode ............................
4
3304
Disable
ARP Display Total Entry Count Current / Peak .............. 30 / 35
Static Entry Count Current / Max .............. 0 / 64
Commands
IP Address MAC Address Interface Type Age
--------------- ----------------- ----------- -------- -----------
10.10.2.1 00:0A:9F:00:02:AE 0/11 Gateway 0h 0m 20s
10.10.2.2 00:01:E7:1E:4B:80 0/11 Dynamic 0h 15m 55s
10.10.2.17 00:09:5B:05:D1:3B 0/11 Dynamic 0h 11m 47s
10.10.2.18 00:09:5B:0A:67:95 0/11 Dynamic 0h 2m 9s
10.10.2.19 00:09:5B:0A:DF:7B 0/11 Dynamic 0h 4m 44s
10.10.2.20 00:0A:9F:40:00:2B 0/11 Dynamic 0h 12m 58s
10.10.2.24 00:0A:9F:00:02:A4 0/11 Dynamic 0h 16m 17s
10.10.2.29 00:0A:9F:00:02:59 0/11 Dynamic 0h 16m 13s
10.10.2.31 00:08:74:DE:6D:08 0/11 Dynamic 0h 0m 7s
--More-- or (q)uit
Command Output The response to this command displays the following information:
Age Time (seconds) The time, in seconds, that an ARP table entry is retained
before being deleted.
Response Time (seconds) The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR waits for an
ARP response before timing out the request.
Retries The maximum number of times an ARP request is retried.
Cache Size The maximum number of entries in the ARP table.
Dynamic Renew Mode Indicates whether the ARP component automatically

attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.
Total Entry Count Current / Peak Lists the total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry
count in the ARP table.
Static Entry Count Current / Max Lists the static entry count in the ARP table and maximum
static entry count in the ARP table.
The following is displayed for each ARP entry.
IP Address The IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing

interface.
MAC Address The hardware MAC address of that device.
Interface The routing slot/port associated with the device ARP entry.
Type The type of ARP entry. The possible values are Local, Gateway, Dynamic
and Static.
Age The current age of the ARP entry since last refresh (in hh:mm:ss format).
5-14
Related Commands show arp switch on page 3-30

arp cachesize <entries> on page 5-10
arp dynamicrenew on page 5-10
arp resptime <resp-timeout> on page 5-11
arp retries <retries> on page 5-12
arp timeout <seconds> on page 5-12 5.5
ARP Display
show arp brief Commands
Summary Show abbreviated ARP cache information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays an abbreviated set of information pertaining to the ARP cache
for the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show arp brief
Age Time (seconds)............................. 1200

Response Time (seconds)........................ 1
Retries........................................ 4
Cache Size..................................... 3304
Dynamic Renew Mode ............................ Disable
Total Entry Count Current / Peak .............. 26 / 35
Static Entry Count Current / Max .............. 0 / 64
Command Output In response to this command, the system presents the following information:
Age Time (seconds) The time, in seconds, that an ARP table entry is retained
before being deleted.
Response Time (seconds) The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR waits for an
ARP response before timing out the request.
Retries The maximum number of times an ARP request is retried.
Cache Size The maximum number of entries in the ARP table.
Dynamic Renew Mode Indicates whether the ARP component automatically

attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.
Total Entry Count Current / Peak Lists the total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry
count in the ARP table.
Static Entry Count Current / Max Lists the static entry count in the ARP table and maximum
static entry count in the ARP table.
5-15
Related Commands show arp switch on page 3-30

arp cachesize <entries> on page 5-10
arp dynamicrenew on page 5-10
arp resptime <resp-timeout> on page 5-11
5.6 arp retries <retries> on page 5-12

arp timeout <seconds> on page 5-12
BootP/DHCP
Relay
Configuration 5.6 BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
Commands
bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode
Summary Enable Circuit ID option for BootP/DHCP Relay.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the use of Circuit ID Option mode (cidoptmode) on the BAR.
The circuit ID option mode provides for the limitation of addresses assigned by DHCP
to a single client. Enabling this mode for DHCP relay allows servers supporting this
functionality to pass circuit ID option information in DHCP packets.
“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

The “no” form of the command disables the circuit ID option mode for BootP and
DHCP Relay.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode
Related Commands show bootpdhcprelay on page 5-18
bootpdhcprelay disable
Summary Disable BootP/DHCP Relay forwarding.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command disables BootP and DHCP Relay request forwarding on the BAR.
“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay disable

The “no” form of the command enables BootP and DHCP Relay request forwarding.
5-16
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay disable

5.6
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <hops> BootP/DHCP
Relay
Summary Set maximum allowable relay hops for BootP/DHCP Relay requests. Configuration
Commands
User-Entered <hops>
Parameters The maximum number of relay agent hops. Values are from 1 to 16.
Description This command sets the maximum number of relay agent hops that BootP and DHCP
Relay requests from the BAR’s locally connected networks may cross.
“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount

Resets the maximum number of relay agent hops to the default value (4).
Defaults Hops: 4
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount 8
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <min-wait>
Summary Set minimum wait time for BootP/DHCP Relay requests.
User-Entered <min-wait>
Parameters Number of seconds the BAR will wait for resolution of a BootP/DHCP Relay request.
Values are from 0-100.
Description Entering this command sets the BAR’s BootP/DHCP Relay wait timer to the supplied
value.
“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay minwaittime

The “no” form of this command returns the BAR BootP/DHCP Relay wait time to the
default.
Defaults min-wait: 0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay minwaittime 10
5-17
bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number> <ipaddress>
Summary Set server IP addresses for BootP/DHCP Relay.
BootP/DHCP User-Entered <server number>

Relay Display Parameters A numerical value identifying the specific BootP/DHCP server entry being created.
Commands Acceptable values are from 1 to 8.
<ipaddress>
IP address in 4 digit Dotted Decimal Notation format.
Description This command configures up to eight server IP addresses for BootP/DHCP Relay on
the system.
“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number>

The “no” form of the command sets the default server IP address for the specified
BootP/DHCP Relay server to the default value (0.0.0.0).
Defaults Server Number: 1

IP address: 0.0.0.0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay serverip 5 10.10.4.17
5.7 BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands
show bootpdhcprelay
Summary Show BootP and DHCP Relay settings for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description When this command is entered, the BAR displays BootP and DHCP Relay
configuration information.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
5-18
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show bootpdhcprelay
Maximum Hop Count.............................. 4

Minimum Wait Time(Seconds)..................... 0
Admin Mode..................................... Disable
Server IP Address 1.............................. 10.10.2.33
5.7
Server IP Address 2.............................. 10.10,3.15 BootP/DHCP
Relay Display
Server IP Address 5.............................. 10.10.4.17 Commands
Circuit Id Option Mode......................... Disable
Requests Received.............................. 0
Requests Relayed............................... 0
Packets Discarded.............................. 0
Command Output The following information is displayed:
Maximum Hop Count The maximum allowable relay agent hops.
Minimum Wait Time The minimum wait time.

(Seconds)
Admin Mode Indicates whether relaying of requests is enabled or disabled.
Server IP Address (1 - 8) The IP Addresses of the BootP/DHCP Relay servers configured for
the BAR.
Circuit Id Option Mode Indicates the DHCP Circuit ID setting (enabled or disabled).
Requests Received The number of requests received.
Requests Relayed The number of requests relayed.
Packets Discarded The number of packets discarded.
Related Commands bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode on page 5-16

bootpdhcprelay disable on page 5-16
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <hops> on page 5-17
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <min-wait> on page 5-17
bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number> <ipaddress> on page 5-18
5-19
5.7
BootP/DHCP
Relay Display
Commands
5-20
Chapter 6
RIP Routing Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
routing configuration and monitoring for the Pannaway BAR.
The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) that uses
a distance-vector algorithm to determine the best route to a destination, using a hop
count as the route metric or “cost” value.

This chapter provides detailed explanation of the RIP Routing commands that
configure and monitor the operation of the BAR. The commands are divided into these
different groups:
Topic on page
RIP Configuration Commands 6-1
RIP Display Commands 6-9
6.2 RIP Configuration Commands

The RIP configuration commands presented in this section are divided into two groups:
System-Level commands and Interface-Level commands.
System-Level RIP Use the following commands to configure RIP (Routing Information Protocol) on
Commands the BAR.
auto-summary
Summary Enable RIP auto-summarization.
Required Mode Router RIP Config
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the RIP auto-summarization mode.
“no” Form no auto-summary

The “no” form of this command disables the RIP auto-summarization mode.
Defaults Mode Enabled.
Example
6.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#auto-summary
Related Commands show ip rip on page 6-9

RIP
Configuration
default-information originate
Commands
Summary Enable advertisement of default routes.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the BAR to advertise its own default routes to other RIP
routers.
“no” Form no default-information originate

The “no” form of this command disables the advertisement of default routes.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-information originate
default-metric <metric>
Summary Set default metric for RIP routes.
User-Entered <metric>:
Parameters A numerical value of the weight the RIP protocol assigns to RIP router interfaces on
the BAR by default. Values from 1 to 15 are allowable.
Description This command is used to set a default metric value for distributed RIP routes.
“no” Form no default-metric

The “no” form of the command clears existing default RIP metrics for the BAR.
Defaults No value configured.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-metric 12
6-2
distance rip <distance>
Summary Set route preference value in the BAR.
Required Mode Router RIP Config 6.2

User-Entered <distance> RIP
Parameters A numerical value of the route preference value of RIP in the BAR. Values may be from Configuration
1 to 255, with lower numbers indicating increased preferability. Commands
Description This command sets the route preference value of RIP in the router. The RIP protocol
will use the “distance” value as a means of determining preferences for certain routes.
Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route.
“no” Form no distance rip

The “no” version of this command sets the default RIP route preference of 15.
Defaults Distance: 15
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distance rip 30
distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected}
Summary Create access list index for the specified source protocol.
User-Entered <listnumber>
Parameters A numerical value identifying the access list. Acceptable values are from 1 to 199.
{ospf | bgp | static | connected}

This parameter indicates the protocol that the distribution IP access list index will
filter for.
Description This command is used to specify a standard IP access list index number, ranging from
1-199, for which routes received from the specified source protocol will be filtered.
“no” Form no distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected}

The “no” form of this command removes filtering of routes received from the selected
protocol for the specified IP access list entry.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distribute-list 2 out ospf
6-3
enable
Summary Enable RIP operation mode.
6.2 Required Mode Router RIP Config
RIP User-Entered None

Configuration Parameters
Commands Description Reset and enable the RIP administrative mode on the Pannaway BAR.
“no” Form no enable

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of RIP in the router to
disabled (inactive).
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#enable
hostroutesaccept
Summary Enable host routes accept mode.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the RIP host routes accept mode.
“no” Form no hostroutesaccept

The “no” form of this command disables the RIP host routes accept mode.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#hostroutesaccept
6-4
redistribute {bgp | static | connected} [metric <metricvalue>]
Summary Configure RIP redistribution settings.
Required Mode Router RIP Config 6.2

User-Entered {bgp | static | connected} RIP
Parameters The selected value represents the source protocol that the BAR will redistribute. Configuration
metric <metricvalue>
Commands
This optional parameter specifies a routing metric to use in place of the default metric
for the BAR. The <metricvalue> value is a whole number from 0 to 15.
Description This command configures RIP routing to redistribute routes from the specified source
protocol/routers. The route value can be OSPF, BGP, Static, or Connected.
“no” Form no redistribute {bgp | static | connected}

The “no” version of this command prevents RIP routing from redistributing routes
from the specified source/protocol routers.
Defaults Metric: unspecified
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#redistribute bgp metric 10
redistribute ospf [metric <metricvalue>] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-
external-2]]
Summary Set OSPF router redistribution handling for the BAR.
User-Entered metric <metricvalue>

Parameters This optional parameter specifies a routing metric to use in place of the default metric
for the BAR. The <metricvalue> value is a whole number from 0 to 15.
[match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external-2]]
These optional parameters specify the OSPF match type(s) that will be redistributed.
Description This command configures RIP routing to redistribute OSPF routes.
“no” Form no redistribute ospf [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external 2]]
The “no” version of this command prevents RIP routing from redistributing OSPF
routes of the specified match type.

Match: internal
6-5
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#redistribute ospf metric 1 match internal nssa-

external 1 nssa-external 2
6.2 Related Commands show ip rip on page 6-9
RIP
Configuration split-horizon {none | simple | poison}
Commands
Summary Set RIP split horizon mode on the BAR.
User-Entered {none | simple | poison}

Parameters The single argument for this command is the type of split horizon mode to be used on
the BAR:
• none: enable RIP operation without split horizon mode.
• simple: use simple split horizon operation to stop advertisement of learned
routes through the interface the route was learned from.
• poison: use split horizon with poison reverse to advertise routes as invalid.
Description The use of an appropriate mode limits the propagation of already known routes. When
a route is learned, a BAR using split horizon will not re-advertise the route through the
interface it came in on. A BAR using the poison reverse mode will send updates with
invalid metrics to “prune” any re-advertised routes from connected RIP routers.
“no” Form no split-horizon

The “no” form of this command sets the RIP split horizon mode to its default value of
simple.
Defaults Mode: simple
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#split-horizon poison
Interface-level RIP The commands in this section configure RIP operation on an individual interface level.
Commands
ip rip
Summary Enable RIP operation on the current interface.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the operation of the RIP protocol on the currently selected
BAR interface.
6-6
“no” Form no ip rip

The “no” version of this command disables the RIP protocol on a router interface (the
default state).
Defaults
Example
Mode disabled.
6.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip
RIP
Configuration
Commands
Related Commands show ip rip interface <slot/port> on page 6-11
ip rip authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}
Summary Configure RIPv2 authentication mode for the interface.
User-Entered none
Parameters If this parameter is selected, no authentication will be used for RIP.
simple <key>
If the “simple” parameter is selected the BAR will use simple (password) authentication
for RIP operations. A <key> value must be supplied. The <key> is up to 8
alphanumeric, non-control characters.
encrypt <key> <keyid>
If “encrypt” is selected as the authentication parameter, the BAR will use encrypted RIP
authentication. A <key> value of up to 256 alphanumeric characters must be supplied,
and an additional <keyid> value, from 0 - 255, must also be specified.
Description This command sets the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key (if used) for the
specified interface.
“no” Form no ip rip authentication

The “no” form of this command sets the default RIP Authentication Type for the
interface (no authentication, no password key, no key id).
Defaults Mode: no authentication
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip authentication encrypt abcd1234 4
6-7
ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none}
Summary Set RIP control packet receive permissions for the interface.
RIP User-Entered rip1

Configuration Parameters Only receive RIP version 1 formatted control packets; discard RIP 2.
Commands rip2
Only receive RIP version 2 formatted control packets; discard RIP 1.
both
Receive both RIP version 1 and version 2 formatted control packets.
none
Discard any RIP control packets.
Description This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified
version(s) to be received or discarded.
“no” Form no ip rip receive version

The “no” version of this command configures the interface to the default RIP receive
version of both.
Defaults Version: both
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip receive version both
ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none}
Summary Set the RIP control packet format sent by the interface.
User-Entered rip1
Parameters Only broadcast RIP version 1 formatted control packets.
rip1c
Only broadcast RIP version 1c formatted control packets.
rip2
Only broadcast RIP version 2 formatted control packets.
none
Do not broadcast RIP control packets.
Description This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified
version(s) to be broadcast transmitted, or deny broadcasting of the specified control
packets.
6-8
“no” Form no ip rip send version

The “no” version of this command configures the interface to the default RIP send
version of rip1c.
Defaults
Example
Version: rip1c
6.3
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip send version rip1c
RIP Display
Commands
6.3 RIP Display Commands

The commands in this section provide access to RIP operational and configuration
statistics.
show ip rip
Summary Show RIP settings for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays information relevant to the RIP operation of the Broadband
Aggregation Router, including current RIP settings and modes.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip rip
RIP Admin Mode................................. Enable

Split Horizon Mode............................. Poison Reverse
Auto Summary Mode.............................. Enable
Host Routes Accept Mode........................ Enable
Global route changes........................... 0
Global queries................................. 0
Default Metric................................. Not configured

Default Route Advertise........................ 1
Redistributing.................................
Source......................................... ospf
Metric......................................... 12
Match Value.................................... ’nssa-external 2’
Distribute List................................ 2
Redistributing.................................
Source......................................... bgp
Metric......................................... 10
Distribute List................................ Not configured
6-9
Command Output The following information is displayed on the show ip rip screen:
RIP Admin Mode The administrative mode of router RIP operation: enabled or
disabled.
6.3 Split Horizon Mode
Auto Summary Mode

The split horizon setting.
The RIP auto summarization mode setting: enabled or disabled.

RIP Display
Host Routes Accept Mode The RIP host routes accept mode setting: enabled or disabled.
Commands
Global Route Changes The number of route changes made by RIP to the IP Route
Database.
Global Queries The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other
systems.
Default-metric The default metric value set for RIP operation. This is a
configured value.
Default Route Advertise Indicates whether the default routes received from other source
protocols are advertised or not.
The following information is show for each redistributed protocol:
Source Source protocol/routes that are being redistributed.
Metric Metric of the routes being redistributed.
Match-Value The criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into other
routing domains (OSPF only).
Distribute-List Access list used to filter redistributed routes.
Related Commands default-information originate on page 6-2

default-metric <metric> on page 6-2
enable on page 6-4
distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected} on page 6-3
redistribute {bgp | static | connected} [metric <metricvalue>] on page 6-5
redistribute ospf [metric <metricvalue>] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-
external 1] [nssa-external-2]] on page 6-5
router-id <router_id> on page 7-16
show ip rip interface brief
Summary Show a summary of RIP settings for BAR interfaces.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays a short table of basic RIP settings, modes, and conditions for
the interfaces of the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
6-10
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip rip interface brief

Send Receive RIP Link
Slot/Port IP Address Version Version Mode State
--------- --------------- ----------- -----------
0/1
0/2
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
---------
Disable
Disable
----------
-----
-----
6.3
0/6 10.10.17.1 RIP-2 Both Enable Down RIP Display
0/9 ----- ----- ----- Disable -----
Commands
Command Output The following information is displayed on the show ip rip interface brief screen:
Slot/Port The unit slot/port identifying each interface.
IP Address The IP address assigned to the RIP interface.
Send Version The RIP version(s) used when sending updates on the interface. The
types are none, RIP-1, RIP-1c, or RIP-2.
Receive Version The RIP version(s) allowed when receiving updates from the interface.
The types are none, RIP-1, RIP-2, or Both.
RIP Mode The administrative mode of router RIP operation on the interface:
enabled or disabled.
Link State The link state of the interface (link up or link down).

ip rip on page 6-6
ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none} on page 6-8
ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none} on page 6-8
show ip rip interface <slot/port>
Summary Display the RIP configuration and mode settings for the specified interface.
Description This command displays RIP information related to the interface identified by
<slot/port>.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
6-11
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip rip interface 0/1
Interface...................................... 0/1
6.3 IP Address.....................................
Send version...................................
Receive version................................
10.10.23.1
RIP-1c
Both
RIP Display RIP Admin Mode................................. Enable
Link State..................................... Down
Commands
Authentication Type............................ None
Default Metric................................. -----
Bad Packets Received........................... -----
Bad Routes Received............................ -----
Updates Sent................................... -----
Command Output The following fields are displayed on the show ip rip interface screen:
Interface The unit slot/port identifying each interface.
IP Address The IP address assigned to the specified RIP interface.
Send version The RIP version(s) used when sending updates on the specified
interface: none, RIP-1, RIP-1c, or RIP-2.
Receive version The RIP version(s) allowed when receiving updates from the
specified interface: none, RIP-1, RIP-2, or both.
RIP Admin Mode The administrative mode of RIP operation on this interface: enabled
or disabled.
Link State Indicates whether the link on this interface is up or down.
Authentication Type The RIP Authentication Type for the interface: none, simple, and
encrypt.
Authentication Key The RIP Authentication Key for the interface is simple or encrypted
authentication are set for the interface. The actual key will be **** to
avoid compromising privacy.
Authentication Key ID The RIP Authentication Key ID for the specified interface.
Default Metric The metric used for default routes in RIP updates originated on the
The following information will be invalid if the link state is “down”:
Bad Packets Received The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process
which were subsequently discarded for any reason.
Bad Routes Received The number of routes contained in valid RIP packets that were
ignored for any reason.
Updates Sent The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface.

ip rip on page 6-6
ip rip authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}} on page 6-7
ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none} on page 6-8
ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none} on page 6-8
routing on page 5-2
6-12
Chapter 7
OSPF Routing Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
routing commands in the Pannaway BAR.

This chapter provides a list of the CLI commands that configure and control OSPF
routing operations on the BAR. This chapter also provides descriptions of the
commands that supply information about OSPF settings and statistics. The following
topics are presented in this chapter:
Topic on page
OSPF Configuration Commands 7-1
OSPF Display Commands 7-22
7.2 OSPF Configuration Commands

The following commands control operation of the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First)
routing protocol on the BAR.
System-Level OSPF These commands configure OSPF on the BAR at a system-wide level.
Commands
1583compatibility
Summary Enable OSPF 1583 compatibility on the BAR.
Required Mode Router OSPF Config
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the RFC 1583 compatibility mode of operation for the
interfaces in the BAR.
NOTE: 1583 compatibility mode is enabled by default. If all OSPF routers in the
routing domain are capable of operating according to RFC 2328, OSPF 1583
compatibility mode should be disabled with the “no” form of the command.
“no” Form no 1583compatibility

The “no” form of this command disables OSPF 1583 compatibility.
7.2 Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#no 1583compatibility

OSPF
Configuration
Related Commands show ip ospf on page 7-22
Commands
area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt}
Summary Set authentication type for an OSPF area.
User-Entered <areaid>
Parameters The identification of the OSPF area to be configured. Values from 0.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255 are acceptable.
none
Sets the BAR to use no authentication for OSPF area operation.
simple
Configures the BAR to use simple authentication for OSPF.
encrypt
Sets the BAR to use encrypted authentication methods for OSPF on this area.
Description This command specifies the authentication type to be used for the specified OSPF area.
“no” Form no area <areaid> authentication

The “no” form of this command sets the authentication type to be used for the
specified <areaid> back to the default of “none”.
Defaults Authentication type: none
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 authentication encrypt
Related Commands show ip ospf area <areaid> on page 7-24
area <areaid> default-cost <cost>
Summary Configure default cost for stub or not-so-stubby areas.
7-2
<cost>
The OSPF cost of the stub area or not-so-stubby area. Acceptable values are from
1 - 16,777,215.
7.2
Description This command configures the monetary default cost for the stub area or nssa. The
operator must specify the <areaid> and an integer value between 1-16,777,215 for
default cost.
OSPF
“no” Form None Configuration
Defaults None Commands
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 default-cost 5
area <areaid> nssa
Summary Configures an OSPF area to function as an NSSA.
Description This command configures the specified <areaid> to function as an NSSA (“not so
stubby area”).
“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa

This command removes a configured NSSA function from the specified <areaid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa
area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate [<metric>] {comparable | non-comparable}
Summary Configure metrics for the NSSA’s default route.
[<metric>]
The optional <metric> parameter specifies the metric of the default route and must be
in a range of 1-16,777,215.
7-3
{comparable | non-comparable}
Selects the metric type that will be advertised for the NSSA. The metric type can be
“comparable” (nssa-external 1) or “non-comparable” (nssa-external 2).
7.2
Description This command configures the metric value and type for the default route advertised
into the NSSA specified by <areaid>.
If no metric is specified, the default metric value is 1 and the metric type is comparable.
OSPF
Configuration “no” Form no area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate
Commands The “no” form of this command sets the specified area to the default values for the
Metric and Metric-type parameters.
Defaults Metric: 1
Metric-type: comparable
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa default-info-originate 20

comparable
area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute
Summary Stop NSSA redistribution of learned routes.
Description This command configures the NSSA ABR (Area Border Router) so that learned
external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA specified by <areaid>.
“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute

Use the “no” form of this command to redistribute learned external routes into the
NSSA specified by <areaid>.
Defaults Mode enabled (no redistribution)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa no-redistribute
area <areaid> nssa no-summary
Summary Stop advertisement of summary LSAs by NSSA.
7-4
7.2
Description This command configures the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised into the
NSSA specified by <areaid>.
“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa no-summary OSPF

Use the “no” form of this command to advertise summary LSAs into the NSSA Configuration
specified by <areaid>. Commands
Defaults Mode enabled (no summary LSAs)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa no-summary
area <areaid> nssa translator-role {always | candidate}
Summary Set translator role of NSSA.
Required Mode Router OSPF Config.
{always | candidate}
The translator role that the specified NSSA will take:
• Always: The router will assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a
border router. It will always translate Type-7 LSAs into Type-5 LSAs regardless
of the translator state of other NSSA border routers.
• Candidate: The router will participate in the translator election process when it
attains border router status.
Description This command configures the translator role of the NSSA specified by <areaid>. This
specifies whether or not an NSSA border router will unconditionally translate Type-7
LSAs into Type-5 LSAs.
“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa translator-role

Use the “no” form of this command to set the NSSA translator role back to its default
of candidate.
Defaults Translator-role: candidate
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa translator-role always
7-5
area <areaid> nssa translator-stab-intv <stabilityinterval>
Summary Configure NSSA stability interval setting.
7.2 Required Mode Router OSPF Config
OSPF User-Entered <areaid>

Configuration Parameters The identification of the OSPF area to be configured. Values from 0.0.0.0 to
Commands 255.255.255.255 are acceptable.
<stabilityinterval>
The period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it
determines that its translator status has been deposed by another NSSA border router
translator.
Description This command configures the translator stability interval of the NSSA border router.
“no” Form None
Defaults Stabilityinterval: 40
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa translator-stab-intv 45
area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask> {summarylink | nssaexternallink} [advertise | not-advertise]
Summary Create an area range in the NSSA.
<ipaddr>
The <ipaddr> is a valid IP address.
<subnetmask>
The <subnetmask> is a valid subnet mask.
{summarylink | nssaexternallink}
The Link State Database (LSDB) type for the area range.
[advertise | not-advertise]
The optional advertising setting of the new area. Entering “advertise” allows
advertisement.
Description This command creates a defined area range for the NSSA specified by <areaid>. The
range performs the dual function of setting propagation policy via its Advertise/
DoNotAdvertise parameter and aggregation via its network address and mask pair.
7-6
“no” Form no area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask>

The “no” form of this command deletes an area range specified by <ipaddr> and
<subnetmask>.
Defaults
Example
None
7.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 range 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.252
OSPF
nssaexternallink advertise Configuration
Commands
area <areaid> stub
Summary Create a stub area.
Parameters The identification of the OSPF area that the stub will be created on. Values from 0.0.0.0
to 255.255.255.255 are acceptable.
Description This command creates a stub area for the specified <areaid>. A stub area is
characterized by the fact that AS External LSAs (Autonomous System External Link
Service Announcements) are not propagated into the area. Removing AS External
LSAs and Summary LSAs can significantly reduce the link state database of routers
within the stub area.
“no” Form no area <areaid> stub

The “no” form of this command deletes a stub area for the specified <areaid>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.6 stub
area <areaid> stub summarylsa
Summary Set Summary LSA mode.
Description This command configures the Summary LSA mode for the stub area identified by
<areaid> to enabled. The Summary LSA mode is configured as enabled.
7-7
“no” Form no area <areaid> stub summarylsa

The “no” form of this command disables the Summary LSA mode for the stub area
identified by <areaid>. This is the default state.
7.2 Defaults
Example
Mode disabled
OSPF (Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.6 stub summarylsa

Configuration
Commands
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor>
Summary Create an OSPF virtual interface.
<neighbor>
The IP address of a neighbor interface for the new virtual link.
Description This command creates the OSPF virtual interface for the specified <areaid> and
<neighbor>.
NOTE: Virtual links cannot be created across stub areas and NSSAs.
“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor>

The “no” form of this command deletes the OSPF virtual interface from the specified
<areaid> and <neighbor>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1
Related Commands show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor> on page 7-28

show ip ospf virtual-link brief on page 7-30
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication {none | simple <key> | encrypt <key> <keyid>}
Summary Set authentication mode for a virtual interface.
7-8
<neighbor>
The IP address of the neighbor interface for the virtual link.
{none | simple | encrypt}
7.2
The encryption mode that the interface will use.
<key>
An authentication key that will be used for the interface. A key must be supplied if
“simple” or “encrypt” are selected as authentication options. The key must consist of OSPF
standard alphanumeric characters. Configuration
Commands
If “simple” authentication is used, the <key> must be 8 bytes or less in length. If
“encrypt” authentication is used, the key may be up to 256 bytes.
<keyid>
The identification number of the key to be used for encrypted authentication. The keyid
is a number from 0 to 255.
Description This command configures the authentication type and key for the OSPF virtual
interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.
“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication

The “no” form of this command configures the default authentication type for the
OSPF virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>. The <neighbor>
parameter is the IP address of the neighbor.
The default is no authentication, with no default password or default key.
Defaults Authentication: none
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 authentication

simple abcd1234

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval>
Summary Set dead interval timer for the virtual interface.
<neighbor>
The IP address of the neighbor interface that identifies the virtual link.
<d-interval>
The dead interval value for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable
range for this value is from 1 to 65,535 seconds.
Description This command configures the dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the
virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.
7-9
“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval

The “no” form of this command restores the dead interval to its default of 40 seconds.
Defaults D-interval: 40
7.2 Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 dead-interval

OSPF 60
Configuration
Commands Related Commands show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor> on page 7-28
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval>
Summary Set hello interval for the virtual link.
<neighbor>
<h-interval>
The hello interval value for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable
range for this value is from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Description This command configures the hello interval (in seconds) for the OSPF virtual interface
on the virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.
“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval

The “no” form of this command restores the hello interval for the specified virtual
interface to its default 10 seconds.
Defaults H-interval: 10
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 hello-interval

15

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval>
Summary Set retransmit interval for an OSPF area.
7-10
7.2
<neighbor>
<r-interval>
The retransmit interval value for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The OSPF
acceptable range for this value is from 0 to 3600 seconds. Configuration
Commands
Description This command configures the retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the
“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval

The “no” form of this command restores the retransmit interval for the specified
virtual interface to its default 5 seconds.
Defaults R-interval: 5
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 retransmit-

interval 8

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay>
Summary Configure transmit delay for a virtual link.
<neighbor>
<delay>
The transmit delay setting for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable
range for this value is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
Description This command configures the transmit delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the
“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay

The “no” form of this command restores the transmit delay for the specified virtual
interface to its default of 1 second.
Defaults Delay: 1
7-11
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 transmit-delay 2
7.2 Related Commands show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor> on page 7-28
OSPF
Configuration default-information originate [always] [metric <value>] [metric-type {1 | 2}]
Commands
Summary Set route advertisement behavior.
User-Entered [always]
Parameters This optional parameter sets the BAR to always advertise default routes.
[metric <value>]
This optional parameter specifies a metric value for default routes advertised by the
BAR. The <value> may be from 0 to 16,777,215
[metric-type {1 | 2}]
This optional parameter specifies the metric type that the BAR will advertise.
Description This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes.
“no” Form no default-information originate

The “no” form of this command restores the advertisement of default routes back to
the default state of an unspecified metric and 2 as the default metric type.

Metric-type: 2
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-information originate always metric 15

metric-type 2
default-metric <value>
Summary Set a default metric for OSPF interfaces.
User-Entered <value>
Parameters This parameter specifies the new default metric for distributed OSPF routes. The value
may be from 1 to 16,777,215
Description This command is used to set a default metric value for distributed OSPF routes.
“no” Form no default-metric

The “no” form of this command restores the default-metric value for distributed OSPF
routes back to the default of not configured.
7-12
Defaults Not configured
Example
7.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-metric 15

OSPF
Configuration
distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2} <preference-value>
Commands
Summary Set the preference value for OSPF route types on the BAR.
User-Entered {intra | inter | type1 | type2}

Parameters Specifies the type of OSPF route that the new distance preference value will apply to.
<preference-value>
The preference value assigned to the specified route type. The acceptable range of
values for this parameter is 0 - 255. Lower values represent an increased preference for
the route.
Description This command sets the preference value of OSPF in the router for each route type.
Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route. The type
of OSPF route can be intra, inter, type-1, or type-2.
The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the
routes learned via OSPF in the following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.
“no” Form no distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2}

The “no” form of this command resets the route preference values of OSPF to the
defaults.
Defaults Intra preference value: 8

Inter preference value: 10
Type-1 preference value: 13
Type-2 preference value: 150
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distance ospf type2 175
enable
Summary Enable OSPF routing.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command resets the default administrative mode of OSPF in the router to enabled
(active).
7-13
“no” Form no enable

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of OSPF in the router to
disabled (inactive).
7.2 Defaults
Example
Mode enabled
OSPF (Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#enable

Configuration
Commands
exit-overflow-interval <o-interval>
Summary Set exit overflow interval for the BAR.
User-Entered <o-interval>
Parameters This interval is the number of seconds after entering overflow state that a router will
wait before attempting to leave the overflow state. Acceptable values are from 0 (never
automatically leave overflow state) to 2,147,483,647 seconds.
Description This command configures the exit overflow interval for OSPF. This allows the router to
again originate non-default AS-external-LSAs. When set to 0, the router will not leave
overflow state until restarted.
“no” Form no exit-overflow-interval

The “no” form of this command restores the exit overflow interval to its default of 0.
Defaults O-interval: 0 (never automatically leave overflow state)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#exit-overflow-interval 5000
external-lsdb-limit <l-limit>
Summary Set LSDB overflow state limit.
User-Entered <l-limit>
Parameters The LSDB limit for OSPF operation on the BAR. The value for this parameter may be
from -1 (indicating no limit) to 2,147,483,647.
Description This command configures the external LSDB limit for OSPF. When the number of
non-default AS-external-LSAs in a router’s link-state database reaches the external
LSDB limit, the router enters overflow state. The router never holds more than the
external LSDB limit non-default AS-external-LSAs in its database. The external LSDB
limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and/or any
regular OSPF area.
7-14
“no” Form no external-lsdb-limit

The “no” form of this command restores the external LSDB limit to its default value
of -1.
Defaults
Example
L-limit: -1
7.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#external-lsdb-limit 200000
OSPF
Configuration
Commands
distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected}
Summary Specify a standard access list index number for incoming protocols.
User-Entered <list-number>
Parameters A numerical value identifying the access list. Acceptable values are from 1 to 199.
{rip | bgp | static | connected}

This parameter indicates the protocol that the distribution IP access list index will
filter for.
Description This command is used to specify a standard IP access list index number, ranging from
1-199, for which routes received from the specified source protocol will be filtered.
“no” Form no distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected}

The “no” form of this command removes filtering of routes received from the selected
protocol for the specified IP access list entry.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distribute-list 2 out rip
redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric <metrictype>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag <tagvalue>]
[subnets]
Summary Set route redistribution behavior for OSPF.
User-Entered {rip | bgp | static | connected}

Parameters The selected parameter indicates the type of source protocol (RIP, BGP, static) or
router (connected) that will be redistributed.
metric <metrictype>
This optional parameter specifies a routing metric to use in place of the default metric
for the BAR. The <metrictype> value is a whole number from 0 to 16,777,215.
7-15
metric-type {1 | 2}
This optional parameter defines the type of metric that the <metrictype> parameter
represents.
7.2
tag <tagvalue>
This optional parameter specifies a tag value for the redistributed routes. The
<tagvalue> value is a whole number from 0 to 4,294,967,295.
OSPF subnets
Configuration This optional parameter, if specified, applies the redistribute command to subnets.
Commands
Description This command configures OSPF routing to redistribute routes from the specified
source protocol/routers.
“no” Form no redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric] [metric-type] [tag] [subnets]
The “no” version of this command prevents OSPF routing from redistributing routes
from the specified source/protocol routers.

Metric type: 2
tag: 0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#redistribute bgp metric 0 metric-type 2 tag 0 subnets
router-id <router_id>
Summary Set the ID of the OSPF router.
User-Entered <router_id>
Parameters The number, in dotted decimal notation, of the router OSPF ID.
Description This command sets the unique identifier of the router OSPF ID.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#router-id 10.10.5.17
trapflags
Summary Set the trap flag mode.
7-16
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables OSPF traps.
“no” Form no trapflags

The “no” form of this command disables OSPF traps. 7.2
OSPF
Configuration
Example Commands
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#trapflags

show snmptrap on page 13-13
show trapflags on page 13-14
show logging on page 15-8
Interface-Level The following commands configure OSPF on a specific BAR interface.

OSPF Commands
ip ospf
Summary Enable OSPF operation on the interface.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables OSPF on a router interface.
“no” Form no ip ospf

The “no” form of this command disables OSPF on a router interface.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip ospf
Related Commands show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31
ip ospf areaid <areaid>
Summary Assign interface to an OSPF area.
Parameters The identification of the OSPF area that the interface connects to. Values from 0.0.0.0
to 255.255.255.255 are acceptable.
Description This command sets the OSPF area to which the specified router interface belongs.
7-17
“no” Form None
Defaults None
7.2
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf areaid 0.0.0.7
OSPF
Configuration
Commands
ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}
Summary Set OSPF authentication behavior.
User-Entered {none | simple | encrypt}

Parameters The encryption mode that the interface will use.
<key>
An authentication key that will be used for the interface. A key must be supplied if
“simple” or “encrypt” are selected as authentication options. The key must be made of
standard alphanumeric characters.
If “simple” authentication is used, the <key> must be 8 bytes or less in length. If
“encrypt” authentication is used, the key may be up to 256 bytes.
<keyid>
The identification number of the key to be used for encrypted authentication. The keyid
is a number from 0 to 255.
Description This command sets the OSPF Authentication Type and Key for the specified interface.
NOTE: The authentication setting must match the authentication set for the OSPF
area to which the port belongs.
“no” Form no ip ospf authentication

The “no” form of this command sets the default OSPF Authentication Type for the
interface (no authentication, no password key, no key id).
Defaults Authentication type: none
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf authentication encrypt abcd12345
Related Commands area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt} on page 7-2
show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31
ip ospf cost <cost>
Summary Set the cost of the OSPF interface.
7-18
User-Entered <cost>
Parameters The cost of the interface. Values from 1 to 65,535 are acceptable.
Description This command configures the cost of an OSPF interface.
“no” Form no ip ospf cost

The “no” form of this command sets the OSPF cost to its default value of 10. 7.2
OSPF
Defaults Cost: 10
Configuration
Example Commands
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf cost 20
ip ospf hello interval <h-interval>
Summary Set hello interval time for the interface.
User-Entered <h-interval>
Parameters The hello interval for the interface. Values are measured in seconds, and may be from 1
to 65,535 seconds.
NOTE: The hello interval used for the interface must be the same for all OSPF
routers attached to the network.
Description This command sets the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface, in seconds.
“no” Form no ip ospf hello interval

The “no” form of this command sets the OSPF hello interval for this interface back to
its default value of 10 seconds.
Defaults H-interval: 10 seconds
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip ospf hello-interval 15
Related Commands ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-19

show ip ospf interface brief on page 7-33
ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval>
Summary Set dead interval timer for the interface.
7-19
User-Entered <d-interval>
Parameters The dead interval value for the interface. The acceptable range for this value is from 1
to 2,147,483,647 seconds. The recommended value for the dead interval is a multiple of
the hello interval configured for the interface.
7.2 Description This command sets the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface, in <seconds>.
The value is a valid positive integer, which represents the length of time in seconds that
OSPF a router’s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbor routers declare that the
Configuration router is down. The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers
Commands attached to a common network.
“no” Form no ip ospf dead-interval

The “no” form of this command restores the interface’s OSPF dead interval back to its
default value of 40.
Defaults D-interval: 40 seconds (4 * default hello interval)
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf dead-interval 60
Related Commands ip ospf hello interval <h-interval> on page 7-19

ip ospf priority <priority>
Summary Set the priority value of the interface.
Parameters The priority value assigned to the interface. Acceptable values are from 0 to 255. Lower
values indicate a higher priority. A priority value of ‘0’ indicates that the router is not
eligible to become the designated router on this network.
Description This command sets the OSPF priority for the specified router interface.
“no” Form no ip ospf priority

The “no” form of this command restores this interface’s OSPF priority value to its
default of 1 (the highest priority).
Defaults Priority: 1
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf priority 2

7-20
ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval>
Summary Set the interface’s retransmit interval.

User-Entered <r-interval> OSPF
Parameters This parameter specifies the retransmit interval for the interface. This value may be Configuration
from 0 to 3,600 seconds. Commands
Description This command sets the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface, in seconds.
This is the number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions for
adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when
retransmitting database descriptions and link-state request packets.
“no” Form no ip ospf retransmit-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the OSPF retransmit interval for the interface
to its default value of 5.
Defaults R-interval: 5 seconds
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf retransmit-interval 10

ip ospf transmit-delay <delay>
Summary Set the interface’s transmit delay value.
User-Entered <delay>
Parameters The retransmit delay value for the interface. Acceptable values are from 1 to 3600,
measured in seconds.
Description This command sets the OSPF Transmit Delay for the specified interface. In addition, it
sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over
this interface.
“no” Form no ospf transmit-delay

The “no” form of this command rests the OSPF transmit delay for the interface to its
default value of 1.
Defaults Delay: 1 second
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf transmit-delay 10

7-21
7.3 OSPF Display Commands

The following commands provide statistics and configuration information for OSPF
operation on the BAR.
7.3 show ip ospf

OSPF Display
Summary Show the OSPF routing settings of the BAR.
Commands
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays information relevant to the OSPF router.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf

Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17
OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable
ASBR Mode...................................... Enable
RFC 1583 Compatibility......................... Enable
ABR Status..................................... Enable
Exit Overflow Interval......................... 5000
External LSA Count............................. 4294967295
External LSA Checksum.......................... 4294949548
New LSAs Originated............................ 132
LSAs Received.................................. 0
External LSDB Limit............................ No Limit
Default Metric................................. 15
Default Route Advertise........................ Disabled

Always......................................... FALSE
Metric.........................................
Metric Type.................................... External Type 2
Redistributing.................................
Source......................................... bgp
Metric......................................... 0
Metric Type.................................... 2
--More-- or (q)uit
Tag............................................ 0
Subnets........................................ Yes
Distribute List................................ Not configured
Command Output The following information is show in response to the show ip ospf command:
Router ID The 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router
about which information is displayed.
OSPF Admin Mode The administrative mode of OSPF in the router.
7-22
ASBR Mode Indicates whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled.

Enabled implies that the router is an autonomous system border
router. A router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is
configured to redistribute routes learned from other protocols. The
7.3
possible values for the ASBR status is enabled (if the router is
configured to re-distribute routes learnt by other protocols) or
disabled (if the router is not configured for the same).
RFC 1583 Compatibility Indicates whether 1583 compatibility is enabled or disbled. OSPF Display
Default-Metric The router’s default metric value for redistributed routes. Commands
Source Source protocol/routes that the router can redistribute.
Metric-value Metric of the routes being redistributed.
Match-value The criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into other
routing domains.
Type-value External Type 1 or External Type 2 routes.
Tag-value Decimal value attached to each external route.
Subnets For redistributing routes into OSPF, the scope of redistribution for
the specified protocol.
Distribute-list Access list used to filter redistributed routes.
Default Route Advertise Indicates whether the default routes received from other source
protocols are advertised (Enabled) or not (Disabled).
The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled.
ABR Status Indicates whether or not the router is an OSPF Area Border
Router.
Exit Overflow Interval The number of seconds that, after entering OverflowState, a
router will attempt to leave OverflowState.
External LSA count The number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in
the link-state database.
External LSA Checksum A number which represents the sum of the LS checksums of
external link-state advertisements contained in the link-state
database.
New LSAs Originated The number of new link-state advertisements that have been
originated.
LSAs Received The number of link-state advertisements received determined to

be new instantiations.
External LSDB Limit The maximum number of non-default AS-external-LSAs entries

that can be stored in the link-state database.
Related Commands 1583compatibility on page 7-1

default-information originate [always] [metric <value>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] on page 7-12
default-metric <value> on page 7-12
enable on page 7-13
distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected} on page 7-15
exit-overflow-interval <o-interval> on page 7-14
external-lsdb-limit <l-limit> on page 7-14
redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric <metrictype>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag
<tagvalue>] [subnets] on page 7-15
router-id <router_id> on page 7-16
7-23
show ip ospf area <areaid>
Summary Show the configuration of an OSPF area.
OSPF Display User-Entered <areaid>

Commands Parameters The identification of an existing OSPF area to be viewed.
Description This command displays information about the area.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf area 0.0.0.7

AreaID......................................... 0.0.0.7
Aging Interval................................. 10
External Routing............................... Import NSSAs
Authentication Type............................ Encrypt
Spf Runs....................................... 1
Area Border Router Count....................... 0
Area LSA Count................................. 1
Area LSA Checksum.............................. 44597
Stub Mode...................................... Disable
Import Summary LSAs............................ Enable
OSPF NSSA Specific Information.
No-Summary Mode................................ Enable

No-Redistribute Mode........................... Enable
Default Information Originate.................. FALSE
Default Metric................................. 10
Default Metric Type............................ Non-Comparable
Translator Role................................ Candidate
Translator Stability Interval.................. 40
Translator State............................... Disabled
Command Output The following information is shown on the show ip ospf area screen:
AreaID The area id of the requested OSPF area.
Aging Interval The aging interval for this area.
External Routing The external routing capabilities for this area.
Authentication Type The configured authentication type to use for this area.
Spf Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been
calculated using this area’s link-state database.
Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this
area.
Area LSA Count The total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-
state database, excluding AS External LSA’s.
7-24
Area LSA Checksum A number representing the Area LSA Checksum for the
specified AreaID excluding the external (LS type 5) link-state
advertisements.
7.3
Stub Mode Indicates whether the specified Area is a stub area or not. The
possible values are enabled and disabled.
Import Summary LSAs Indicates whether the area Summary LSA mode for stub areas
is enabled or disabled. OSPF Display
Commands
If the value is configured as a stub area, the following stub area-specific information is
displayed
Type of Service The BAR only supports Normal type of service.
Metric Value The Metric Value for the specified area.
Metric Type The Default Metric Type for the specified Area.
If the area is configured as an NSSA, the following NSSA-specific information is

displayed.
No-Summary Mode Indicates whether the area Summary LSA mode for NSSAs is
enabled or disabled.
No-Redistribute Mode Indicates the No Redistribute mode setting for the NSSA:
enabled (external routes are not distributed) or disabled
(external routes are distributed).
Default Information Originate Indicates whether the metric value and type for the default
route advertised into the NSSA has been administratively
configured (TRUE) or left at the default state (FALSE).
Default Metric Indicates the metric value for the default route advertised into
the NSSA.
Default Metric Type Indicates the metric type (comparable or non-comparable) for
the default route advertised into the NSSA.
Translator Role Indicates whether this NSSA’s border router unconditionally

becomes the LSA translator (always), or participates in a
translator election process (candidate).
Translator Stability Interval Displays the translator stability interval set for this NSSA’s
border router.
Translator State Displays the current translator state: enabled or disabled.
Related Commands area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt} on page 7-2
area <areaid> default-cost <cost> on page 7-2
area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate [<metric>] {comparable | non-comparable} on
page 7-3
area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute on page 7-4
area <areaid> nssa no-summary on page 7-4
area <areaid> nssa translator-role {always | candidate} on page 7-5
area <areaid> nssa translator-stab-intv <stabilityinterval> on page 7-6
area <areaid> stub on page 7-7
area <areaid> stub summarylsa on page 7-7
show ip ospf area <areaid> on page 7-24
7-25
show ip ospf database
Summary Show the contents of the OSPF database.
OSPF Display User-Entered None

Commands Parameters
Description This command displays the link state database. This command will only display
information if OSPF administrative mode is enabled on the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf database
Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17

Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.0
LSA Type....................................... network
LS ID.......................................... 10.10.8.0
Age............................................ 85
Sequence....................................... 80000018
Checksum....................................... 48959
Options........................................ Q-MCOV
Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17

Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.6
LSA Type....................................... router links
LS ID.......................................... 10.10.5.17
Age............................................ 1095
Sequence....................................... 8000000f
Checksum....................................... 46365
Options........................................ QEMCOV
--More-- or (q)uit
Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17

Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.6
LSA Type....................................... network summary
LS ID.......................................... 0.0.0.0
Age............................................ 1733
Sequence....................................... 8000000c
Checksum....................................... 54597
Options........................................ QEMCOV
Command Output The following information is shown in response to the command:
Router ID The 32 bit dotted decimal number representing the LSDB interface.
Area ID The OSPF area ID for the BAR.
LSA Type The types are: router, network, ipnet sum, asbr sum, as external, group
member, tmp 1, tmp 2, opaque link, opaque area.
LS ID An identification number that uniquely identifies an LSA that a router originates

from all other self originated LSA’s of the same LS type.
7-26
Age The age of the link state advertisement in seconds.
Sequence A number that indicates the sequential order of the LSA.
Checksum The total number LSA checksum.
Options An indicator of any special handling LSA receives during routing calculations.
7.3
Related Commands router-id <router_id> on page 7-16 OSPF Display
area <areaid> nssa on page 7-3 Commands
area <areaid> stub on page 7-7
ip ospf areaid <areaid> on page 7-17
show ip ospf range <areaid>
Summary Show the ranges configured for the specified Area ID.
Parameters The identification of the OSPF area to be examined.
Description This command displays information about the area ranges for the specified <areaid>.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf range 0.0.0.7
Area ID IP Address Subnet Mask Lsdb Type Advertisement

--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- -------------
0.0.0.7 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.252 External Link Enabled
Command Output The following information is presented in response to the show ip ospf range
command:
Area ID The area id of the requested OSPF area.
IP Address An IP Address which represents this area range.
Subnet Mask A valid subnet mask for this area range.
Lsdb Type The type of link advertisement associated with this area range.
Advertisement Indicates whether the advertisement status is enabled or disabled.
Related Commands area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask> {summarylink | nssaexternallink} [advertise |
not-advertise] on page 7-6
7-27
show ip ospf stub table
Summary Display the contents of the BAR’s OSPF stub table.

Commands Parameters
Description This command displays the OSPF stub table. The information below will only be
displayed if OSPF is initialized on the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf stub table
AreaId TypeofService Metric Val Metric Type Import SummaryLSA

---------------- ------------- ---------- ------------------- -----------------
0.0.0.6 Normal 15 Non-Comparable Disable
Command Output The following information is shown in the OSPF stub table:
Area ID A 32-bit identifier for the created stub area.
Type of Service The type of service (TOS) associated with the stub metric. The BAR
only supports Normal TOS.
Metric Val The metric value is applied based on the TOS. It defaults to the
least metric of the type of service among the interfaces to other
areas. The OSPF cost for a route is a function of the metric value.
Metric Type The type of metric advertised as the default route.
Import Summary LSA Indicates whether summary LSAs are imported into stub areas.
Related Commands area <areaid> stub on page 7-7

area <areaid> stub summarylsa on page 7-7
show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor>
Summary Display virtual interface information for a BAR area.
Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec.
Parameters The identification of the OSPF area that the virtual link resides in.
<neighbor>
The IP address of the neighbor interface that (in combination with the areaID) defines
the virtual link.
Description This command displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for a specific area and
neighbor.
7-28
“no” Form None
Defaults None
7.3
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf virtual-link 0.0.0.9 10.10.12.1
Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.9 OSPF Display

Neighbor IP Address............................ 10.10.12.1 Commands
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 60
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
State.......................................... down
Neighbor State................................. down
Authentication Type............................ Simple
Authentication Key............................. ********
Command Output The virtual interface information consists of the following fields:
Area ID The area ID of the requested OSPF area.
Neighbor IP Address The neighbor IP Address that is entered.
Hello Interval The configured hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface.
Dead Interval The configured dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface.
Iftransit Delay Interval The configured transit delay for the OSPF virtual interface.
Retransmit Interval The configured retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface.
State The current state of the OSPF interface: down, loopback, waiting,
point-to-point, designated router, and backup designated router.
Neighbor State Displays the neighbor state.
Authentication Type The configured authentication type of the OSPF virtual interface.
Authentication Key The key used by the authentication method (masked).
Related Commands area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> on page 7-8

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication {none | simple <key> | encrypt <key>
<keyid>} on page 7-8
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-9
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval> on page 7-10
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-10
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-11
7-29
“
show ip ospf virtual-link brief
Summary Show a summary of virtual link information.

Commands Parameters
Description This command displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for all areas in the
system.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf virtual-link brief

Hello Dead Retransmit Transit
Area ID Neighbor Interval Interval Interval Delay
--------------- --------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- --------
0.0.0.9 10.10.12.1 15 60 8 2
Command Output The following information is shown in the table:
Area ID The area ID of the requested OSPF area.
Neighbor The neighbor interface of the OSPF virtual interface.
Hello Interval The configured hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface.
Dead Interval The configured dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface.
Retransmit Interval The configured retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface.
Transit Delay The configured transit delay for the OSPF virtual interface.
Related Commands area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> on page 7-8

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-9
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval> on page 7-10
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-10
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-11
7-30
Interface-Level The following commands display interface-specific OSPF configuration information.

Monitoring
Commands
show ip ospf interface <slot/port>
7.3
Summary Display the OSPF configuration of an interface. OSPF Display
Commands
Parameters The combination of slot number and port number that identifies a unique interface on
the BAR.
Description This command displays the information for the interface object or virtual interface
tables.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf interface 0/2
IP Address..................................... 10.10.10.1
Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.252
OSPF Admin Mode................................ Enable
OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.7
Router Priority................................ 2
Retransmit Interval............................ 5
Hello Interval................................. 10
Dead Interval.................................. 60
LSA Ack Interval............................... 1
Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 5
Authentication Type............................ MD5
Authentication Key............................. ********
Authentication Key ID.......................... 5
Metric Cost.................................... 20
OSPF Interface Type............................ broadcast
State.......................................... designated-router
Designated Router.............................. 10.10.5.17
Backup Designated Router....................... 0.0.0.0
Number of Link Events.......................... 2504
Command Output The following information is shown in the ip ospf interface table:
IP Address The IP address for the specified interface.
Subnet Mask A mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the
OSPF interface.
OSPF Admin Mode Indicates whether OSPF is enabled or disabled on a router

interface.
OSPF Area ID Indicates the OSPF Area ID for the specified interface.
Router Priority The OSPF Priority setting for the specified interface.
Retransmit Interval The OSPF Retransmit Interval for the specified interface.
7-31
Hello Interval The OSPF Hello Interval for the specified interface.
Dead Interval The OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface.
LSA Ack Interval The OSPF LSA Acknowledgement Interval for the specified
7.3 IfTransit Delay Interval

interface.
The OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface.

OSPF Display Authentication Type The OSPF Authentication Type for the specified interface: none,
Commands simple, or encrypt.
Authentication Key The key used by the authentication method.
Authentication Key ID The number of the key type being used in multi-key configurations.
The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled.
Metric Cost The cost of the OSPF interface.
OSPF Interface Type Broadcast LANs, such as Ethernet and IEEE 802.5, take the
value ’broadcast’. The OSPF Interface Type will be ’broadcast’.
State The current state of the OSPF interface: down, loopback,

waiting, point-to-point, designated router, and backup
designated router.
Designated Router The router ID representing the designated router.
Backup Designated Router The router ID representing the backup designated router.
Number of Link Events The number of link events.

ip ospf on page 7-17
ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}} on page 7-18
ip ospf cost <cost> on page 7-18
ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-19
ip ospf hello interval <h-interval> on page 7-19
ip ospf priority <priority> on page 7-20
ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-21
ip ospf transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-21
7-32
show ip ospf interface brief
Summary Display a summary of OSPF settings for interfaces in the BAR.

User-Entered None OSPF Display
Parameters Commands
Description This command displays brief information for the interface object or virtual interface
tables.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf interface brief
Router Hello Dead Retrax Retrax LSAAck

Slot/Port AdminMode Area ID Priority Intval Intval Intval Delay Intval
--------- --------- ----------- -------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
0/1 Enable 0.0.0.6 1 10 40 5 1 1
0/2 Enable 0.0.0.7 2 10 60 5 5 1
0/6 Disable 0.0.0.0 1 10 40 5 1 -----
0/9 Enable 0.0.0.9 1 10 40 5 1 1
Command Output The show ip ospf interface brief command presents the following information:
Slot/Port The combination of a slot number and port number in the BAR that
identifies an OSPF interface.
Admin Mode Indicates whether OSPF is enabled or disabled on a router

interface.
Area ID Indicates the OSPF Area Id for the specified interface.
Router Priority The OSPF Priority setting for the specified interface.
Hello Intval The OSPF Hello Interval for the specified interface.
Dead Intval The OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface.
Retrax Intval The OSPF Retransmit Interval for the specified interface.
Retrax Delay The OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface.
LSA Ack Intval The OSPF LSA Acknowledgement Interval for the specified
interface.
Related Commands ip ospf on page 7-17

ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}} on page 7-18
ip ospf cost <cost> on page 7-18
ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-19
ip ospf hello interval <h-interval> on page 7-19
ip ospf priority <priority> on page 7-20
ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-21
ip ospf transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-21
7-33
show ip ospf interface stats <slot/port>
Summary Display OSPF statistics for a specified interface.
OSPF Display User-Entered <slot/port>

Commands Parameters The combination of slot number and port number that identifies a unique interface on
the BAR.
Description This command displays the statistics for a specific interface. The information below will
only be displayed if OSPF is enabled.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf interface stats 0/2
OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.7

Spf Runs....................................... 31
Area Border Router Count....................... 0
AS Border Router Count......................... 0
Area LSA Count................................. 2
IP Address..................................... 10.10.10.1
OSPF Interface Events.......................... 2572
Virtual Events................................. 0
Neighbor Events................................ 0
External LSA Count............................. 4294967295
LSAs Received.................................. 0
Originate New LSAs............................. 170
Related Commands The show ip ospf interface stats screen displays the following statistics:
OSPF Area ID The area ID of this OSPF interface.
Spf Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been
calculated using this area’s link-state database.
Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this
area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
AS Border Router Count The total number of Autonomous System border routers
reachable within this area.
Area LSA Count The total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-
state database, excluding AS External LSAs.
IP Address The IP address associated with this OSPF interface.
OSPF Interface Events The number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed
its state, or an error has occurred.
Virtual Events The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this
virtual link.
Neighbor Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed
state, or an error has occurred.
7-34
External LSA Count The number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in
the link-state database.
LSAs Received The number of LSAs received by this interface.
Originate New LSAs The number of LSAs originated by this interface.

7.3
ip ospf areaid <areaid> on page 7-17 OSPF Display
Commands
t
show ip ospf neighbor [<ipaddr>] <slot/port>
Summary Show the neighbor table for a specified BAR interface.
User-Entered [<ipaddr>]
Parameters An optional parameter that identifies a particular neighbor to the interface. If this
parameter is supplied, information presented will be specific to the neighbor.
<slot/port>
The combination of slot number and port number that identifies a unique interface on
the BAR.
Description This command displays the OSPF neighbor table list for a given interface. The
information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled and the interface has a
neighbor.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway-BAR) #show ip ospf neighbor 66.15.30.1 0/5
Interface...................................... 0/5
Router ID...................................... 10.10.10.10
Options........................................ 2
Router Priority................................ 1
State.......................................... Full
Events......................................... 5
Permanence..................................... Dynamic
Hellos Suppressed.............................. No
Retransmission Queue Length.................... 0
Related Commands The following information is presented in response to the command:
Interface The slot/port identifying the internal interface number of the

OSPF neighbor.
Router ID The 4-digit dotted-decimal number identifying the neighbor

router.
7-35
Options An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities

supported by the neighbor. The neighbor’s optional OSPF
capabilities are also listed in its Hello packets. This enables
received Hello Packets to be rejected (i.e., neighbor
7.3
relationships will not even start to form) if there is a mismatch
in certain crucial OSPF capabilities.
Router Priority Displays the OSPF priority for the specified interface. The
OSPF Display priority of an interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255. A
value of ’0’ indicates that the router is not eligible to become
Commands the designated router on this network.
State The state of communications between the specified interface

and the neighbor. Possible returned values are:
• Down: Initial state of the neighbor conversation; no recent
information has been received from the neighbor.
• Attempt: No recent information has been received from the
neighbor but a more concerted effort should be made to
contact the neighbor.
• Init: A Hello packet has recently been seen from the
neighbor, but bi-directional communication has not yet
been established.
• 2 way: Communication between the two routers is
bi-directional.
• Exchange start: The router is negotiating a master
relationship with the neighbor routers and deciding on an
initial DD sequence number.
• Exchange: The router is describing its entire link state
database by sending Database Description packets to the
neighbor.
• Loading: Link State Request packets are sent to the
neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been
discovered (but not yet received) in the Exchange state.
• Full: The neighboring routers are fully adjacent and they
will now appear in router-LSAs and network-LSAs.
Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed

state, or an error has occurred.
Permanence This variable displays the status of the entry, either dynamic
or permanent. This refers to how the neighbor became
known.
Hellos Suppressed This indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the
neighbor. The types are enabled and disabled.
Retransmission Queue Length An integer representing the current length of the

retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router ID of
the specified interface.
Related Commands ip ospf priority <priority> on page 7-20
7-36
t
show ip ospf neighbor brief {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show a summary of OSPF neighbor information.

User-Entered {<slot/port> | all}: OSPF Display
Parameters The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the Commands
the BAR.
Description This command displays abbreviated OSPF neighbor table information for the interface
identified by <slot/port>, or for all interfaces. The information below will only be
displayed if OSPF is enabled and the interface has a neighbor.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf neighbor brief all
Router ID IP Address Neighbor Interface Index

---------------- ---------------- -----------------------------
10.10.10.10 66.15.30.1 0/5
Router ID The 4-digit dotted-decimal number identifying the neighbor router.
IP Address An IP address representing the neighbor interface.
Neighbor Interface Index The slot/port identifying the internal interface number of the
OSPF neighbor.
7-37
7.3
OSPF Display
Commands
7-38
Chapter 8
VRRP Routing Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP) configuration on the BAR.

This chapter contains the following groups of CLI commands:
Topic on page
VRRP Configuration Commands 8-1
VRRP Display Commands 8-5
8.2 VRRP Configuration Commands

Use the following commands to configure the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
(VRRP) on the BAR.
ip vrrp
Summary Enable VRRP routing.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the administrative mode of VRRP in the router.
“no” Form no ip vrrp

The “no” version of this command disables the administrative mode of VRRP.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip vrrp
Related Commands show ip vrrp on page 8-5

ip vrrp <vrID>
Summary Create Virtual Router ID on the interface.
VRRP User-Entered <vrID>

Configuration Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) that will be created on the
Commands current interface. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
Description This command sets the virtual router ID on an interface for virtual router configuration
in the router.
“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID>

The “no” form of this command deletes all VRRP configuration details of the virtual
router configured on a specific interface.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12
Related Commands show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID> on page 8-6

show ip vrrp interface brief on page 8-7
ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr>
Summary Set an IP address for a virtual router.
User-Entered <vrID>
Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router on the
interface that the address will be assigned to. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
<ipaddr>
This parameter is the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) to assign to the virtual
router.
Description This command sets the IP address value for a virtual router, identified by its <vrID>,
that is configured on a given interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 ip 10.10.28.1
Related Commands ip vrrp on page 8-1

show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID> on page 8-6
8-2
ip vrrp <vrID> authentication {none | simple <key>}
Summary Set authentication for a virtual router.

User-Entered <vrID> VRRP
Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of a virtual router on the Configuration
interface that authentication will be set for. This value is a number from 1 to 255. Commands
{none | simple <key>}
The parameter {none | simple} selects the authentication type for the virtual router.
The <key> parameter is required when the authentication type is simple. The <key>
parameter is a password that will be used for VRRP authentication on the virtual router.
Description This command sets the authentication details value for a specified virtual router
configured on a given interface.
“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> authentication

The “no” version of this command sets authorization to none for the virtual router.
This is the default state.
Defaults No authentication
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 authentication simple a_passwd
ip vrrp <vrID> preempt
Summary Enable preemption mode for a virtual router.
User-Entered <vrID>
Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router that
preemption will be enabled for. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
Description This command enables the preemption mode value for a virtual router, identified by its
<vrID>, that is configured on a given interface.
“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> preempt

The “no” version of this command disables preemption mode for the virtual router.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 preempt
8-3
ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value>
Summary Set interface’s virtual router priority value.
VRRP User-Entered <vrID>

Configuration Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of a virtual router on the
Commands interface that the router priority value will be set for. This value is a number from 1 to
255.
<priority-value>
This parameter is the priority value assigned to the virtual router. This value is a number
from 1 to 254.
Description This command sets the priority value for the virtual router, identified by its <vrID>,
that is configured on a given interface.
“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value>

The “no” version of this command sets the priority value to its default value of 100.
Defaults Priority: 100
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 priority 15
ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise <adv-interval>
Summary Set advertised value for virtual router timers.
User-Entered <vrID>
Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of a virtual router on the
interface that the advertised value will be set for. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
<adv-interval>
This parameter is the advertisement value for the virtual router. This value is a number
of seconds from 1 to 255.
Description This command sets the advertisement value for a virtual router, identified by its
<vrID>, that is configured on a given interface.
“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise

The “no” version of this command sets the advertisement value for the virtual router.
Defaults Advertise: 1
8-4
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 timers advertise 1

8.3
ip vrrp <vrID> mode VRRP Display
Commands
Summary Activate a virtual router on the current interface.
User-Entered <vrID>
Parameters This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router that will be
enabled on the interface. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
Description This command enables a virtual router, identified by its <vrID>, that is configured on a
given interface. This starts the virtual router.
“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> mode

The “no” form of this command disables the virtual router identified by <vrID>.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 mode

8.3 VRRP Display Commands

The commands in this section display configuration settings and operational statistics
for VRRP.
show ip vrrp
Summary Show current VRRP settings.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays whether VRRP functionality is enabled or disabled on the BAR.
It also displays some global parameters which are required for monitoring. This
command takes no options.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
8-5
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp

Router Checksum Errors......................... 0
8.3 Router Version Errors..........................

Router VRID Errors.............................
0
0
VRRP Display Command Output The show ip vrrp command displays the following information:
Commands
Admin Mode Displays the admin mode for VRRP functionality on the switch.
Router Checksum Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP
checksum value.
Router Version Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with Unknown or
unsupported version number.
Router VRID Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with invalid VRID for
this virtual router.
Related Commands ip vrrp on page 8-1
show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID>
Summary Show VRRP interface configuration.
<vrID>
This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router to be
examined. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
Description This command displays all configuration information and VRRP router statistics of a
virtual router configured on a specific interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp interface 0/1 12

IP Address..................................... 10.10.28.1
VMAC Address................................... 00:00:5e:00:01:0c
Authentication Type............................ Simple
Priority....................................... 15
Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 1
Pre-empt Mode.................................. Enable
Administrative Mode............................ Enable
State.......................................... Initialized
8-6
Command Output The show ip vrrp interface command provides the following information:
IP Address The configured IP Address for the virtual router.
8.3
VMAC address The VMAC address of the specified router.
Authentication Type The authentication type for the specific virtual router.
Priority The priority value for the specific virtual router.

VRRP Display
Advertisement interval The advertisement interval for the specific virtual router. Commands
Pre-Empt Mode The preemption mode configured on the specified virtual router.
Administrative Mode The status (Enable or Disable) of the specific router.
State The state of the virtual router.
Related Commands ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr> on page 8-2

ip vrrp <vrID> authentication {none | simple <key>} on page 8-3
ip vrrp <vrID> preempt on page 8-3
ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value> on page 8-4
ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise <adv-interval> on page 8-4
ip vrrp <vrID> mode on page 8-5
show ip vrrp interface brief
Summary Show summarized VRRP interface information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays information about each virtual router configured on the BAR.
This command takes no options. It displays information about each virtual router.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp interface brief
Slot/Port VRID IP Address Mode State

--------- ---- -------------- ------ ------------
0/1 12 10.10.28.1 Enable Initialize
Command Output The following statistics are shown on the show ip vrrp interface brief screen:
Slot/Port The slot/port combination of the virtual router.
VRID The router ID of the virtual router.
IP Address The IP Address that was configured on the virtual router.
Mode Indicates whether the virtual router is enabled or disabled.
State Indicates the state of the virtual router.
8-7
Related Commands ip vrrp <vrID> on page 8-2

ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr> on page 8-2
ip vrrp <vrID> mode on page 8-5
8.3 show ip vrrp interface stats <slot/port> <vrID>
VRRP Display Summary Display VRRP configuration and stats for a virtual router.
Commands
<vrID>
This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router to be
examined. This value is a number from 1 to 255.
Description This command displays the statistical information about each virtual router configured
on the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp interface stats 0/1 12

UpTime......................................... 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secs
Protocol....................................... IP
State Transitioned to Master................... 0
Advertisement Received......................... 0
Advertisement Interval Errors.................. 0
Authentication Failure......................... 0
IP TTL Errors.................................. 0
Zero Priority Packets Received................. 0
Zero Priority Packets Sent..................... 0
Invalid Type Packets Received.................. 0
Address List Errors ........................... 0
Invalid Authentication Type.................... 0
Authentication Type Mismatch................... 0
Packet Length Errors........................... 0
Command Output The following items are shown on the show ip vrrp interface stats screen:
Uptime The amount of time the IP VRRP interface has been

operating since the last reset.
Protocol The protocol set for the VRRP interface’s operation.
State Transitioned to Master The total number of times the virtual router state has
changed to MASTER.
Advertisement Received The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this

virtual router.
Advertisement Interval Errors The total number of VRRP advertisements received for
which the advertisement interval is different than the
configured value for this virtual router.
8-8
Authentication Failure The total number of VRRP packets received that did not pass
the authentication check.
IP TTL errors The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual
8.3
router with the IP TTL (time to live) not equal to 255.
Zero Priority Packets Received The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual
router with a priority of ’0’.
Zero Priority Packets Sent The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router
VRRP Display
with a priority of ’0’. Commands
Invalid Type Packets Received The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual
router with an invalid “type” field.
Address List Errors The total number of VRRP packets received for which the
address list does not match the locally configured list for the
virtual router.
Invalid Authentication Type The total number of VRRP packets received with an
unknown authentication type.
Authentication Type Mismatch The total number of VRRP advertisements received for
which the ‘auth type’ is not equal to the one locally
configured for this virtual router.
Packet Length Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with a packet
length less than the length of the VRRP header.
8-9
8.3
VRRP Display
Commands
8-10
Chapter 9
Multicast Commands
This chapter provides descriptions of the commands that configure multicast routing
on the BAR and retrieve configuration information and statistics related to multicast
operation.

This chapter describes the commands that configure and manage multicast routing on
the Pannaway BAR. The following sections are presented in this chapter:
Topic on page
Multicast Configuration Commands 9-1
Multicast Display Commands 9-18
9.2 Multicast Configuration Commands

The configuration of multicast associations on the BAR requires the use of a number of
management commands. The commands in this section of the Administration Guide
provide control over the settings and operational parameters of the BAR as they apply
to multicast routing.
System-Level The commands in this section provide configuration and control over the operation of
Commands multicast routing for all interfaces of the BAR. These commands offer system-wide
configuration of multicast settings.
ip igmp
Summary Activate IGMP mode.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the administrative mode of IGMP in the BAR to active.
“no” Form no ip igmp

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of IGMP to inactive
(disabled).
Example
9.2
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip igmp
Related Commands show ip igmp on page 9-24

Multicast
Configuration
ip multicast
Commands
Summary Activate IP multicast forwarding mode on the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the administrative mode of the IP multicast forwarder in the router
to active. For multicast routing to become operational, IGMP must be currently
enabled.
An error message will be displayed on the CLI if multicast routing is enabled while
IGMP is disabled. However, the IP multicast mode configuration is stored in the
multicast configuration file and is automatically enabled once IGMP is enabled.
“no” Form no ip multicast

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of the IP multicast
forwarder in the router to inactive.
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip multicast
Related Commands ip igmp on page 9-1
ip dvmrp
Summary Activate DVRMP mode.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the administrative mode of Distance-Vector Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP) in the BAR to active. IGMP must be enabled before DVMRP can
be enabled.
“no” Form no ip dvmrp

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of DVMRP in the BAR
to inactive (disabled).
9-2
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip dvmrp

9.2
ip dvmrp trapflags Multicast
Configuration
Summary Enable trap mode. Commands
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the DVMRP trap mode.
“no” Form no ip dvmrp trapflags

The “no” form of this command disables the DVMRP trap mode (the default state).
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip dvmrp trapflags
ip multicast staticroute <sourceipaddr> <mask> <rpfipaddr> <metric> <slot/port>
Summary Create a Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) static route.
User-Entered <sourceipaddr>
Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the multicast packet source the static
route defines a connection to.
<mask>
The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, that specifies the network portion of the
<sourceipaddr> parameter.
<rpfipaddr>
The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the next router hop toward the multicast
packet source.
<metric>
The metric, or cost, of the route entry. Values may be from 0 to 255.
<slot/port>
The combination of a BAR slot and port (on that slot) identifying a unique interface
that will be used by the static route to validate Reverse Path Forwarding operation.
Description This command creates a static route which is used to perform Reverse Path Forwarding
checking in multicast packet forwarding.
9-3
“no” Form no ip multicast staticroute <sourceipaddr>

The “no” form of this command deletes a static route in the static multicast table. The
<sourceipaddr> is the IP address of the multicast packet source.
9.2 Defaults
Example
None
Multicast (Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip multicast staticroute 229.3.3.3 255.255.0.0 10.10.1.4 1 0/1
Configuration
Commands
ip pimdm
Summary Activate PIM Dense Mode operation.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets the administrative mode of Protocol Independent Multicast –
Dense Mode (PIM-DM) on the BAR to enabled. IGMP must be enabled before PIM-
DM can be enabled.
“no” Form no ip pimdm

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-DM to disabled
(the default state).
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimdm
ip pimsm
Summary Enable PIM Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) multicast routing.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command sets administrative mode of PIM-SM multicast routing across the router
to enabled. IGMP must be enabled before PIM-SM can be enabled.
“no” Form no ip pimsm

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-SM across the
router to disabled (the default state).
9-4
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimsm

9.2
ip pimsm datathreshrate <d-threshold> Multicast
Configuration
Summary Specify the PIM-SM data threshold rate. Commands
User-Entered <d-threshold>
Parameters The data threshold rate, in kilobits per second, for BAR PIM-SM routing operations.
The acceptable range for this value is from 0 to 2000 kbps.
Description This command configures the data threshold rate for the PIM-SM router.
“no” Form no ip pimsm datathreshrate

The “no” form of this command resets the data threshold rate back to its default value.
Defaults D-threshold: 50 kbps
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimsm datathreshrate 1000
ip pimsm message-interval <msg-interval>
Summary Set the PIM-SM Join/Prune message interval.
User-Entered <msg-interval>
Parameters The Join/Prune message interval, measured in seconds, that will be used for PIM-SM
router operations on the BAR. The valid range for this value is 10 to 3600 seconds.
Description This command is used to configure the global join/prune interval for PIM-SM router.
The join/prune interval is specified in seconds.
“no” Form no ip pimsm message-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the global join/prune interval back to its default
value of 60 seconds.
Defaults Msg-interval: 60
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimsm message-interval 5
9-5
ip pimsm spt-threshold <spath-threshold>
Summary Configure the BAR PIM-SM shortest path threshold.
Multicast User-Entered <spath-threshold>

Configuration Parameters The rate, in kilobits per second, at which the BAR will switch to seeking a shortest path.
Commands This value may be from 0 to 2000 kbps.
Description This command configures the Threshold rate for the Rendezvous Point (RP) router to
switch to the shortest path. The rate is specified in Kilobytes per second.
“no” Form no ip pimsm spt-threshold

The “no” form of this command resets the Threshold rate for the RP router to switch
to the shortest path to its default value of 50 Kbps.
Defaults 50 Kbps
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)# ip pimsm spt-threshold 1000
ip pim-trapflags
Summary Enable PIM trap mode.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the PIM trap mode for both Sparse Mode (SM) and Dense
Mode (DM).
“no” Form no ip pim-trapflags

The “no” form of this command disables the PIM trap mode (the default state).
Example
Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pim-trapflags
9-6
ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask>
Summary Define a static Rendezvous Point (RP).

User-Entered <ipaddress> Multicast
Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the Rendezvous Point being created. Configuration
<groupaddress>
Commands
The group address supported by the RP.
<groupmask>
The mask that identifies the group portion of the <groupaddress> parameter.
Description This command is used to create an RP IP address for the PIM-SM router.
“no” Form no ippimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask>

The “no” form of the command is used to delete a specified static RP IP address.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip pimsm staticrp 192.168.10.220 192.168.10.10 255.255.0.0
Related Commands show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress> on page 9-41

show ip pimsm staticrp on page 9-41
Interface-Level The commands in this section control the operation of multicast routing on individual
Commands BAR interfaces.
ip dvmrp metric <metric>
Summary Set the DVMRP metric for the interface.
User-Entered <metric>:
Parameters The metric to be set for the current interface. Acceptable range for this value is from
1 to 63.
Description This command configures the metric for the current interface. This value is used in the
DVMRP messages as the cost to reach this network.
“no” Form no ip dvmrp metric

The “no” form of this command resets the metric for the current interface back to its
default value of 1.
Defaults Metric: 1
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip dvmrp metric 20
9-7
ip dvmrp
Summary Activate DVMRP on the current interface.
Multicast User-Entered None

Commands Description This command sets the administrative mode of DVMRP on the current interface to
active.
“no” Form no ip dvmrp

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of DVMRP on the
current interface to inactive (disabled).
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip dvmrp
ip igmp last-member-query-count <count>
Summary Set total number of last member group queries.
User-Entered <count>
Parameters The number of queries sent to group members on the interface. Acceptable values are
whole numbers from 1 to 20.
Description This command sets the number of Group-Specific Queries sent before the router
assumes that there are no local members on the current interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp last-member-query-count

The “no” form of this command resets the number of Group-Specific Queries back to
its default value of 2.
Defaults Count: 2
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp last-member-query-count 1
9-8
ip igmp last-member-query-interval <lmqinterval>
Summary Set the maximum response time for group queries.

User-Entered <lmqinterval> Multicast
Parameters The interval, measured in tenths of a second, that the BAR will wait for an answer to a Configuration
Group-Specific Query. Acceptable range is from 1 to 255 (.1 to 25.5 seconds). Commands
Description This command configures the Maximum Response Time being inserted into Group-
Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages on the current interface.
“no” Form no ip last-member-query-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the Maximum Response Time back to its
default value.
Defaults LMQinterval: 10 tenths of a second (1 second)
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp last-member-query-interval 100
ip igmp query-interval <query-interval>
Summary Set host query time interval.
User-Entered <query-interval>
Parameters The time (in seconds) that elapses between the transmission of IGMP Host Query
packets on this interface. The range is from 1 to 3600.
Description This command configures the query interval for the currently configured interface. This
is the frequency at which IGMP Host-Query packets are transmitted on this interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp query-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the IGMP query interval back to its default
value.
Defaults Query-interval: 125 seconds
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp query-interval 200
9-9
ip igmp query-max-response-time <max-time>
Summary Set IGMP advertised query response time.
Multicast User-Entered <max-time>

Configuration Parameters The maximum response time, in tenths of a second, that will be advertised in IGMPv2
Commands queries. The range for this field is 1 to 255 (0.1 to 25.5 seconds).
Description This command configures the maximum response time interval for the currently
configured interface, which is the maximum query response time advertised in IGMPv2
queries on this interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp query-max-response-time

The “no” form of this command resets the maximum response time back to its default
of 100 tenths of a second
Defaults Max-time: 100 (10 seconds)
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp query-max-response-time 70
ip igmp robustness <robustness>
Summary Set the robustness metric for the interface.
User-Entered <robustness>
Parameters The numerical rating of the interface’s robustness, a measure of expected packet loss.
Ranges for this value are from 1 to 255
Description This command configures the robustness that allows tuning of the interface. The
robustness is the tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected
to have a lot of loss, the Robustness variable may be increased for the interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp robustness <robustness>

The “no” form of this command resets the robustness value to its default of 2.
Defaults Robustness: 2
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp robustness 153
9-10
ip igmp startup-query-count <count>
Summary Set the number of queries the interface will send at startup.

User-Entered <count> Multicast
Parameters The number of times that the interface will send queries at startup. The range for this Configuration
value is from 1 to 20. Commands
Description This command sets the number of queries sent out on startup, separated by the Startup
Query Interval on the currently configured interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp startup-query-count

The “no” form of this command resets the number of queries back to its default value
of 2.
Defaults Count: 2
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp startup-query-count 5
ip igmp startup-query-interval <interval>
Summary Set the time between general queries.
User-Entered <interval>
Parameters The amount of time, in seconds, that the interface will wait before sending a new
general query. Acceptable range for this value is from 1 to 300.
Description This command sets the interval (in seconds) between General Queries sent by a Querier
on startup on the currently configured interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp startup-query-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the interval between General Queries back to
its default value.
Defaults Interval: 31 seconds
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp startup-query-interval 60
9-11
ip igmp version <version>
Summary Set the IGMP version for the interface.
Multicast User-Entered <version>

Configuration Parameters The version of IGMP to be used on this interface. The value for <version> is either 1
Commands (indicating IGMPv1) or 2 (indicating IGMPv2).
Description This command configures the version of IGMP to be supported for this interface.
“no” Form no ip igmp version

The “no” form of this command restores the default value of 2.
Defaults Version: 2
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp version 2
ip mcast boundary <groupipaddr> <mask>
Summary Identify a multicast boundary.
User-Entered <groupipaddr>
Parameters A group IP address in dotted decimal notation.
<mask>
A group IP mask in dotted decimal notation.
Description This command adds an administrative scope multicast boundary specified by

<groupipaddr> and <mask> for which this multicast administrative boundary is
applicable.
“no” Form no ip mcast boundary <groupipaddr> <mask>

The “no” form of this command deletes the administrative scope multicast boundary
specified by <groupipaddr> and <mask>.
Defaults None
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip mcast boundary 10.10.30.200 255.255.255.0
9-12
ip multicast ttl-threshold <ttlvalue>
Summary Set the Time To Live (TTL) threshold value for the interface.

User-Entered <ttlvalue> Multicast
Parameters The numerical TTL threshold setting for the interface. The range for this value is from Configuration
0 to 255. Commands
Description This command applies the given value for the Time To Live threshold to the currently
configured routing interface. This is the TTL threshold which is to be applied to the
multicast data packets which are to be forwarded from the interface.
“no” Form no ip multicast ttl-threshold

The “no” form of this command restores the default TTL threshold of 1 to the
interface.
Defaults TTLvalue: 1
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip multicast ttl-threshold 45
ip pimdm mode <slot/port>
Summary Activate PIM-DM administrative mode.
Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port in that location that identifies a unique
interface.
Description This command sets the administrative mode of PIM-DM on the currently configured
interface to enabled.
“no” Form no ip pimdm mode

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-DM on the
interface to disabled (the default state).
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimdm mode
9-13
ip pimdm query-interval <dmq-interval>
Summary Set PIM-DM query interval.
Multicast User-Entered <dmq-interval>

Configuration Parameters The length, in seconds, of the query interval for the interface. The acceptable range of
Commands this value is from 10 to 3600 seconds.
Description This command sets the transmission frequency of hello messages between PIM enabled
neighbors for the currently configured interface.
“no” Form no ip pimdm query-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the transmission frequency to its default value
of 30 seconds.
Defaults DMQ-interval: 30
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimdm query-interval 1500
ip pimsm cbsrpreference <preference>
Summary Set Candidate Bootstrap Router (CBSR) preference for a PIM-SM interface.
User-Entered <preference>
Parameters This parameter is the numerical value representing the CBSR preference value for the
interface. The range of this parameter is from -1 to 255.
Description This command configures the CBSR preference for a particular PIM-SM interface. This
preference value is used in the bootstrap router election process.
“no” Form no ip pimsm cbsrpreference

The “no” form of this command resets the CBSR preference back to its default value.
Defaults Preference: 0
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimsm cbsrpreference -1
9-14
ip pimsm mode
Summary Set PIM-SM administrative mode for the interface.

User-Entered None Multicast
Description This command sets administrative mode of PIM-SM multicast routing on the currently
Commands
configured interface to enabled.
“no” Form no ip pimsm mode

The “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-SM on the
interface to disabled.
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimsm mode
ip pimsm query-interval <smq-interval>
Summary Set the time between PIM hello-message queries.
User-Entered <smq-interval>
Parameters The length, in seconds, of the query interval for the interface. The acceptable range of
this value is from 10 to 3600 seconds.
Description This command sets the transmission frequency of hello messages between PIM enabled
neighbors for the currently configured interface.
“no” Form no ip pimsm query-interval

The “no” form of this command resets the transmission frequency to its default value
of 30 seconds.
Defaults SMQ-interval: 30
Example
Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimsm query-interval 1500
9-15
Multicast Query and The following commands are used to initiate various multicast query and trace
Trace Commands commands.
9.2 disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace
Multicast Summary Disable processing of mtrace queries.

Configuration
Commands Required Mode Global Config
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command is used to disable the processing capability of mtrace query on the BAR.
If the mode is enabled, the BAR process mtrace queries that it receives and forwards
them appropriately. If the mode is disabled, the BAR does not respond to the mtrace
queries it receives from other router devices.
“no” Form no disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace

The “no” form of this command enables the BAR to process and forward mtrace
queries that it receives.
Defaults None
Example
(BAR) (Config)#disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace
Related Commands mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>] on page 9-17
mrinfo <ipaddr>
Summary Queries the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router.
Parameters The IP address of the system to query. If no IP address is specified, the default of the
current BAR is used.
Description This command is used to query the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router
specified by <ipaddr>. The default value is the IP address of the system at which the
command is issued. The mrinfo command can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Only
one mrinfo command may be in process at a time. The results of this command will be
available in the results bufferpool which can be displayed by using show mrinfo.
Defaults The IP address of the current BAR.
9-16
Example
(BAR) (Config)#mrinfo
Debug command execution started succesfully. Results available after 20 seconds.

Use 'show mrinfo' to display the results.
Related Commands show mrinfo on page 9-42

9.2
Multicast
Configuration
mstat <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>] Commands
Summary Finds the IP Multicast packet race and loss information from a multicast source to a
receiver.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command is used to find the IP Multicast packet rate and loss information path
from a source to a receiver (unicast router id of the host running mstat). The results of
this command will be available in the results bufferpool which can be displayed by using
the command “show mstat”. If a debug command is already in progress, a message is
displayed and the new request fails.
The <source> is the IP address of the remote multicast-capable source. The [receiver]
is the IP address of the receiver. The default value is the IP address of the system at
which the command is issued. The [group] is a multicast address of the group to be
displayed. The default value is 224.2.0.1(the group used for the multicast backbone).
Note that the group and receiver IP addresses can be entered in any order.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(BAR) (Config)#mstat 10.97.56.7 224.16.16.14 10.99.255.58
Debug command execution started successfully. Results available after 2 minutes.

Use 'show mstat' to display the results.
Related Commands show mstat on page 9-42
mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]
Summary Finds the IP Multicast path from a source to a receiver.
User-Entered None
Parameters
9-17
Description This command is used to find the IP Multicast path from a source to a receiver (unicast
router ID of the host running mtrace). A trace query is passed hop-by-hop along the
reverse path from the receiver to the source, collecting hop addresses, packet counts,
and routing error conditions along the path, and then the response is returned to the
9.3 requestor. The results of this command are available in the results buffer pool which
can be displayed by using the command “show mtrace”.
The <source> is the IP address of the remote multicast-capable source. The
Multicast
[destination] is the IP address of the receiver system. The default value is the IP address
Display
of system at which the command is issued.
Commands
The [group] is the multicast address of the group to be displayed. The default value is
224.2.0.1(the group used for the multicast backbone).
If a debug command is already in execution, a message is displayed and the new request
fails.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(BAR) (Config)#mtrace 10.97.51.7 224.11.11.42
Debug command execution started successfully. Results available after 1 minute.

Use 'show mtrace' to display the results.
Related Commands disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace on page 9-16
9.3 Multicast Display Commands

These monitoring and statistics-gathering commands provide administrative
information about the settings and operational status of multicast interfaces and of
multicast operation throughout the BAR.
show ip dvmrp
Summary Show DVMRP settings.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays system-wide information for DVMRP.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-18
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dvmrp

Version........................................
Total Number of Routes.........................
Reachable Routes ..............................
3
0
0
9.3
Multicast
DVMRP INTERFACE STATUS
Display
Slot/Port Interface Mode Protocol State
--------- --------------- --------------- Commands
3/1 Disable Non-Operational
Command Output The command provides the following general information:
Admin Mode Indicates whether DVMRP is enabled or disabled.
Version The version of DVMRP being used.
Total Number of The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table.

Routes
Reachable Routes The number of entries in the routing table with non-infinite metrics.
The following fields are displayed for each interface.
Slot/Port The Slot/Port combination identifying a single routing interface in the

BAR.
Interface Mode The mode of this interface: Enable or Disable.
Protocol State The current state of DVMRP on this interface: Operational or Non-
Operational.
show ip dvmrp interface <slot/port>
Summary Show DVMRP settings.
Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port in that location that identifies a unique
interface.
Description This command displays the interface information for DVMRP on the specified
interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-19
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dvmrp interface 3/3
Interface Mode................................. Disable
9.3 Interface Metric .............................. 1

Local Address ................................. 50.50.50.1
Multicast Command Output The command displays the following information:

Display
Commands
Interface Mode Indicates whether DVMRP is enabled or disabled on the specified
interface.
Interface Metric Indicates the metric of this interface.
Local Address The IP Address of the interface.
The following field is displayed only when DVMRP is operational on the interface.
Generation ID The Generation ID value for the interface. This is used by the neighboring
routers to detect that the DVMRP table should be resent.
The following fields are displayed only if DVMRP is enabled on this interface.
Received Bad Packets The number of invalid packets received.
Received Bad Routes The number of invalid routes received.
Sent Routes The number of routes that have been sent on this interface.
show ip dvmrp neighbor
Summary Show DVMRP neighbor information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the neighbor information for DVMRP.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The following information is presented in response to the command:
IfIndex The value of the interface used to reach the neighbor.
Nbr IP Addr The IP Address of the DVMRP neighbor for which this entry contains
information.
State The state of the neighboring router: ACTIVE or DOWN.
Up Time The time since this neighboring router was learned.
Expiry Time The time remaining for the neighbor to age out. This field is not
applicable if the State is DOWN.
9-20
Generation ID The Generation ID value for the neighbor.
Major Version The major version of DVMRP protocol of neighbor.
Minor Version The minor version of DVMRP protocol of neighbor.
Capabilities
Received Routes
The capabilities of the neighbor.
The number of routes received from the neighbor.

9.3
Multicast
Rcvd Bad Pkts The number of invalid packets received from this neighbor. Display
Rcvd Bad Routes The number of correct packets received with invalid routes. Commands
show ip dvmrp nexthop
Summary Show outgoing next hop information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the next hop information on outgoing interfaces for routing
multicast datagrams.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dvmrp nexthop
Next Hop
Source IP Source Mask Interface Type
--------------- --------------- --------- -------
10.10.5.50 255.255.255.0 3/1 BRANCH
Command Output The CLI provides the following information in response to the command:
Source IP The sources for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing
interface.
Source Mask The IP Mask for the sources for which this entry specifies a next hop
on an outgoing interface.
Next Hop Interface The interface in Slot/Port format for the outgoing interface for this
next hop.
Type Indicates whether the network is a LEAF or a BRANCH.
9-21
show ip dvmrp prune
Summary Show upstream DVMRP pruning information.

Display Parameters
Commands Description This command displays the table listing the router’s upstream prune information.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The command presents the following information:
Group IP Identifies the multicast Address that is pruned.
Source IP Displays the IP Address of the source that has pruned.
Source Mask Displays the network Mask for the prune source. It should be all 1s or
both the prune source and prune mask must match.
Expiry Time (secs) The expiry time in seconds. This is the time remaining for this prune to
age out.
show ip dvmrp route
Summary Show DVMRP routing information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the multicast routing information for DVMRP.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The command provides the following information:
Source Address The multicast address of the source group.
Source Mask The IP Mask for the source group.
Upstream Neighbor The IP Address of the neighbor which is the source for the packets for
a specified multicast address.
Interface The interface used to receive the packets sent by the sources.
Metric The distance in hops to the source subnet.
Expiry Time (secs) The expiry time in seconds. This is the time remaining for this route to
age out.
Up Time (secs) The time when a specified route was learnt, in seconds.
9-22
show ip igmp groups <slot/port> [detail]
Summary Show multicast groups on an interface.

User-Entered <slot/port> Multicast
Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port in that location that identifies a unique Display
interface. Commands
[detail]
Submitting this optional parameter instructs the CLI to provide additional multicast
group information in the command output.
Description This command displays the registered multicast groups on the interface. If “detail” is
specified this command displays the registered multicast groups on the specified <slot/
port> interface in detail.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp groups 3/1
IP Address..................................... 10.10.5.1
Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.0
Interface Mode................................. Enable
Querier Status................................. Querier
Multicast Group IP............................. 224.224.224.224
Multicast Group IP............................. 228.4.1.200
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp groups 3/1 detail
REGISTERED MULTICAST GROUP DETAILS

Multicast Version1
IP Address Last Reporter Up Time Expiry Time Host Timer
--------------- --------------- ------- ------------ ----------
224.224.224.224 10.10.5.17 34 96 -----
Command Output If detail is not specified, the following fields are displayed:
IP Address The IP address of the interface participating in the multicast group.
Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the interface participating in the multicast group.
Interface Mode Indicates whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on this interface.
The following fields are only displayed if the interface is enabled.
Querier Status Indicates whether the interface has IGMP in Querier mode or Non-Querier
mode.
Multicast Group IP Displays the address of the multicast group registered on this interface.
9-23
If the detail parameter is specified, the following fields are displayed:
Multicast IP Address The IP Address of the registered multicast group on this interface.
9.3
Last Reporter The IP Address of the source of the last membership report received
for the specified multicast group address on this interface.
Up Time The time elapsed since the entry was created for the specified
Multicast multicast group address on this interface.
Display Expiry Time The amount of time remaining to remove this entry before it is
Commands aged out.
Version1 Host Timer The time remaining until the local router will assume that there are no
longer any IGMP version 1 multicast members on the IP subnet
attached to this interface.
show ip igmp
Summary Show IGMP information for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays system-wide IGMP information, including the status of IGMP
on each physical or virtual interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp

IGMP Admin Mode................................ Enable
IGMP INTERFACE STATUS

--------- --------------- ---------------
0/5 Enable Operational
Command Output The following information is displayed in response to the show ip igmp command:
IGMP Admin Mode The administrative status of IGMP.
Slot/Port The slot and port of the interface.
Interface Mode Indicates whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on the interface.
Protocol State Indicates the current state of IGMP on this interface: Operational or
Non-Operational.
9-24
show ip igmp interface <slot/port>
Summary Show IGMP information and configuration.

Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port in that location that identifies a unique Display
interface. Commands
Description This command displays IGMP information for a selected physical or virtual interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp interface 3/1

Slot/Port...................................... 3/1
IGMP Admin Mode................................ Enable
IGMP Version................................... 2
Query Interval (secs).......................... 125
Query Max Response Time (1/10 of a second)..... 100
Robustness..................................... 2
Startup Query Interval (secs) ................. 31
Startup Query Count............................ 2
Last Member Query Interval (1/10 of a second).. 10
Last Member Query Count........................
Command Output The command output provides the following configuration and statistical information:
IGMP Admin Mode The administrative status of IGMP.
Interface Mode Indicates whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on the interface.
IGMP Version Indicates the version of IGMP running on the interface. This value
can be configured to create a router capable of running either IGMP
version 1 or 2.
Query Interval The frequency at which IGMP Host-Query packets are transmitted
on this interface.
Query Max Response The maximum query response time advertised in IGMPv2 queries
Time on this interface.
Robustness The tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is
expected to be have a lot of loss, the Robustness variable may be
increased for that interface.
Startup Query Interval The interval between General Queries sent by a Querier on startup.
Startup Query Count The number of Queries sent out on startup, separated by the
Startup Query Interval.
Last Member Query The Maximum Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries
Interval sent in response to Leave Group messages.
Last Member Query The number of Group-Specific Queries sent before the router
Count assumes that there are no local members.
9-25
show ip igmp interface membership <multiipaddr>
Summary List interfaces that are members of a specified group.
Multicast User-Entered <multiipaddr>

Display Parameters The group address of the multicast group that membership information should be
Commands displayed for.
Description This command displays the list of interfaces that have registered in the multicast group
specified by the group address.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp interface membership 228.4.1.200
IGMP INTERFACE MEMBERSHIP INFO

Slot/Port Interface IP State
--------- --------------- --------------
3/1 10.10.5.1 Querier
Command Output The command provides the following information:
Slot/Port The slot and port which identify the interface participating in the multicast
group.
Interface IP The IP address of the interface participating in the multicast group.
State Indicates whether the interface has IGMP in Querier mode or Non-Querier
mode.
show ip igmp interface stats <slot/port>
Summary Show IGMP statistics.
Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port, or a virtual slot and port combination, that
identifies a unique interface.
Description This command displays the IGMP statistical information for the physical or virtual
interface specified by <slot/port>. The statistics are only displayed when the interface
is enabled for IGMP.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-26
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp interface stats 3/1

Querier Status................................. Querier
Querier IP Address............................. 111.222.100.1
Querier Up Time (secs) ........................ 100036
Querier Expiry Time (secs) .................... 0
Wrong Version Queries.......................... 0
9.3
Number of Joins................................ 1508 Multicast
Number of Groups............................... 2
Display
Commands
Command Output The following information is displayed in response to the command:
Querier Status Indicates whether the IGMP router is running in Querier

mode or Non-Querier mode.
Querier IP Address The IP Address of the IGMP Querier on the IP subnet to

which this interface is attached.
Querier Up Time The time since the interface Querier was last changed.
Querier Expiry Time The amount of time remaining before the Other Querier
Present Timer expires. If the local system is the querier,
the value of this object is zero.
Wrong Version Queries The number of queries received whose IGMP version
does not match the IGMP version of the interface.
Number of Joins The number of times a group membership has been

added on this interface.
Number of Groups The current number of membership entries for this

interface.
show ip mcast
Summary Show multicast configuration and settings for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays system-wide multicast information for the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast

Protocol State................................. Operational
Table Max Size ................................ 256
Number Of Packets For Which Source Not Found .. 0
Number Of Packets For Which Group Not Found ... 0
Protocol....................................... PIMSM
Entry Count ................................... 1
Highest Entry Count ........................... 2
9-27
Command Output The show ip mcast command provides the following information as output:
Admin Mode The administrative status of multicast on the system.
9.3
Protocol State The current state of the multicast protocol: Operational
or Non-Operational.
Table Max Size The maximum number of entries allowed in the multicast
Multicast table.
Display Number Of Packets For Which The number of packets for which the source is not found.
Commands Source Not Found
Number Of Packets For Which The number of packets for which the group is not found.
Group Not Found
Protocol The multicast protocol running on the BAR. Possible

values are PIMDM, PIMSM, or DVMRP.
Entry Count The number of entries in the multicast table.
Highest Entry Count The highest entry count in the multicast table.
show ip mcast boundary {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Display multicast boundaries.
all
This parameter instructs the CLI to return multicast boundary information for all
interfaces.
Description This command displays the configured administrative scoped multicast boundaries for a
given physical or logical interface, or for all interfaces.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The following information is presented in response to the command:
Slot/Port The interface number
Group Ip The group IP address
Mask The group IP mask
show ip mcast interface <slot/port>
Summary Show multicast TTL value for an interface.
9-28
9.3
Description This command displays the multicast information for the physical or logical interface
specified by <slot/port>.
“no” Form None Multicast

Display
Defaults None
Commands
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast interface 3/1

Slot/Port TTL
--------- -----
3/1 1
Command Output The following information is presented in the multicast information table:
TTL The time-to-live value for this interface.
Related Commands “ip multicast ttl-threshold <ttlvalue>” on page 9-6
show ip mcast mroute {detail | summary}
Summary Show multicast route table information.
User-Entered detail
Parameters The detail parameter causes the CLI to present detailed information about the contents
of the BAR multicast table, including some operational statistics.
summary
This parameter instructs the CLI to present an abbreviated version of the multicast
table information in response to the command.
Description This command displays information about the multicast table in summary mode or
detail mode.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-29
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute summary
Multicast Route Table Summary
9.3 Source IP Group IP

Incoming
Protocol Interface
--------------- --------------- -------- ---------
Outgoing
Interface List
---------------
Multicast 10.10.5.17 224.0.1.1 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.17 238.1.1.2 PIMDM 3/1
Display
10.10.5.17 238.1.1.3 PIMDM 3/1
Commands 10.10.5.17 238.1.1.6 PIMDM 3/1 3/3
10.10.5.17 228.4.1.207 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.17 228.4.1.205 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.17 228.4.1.206 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.17 228.4.1.204 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.104 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.103 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.108 PIMDM 3/1 3/3
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.106 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.109 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.110 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.111 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.0.17.107 PIMDM 3/1
Command Output If the “detail” parameter is specified, the following fields are displayed:
Source IP The IP address of the multicast data source.
Group IP The IP address of the destination of the multicast packet.
Expiry Time The time of expiry of this entry in seconds.
Up Time The time elapsed since the entry was created in seconds.
RPF Neighbor The IP address of the RPF neighbor.
Flags The flags associated with this entry.
If the “summary” parameter is specified, the following fields are displayed:
Protocol The multicast routing protocol by which this entry was created.
Incoming Interface The interface on which the packet for this source/group arrives.
Outgoing Interface List The list of outgoing interfaces on which this packet is forwarded.
show ip mcast mroute group <groupipaddr> {detail | summary}
Summary Show mroute table settings for the BAR.
User-Entered <groupipaddr>
Parameters The group address of a multicast group in the mroute table to be examined.
9-30
detail
The detail parameter causes the CLI to present detailed information about the contents
of the BAR mroute table, including some operational statistics.
9.3
summary
This parameter instructs the CLI to present an abbreviated version of the mroute table
information in response to the command.
Multicast
Description This command displays the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings,
Display
incoming and outgoing interfaces, RPF neighboring routers, and expiration times of all
the entries in the multicast mroute table containing the given <groupipaddr>. Commands
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute group 224.1.1.105 summary

Incoming Outgoing
Source IP Group IP Protocol Interface Interface List
--------------- --------------- -------- --------- ----------------
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 PIMDM 3/1
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute group 224.1.1.105 detail
Multicast Route Table

Expiry Up Time
Source Ip Group Ip Time(secs) (secs) RPF Neighbor Flags
--------------- --------------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -----
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 201 733817 0.0.0.0 Null
Command Output If the summary parameter is selected, the following fields are displayed:
Incoming Interface The interface on which the packet for this group arrives.
Outgoing Interface List The list of outgoing interfaces on which this packet is forwarded.
If the detail parameter is selected, the Source IP and Group IP appear (as described
above) are displayed, as well as the following fields:
Expiry Time (secs) The time of expiry of this entry in seconds.
Up Time (secs) The time elapsed since the entry was created in seconds.
9-31
show ip mcast mroute source <sourceipaddr> [<groupipaddr>] {detail | summary}
Summary Show multicast configuration settings.
Multicast User-Entered <sourceipaddr>

Display Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a source station in the mroute table to
Commands display information for.
<groupipaddr>
An optional parameter, specified with a <sourceipaddr> value, that identifies a
multicast mroute table.
detail
The detail parameter causes the CLI to present detailed information about the multicast
configuration of the BAR, including some operational statistics.
summary
This parameter instructs the CLI to present an abbreviated version of the multicast
configuration settings in response to the command.
Description This command displays the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings,
incoming and outgoing interfaces, RPF neighboring routers, and expiration times of all
the entries in the multicast mroute table containing the given <sourceipaddr> or
<sourceipaddr> [<groupipaddr>] pair.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute source 10.10.5.105 summary

Incoming Outgoing
Source IP Group IP Protocol Interface Interface List
--------------- --------------- -------- --------- ----------------
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.104 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.103 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.108 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.106 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.109 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.110 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.1.1.111 PIMDM 3/1
10.10.5.105 224.0.17.107 PIMDM 3/1
9-32
Command Output If the summary parameter is selected, the following fields are displayed:
9.3
Incoming Interface The interface on which the packet for this group arrives.
Multicast
Outgoing Interface List The list of outgoing interfaces on which this packet is forwarded. Display
Commands
If the detail parameter is selected, the Source IP and Group IP appear (as described
above) are displayed, as well as the following fields:
Expiry Time (secs) The time of expiry of this entry in seconds.
Up Time (secs) The time elapsed since the entry was created in seconds.
show ip mcast mroute static [<sourceipaddr>]
Summary Show the static routes configured in the mroute table.
User-Entered <sourceipaddr>
Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a source station to show static route
information for.
Description This command displays all the static routes configured in the static mcast table if no IP
address is specified or displays the static route associated with the particular source
station IP address.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The command output includes the following fields:
Source IP The IP address of the multicast packet source.
Source Mask The mask applied to the IP address of the multicast packet source.
RPF Address The IP address to be used for Reverse Path Forwarding for the given
source and mask.
Metric The metric value corresponding to the source address.
Slot/Port The incoming interface number whose IP address is used as RPF for the
given source and mask.
9-33
show ip pimdm
Summary Show PIM-DM settings.

Display Parameters
Commands Description This command displays the BAR’s system-wide information for PIM-DM.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm
PIM-DM INTERFACE STATUS

--------- --------------- ---------------
Command Output The show ip pimdm command presents the following information:
Admin Mode Indicates whether PIM-DM is enabled or disabled.
Slot/Port Indicates the slot and port of the interface on which PIM-DM
operation is active.
Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-DM is enabled or disabled on this interface.
State Indicates the current state of PIM-DM on this interface: Operational

or Non-Operational.
show ip pimdm interface <slot/port>
Summary Show PIM-DM configuration information.
Description This command displays the interface information for PIM-DM on the specified
interface.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-34
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm interface 3/1

Hello Interval (secs).......................... 30
Command Output The following information is show in response to the command:

9.3
Multicast
Display
Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-DM is enabled or disabled on the
Commands
PIM-DM Interface Hello Interval Indicates the frequency at which PIM hello messages are
transmitted on this interface.
show ip pimdm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show PIM-DM statistics.
all
This parameter instructs the CLI to return statistics for all interfaces.
Description This command displays statistical information for PIM-DM on the physical or logical
interface specified by <slot/port>.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm interface stats all
Hello Designated
Interface IP Address Nbr Count Interval Router
---------- --------------- --------- ---------- ---------------
3/1 10.10.5.1 0 30 10.10.5.1
3/3 50.50.50.1 0 30 50.50.50.1
Command Output The following fields are presented on the interface information table:
Interface The Slot and Port of the interface.
IP Address The IP Address that represents the PIM-DM interface.
Nbr Count The neighbor count for the PIM-DM interface.
Hello Interval The time interval between two hello messages sent from the router on
the given interface.
Designated Router The IP Address of the Designated Router for this interface.
9-35
show ip pimdm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show PIM-DM neighbor information.
Multicast User-Entered <slot/port>

Display Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port, or a virtual slot and port combination, that
Commands identifies a unique interface.
all
Description This command displays the neighbor information for PIM-DM on the physical or
logical interface specified by <slot/port>, or on all interfaces.
“no” Form None
Defaults Show information for all interfaces
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm neighbor
Up Time Expiry Time

Neighbor Addr Interface hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss
--------------- ---------- --------- -----------
10.1.3.1 3/3 02:07:46 00:01:30
40.40.40.2 3/2 02:07:56 00:01:30
Neighbor Addr The IP Address of the neighbor on an interface.
Interface The Slot and Port of the interface.
Up Time The time since this neighbor has become active on this interface.
Expiry Time The expiry time of the neighbor on this interface.
show ip pimsm
Summary Show PIM-SM configuration information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the system-wide information for PIM-SM.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-36
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimsm

Join/Prune Interval (secs).....................
Data Threshold Rate (Kbps).....................
Register Threshold Rate (Kbps).................
60
50
50
9.3
Multicast
PIM-SM INTERFACE STATUS
Display
--------- -------------- ---------------- Commands
Admin Mode Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled.
Join/Prune Interval (secs) Displays the interval at which periodic PIM-SM Join/Prune
messages are to be sent.
Data Threshold Rate (Kbps) Displays the data threshold rate for the PIM-SM router.
Register Threshold Rate (Kbps) Displays the threshold rate for the RP router to switch to
the shortest path.
Slot/Port Displays routing interfaces in Slot/Port format.
Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled on the

interface.
Protocol State Indicates the current state of the PIM-SM protocol on the
interface: Operational or Non-Operational.
show ip pimsm candrptable
Summary Show Candidate-RP table information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the IP multicast groups for which the local router is to advertise
itself as a Candidate-Rendezvous Point when the value of hold time is non-zero.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The command provides the following information from the Candidate-RP table:
Group Address The IP multicast group address.
Group Mask The multicast group address subnet mask.
Address The unicast address of the interface that will be advertised as a

Candidate-RP.
9-37
show ip pimsm componenttable
Summary Show the component table for the BAR’s PIM domains.

Display Parameters
Commands Description This command displays the table containing objects specific to a PIM domain. One row
exists for each domain to which the router is connected.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The following information is presented for each entry in the table:
Component Index Displays a number which uniquely identifies the component.
Component BSR Address Displays the IP address of the bootstrap router (BSR) for the
local PIM region.
Component BSR Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before the BSR in the local
domain will be declared down.
Component CRP Hold Time The hold time of the component when it is a candidate.
show ip pimsm interface <slot/port>
Summary Show PIM-SM settings for an interface.
Description This command displays the interface information for PIM-SM on the physical or logical
interface specified by <slot/port>.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The command provides the following configuration information:
IP Address The IP address of the specified interface.
Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask for the IP address of the PIM interface.
Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled on the specified interface.
Hello Interval Indicates the frequency at which PIM-SM hello messages are transmitted
on this interface.
CBSR Preference Shows the preference value for the local interface as a candidate bootstrap
router.
9-38
show ip pimsm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show PIM-SM statistics.

Parameters The combination of a BAR slot and a port, or a virtual slot and port combination, that Display
identifies a unique interface. Commands
all
Description This command displays the statistical information for PIM-SM on the physical or
logical interface specified or for all interfaces.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The following fields are shown in response to the command:
Slot/Port The Slot and Port of the interface.
IP Address The IP Address that represents the PIM-SM interface.
Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask of this PIM-SM interface.
Designated Router The IP Address of the Designated Router for this interface.
Neighbor Count The number of neighbors on the PIM-SM interface.
show ip pimsm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}
Summary Show PIM-SM neighbor statistics.
all
Description This command displays the neighbor information for PIM-SM on the physical or
logical interface specified by <slot/port>, or for all interfaces. If the optional
parameters are not included in the command, information about all interfaces is
displayed.
“no” Form None
Defaults Show information for all interfaces.
9-39
Slot/Port The interface where the neighbor was discovered.
9.3
IP Address The IP Address of the neighbor on an interface.
Up Time The time since this neighbor has become active on this interface.
Expiry Time The expiry time of the neighbor on this interface.

Multicast
Display
Commands
show ip pimsm rp {<groupaddress> <groupmask> | candidate | all}
Summary Show candidate Rendezvous Point information for multicast groups.
User-Entered <groupaddress>
Parameters The address of the multicast group to show RP information for.
<groupmask>
The mask that identifies the group portion of the <groupaddress> parameter.
candidate
Supply this parameter to restrict the displayed information to RP candidate
information.
all
Supply this parameter to show data for all group RPs.
Description This command displays the PIM information for candidate Rendezvous Points (RPs)
for all IP multicast groups or for the specific <groupaddress> <groupmask> provided
in the command. The information in the table is displayed for each IP multicast group.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output The following configuration information is displayed:
Group Address The IP multicast group address.
Group Mask The multicast group address subnet mask.
Address The IP address of the Candidate-RP.
Hold Time The hold time of a Candidate-RP.
Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before the Candidate-RP will be declared down.
Component The number which uniquely identifies the component. Each protocol instance
connected to a separate domain should have a different index value.
9-40
show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress>
Summary Show the static Rendezvous Point information for one group.

User-Entered <groupaddress> Multicast
Parameters The address of the multicast group to show RP information for. Display
Commands
Description This command displays the static RP information for a specified group. The
<groupaddress> parameter is the IP address of the group.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output: The command output provides the IP address of the RP and the group mask for the
RP’s group address.
Related Commands ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask> on page 9-7

show ip pimsm staticrp on page 9-41
show ip pimsm staticrp
Summary Show static RP configuration for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the static RP information for the PIM-SM router.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the command:
RP IP Address The IP address of the RP.
Group Address The group address supported by the RP.
Group Mask The group mask for the group address.
Related Commands ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask> on page 9-7

show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress> on page 9-41
9-41
show mrinfo
Summary Displays the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router.

Display Parameters
Commands Description This command is used to display the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router
from the results buffer pool of the router subsequent to the execution/completion of a
mrinfo [ipaddr] command. The results subsequent to the completion of the latest
mrinfo will be available in the buffer pool after a maximum duration of two minutes
after the completion of the show mrinfo command. A subsequent issue mrinfo
overwrites the contents of the buffer pool with fresh results.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show mrinfo
Results for 'show mrinfo'
10.99.255.58 [version 3.255] [Flags: PGMS]
Router Interface Neighbor Metric TTL Flags

---------------- --------------- ------ --- ----------------
10.99.255.58 10.99.255.57 1 1
Router Interface The IP address of this neighbor.
Neighbor The neighbor associated with the router interface.
Metric The metric value associated with this neighbor.
TTL The TTL threshold associated with this neighbor.
Flags Status of the neighbor.
Related Commands mrinfo <ipaddr> on page 9-16
show mstat
Summary Displays the results of an mstat command, reflecting packet rate and loss information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
9-42
Description This command is used to display the results of packet rate and loss information from
the results buffer pool of the router, subsequent to the execution/completion of a mstat
<source> [group] [receiver] command. Within two minutes of the completion of the
mstat command, the results will be available in the buffer pool. The next issuing of
“no” Form
mstat overwrites the buffer pool with fresh results.
None
9.3
Multicast
Defaults None Display
Commands
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show mstat
Results for 'show mstat 10.97.56.7 10.99.255.58 224.16.16.14'
Source Response Dest Packet Statistics For Only For Traffic

10.97.56.7 10.97.56.7 All Multicast Traffic From 10.97.56.7
v __/ rtt 0 ms Lost/Sent = Pct Rate To 224.16.16.14
v / hop -184 s --------------------- --------------------
10.97.56.1
10.99.255.57
| \__ ttl 0
v \ hop 184 s
10.99.255.58 10.99.255.58
Receiver Query Source
Related Commands mrinfo <ipaddr> on page 9-16
show mtrace
Summary Displays the results of a multicast trace path.
Required Mode Privileged Exec or User Exec
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command is used to display results of multicast trace path from the results buffer
pool of the router, subsequent to the execution/completion of a mtrace <source>
[group] [receiver] command. The results subsequent to the completion of the mtrace
will be available in the buffer pool within two minutes and thereafter. A subsequent
mtrace command overwrites the results in the buffer pool.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
9-43
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show mtrace
Results for 'show mtrace 10.97.51.7 10.99.255.58 224.11.11.42'
9.3 Hops Away From

Destination
Intermediate
Router Address
Mcast Protocol TTL
In Use
Time Elapsed
Threshold Between Hops(msecs)
Multicast -------------- --------------- -------------- --------- -------------------
0 10.99.255.58
Display
1 10.99.255.57 PIM 0 63765
Commands
Hops Away From Destination The ordering of intermediate routers between the
source and the destination
Intermediate Router Address The address of the intermediate router at the specified
hop distance.
Mcast Protocol In Use The multicast routing protocol used for the out interface
of the specified intermediate router.
TTL Threshold The Time-To-Live threshold of the out interface on the

specified intermediate router.
Time Elapsed Between Hops The time between arrival at one intermediate router to
(msecs) the arrival at the next.
Related Commands mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>] on page 9-17
9-44
Chapter 10
DHCP Server Commands
This chapter describes the CLI commands that control Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) server operation on the BAR.

This chapter describes the commands that configure and manage DHCP services and
operation on the Pannaway BAR. The following sections are presented in this chapter:
Topic on page
DHCP Server Configuration Commands 10-1
DHCP Pool Configuration 10-3
DHCP Server Display Commands 10-8
DHCP Server Clear Commands 10-12
10.2 DHCP Server Configuration Commands

These commands configure the DHCP Server parameters.
service dhcp
Summary Activate DHCP server and relay functions.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the DHCP server features on the BAR.
“no” Form no service dhcp

The “no” form of this command disables the BAR DHCP server (the default state).
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#service dhcp
Related Commands show ip dhcp global configuration on page 10-8

ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]
Summary Exclude a range of pool addresses from DHCP assignment.
DHCP Server User-Entered <lowaddress>

Configuration Parameters This parameter identifies the lowest point of the excluded IP address range. The value is
Commands expressed as an IP address in dotted decimal notation.
NOTE: If the <lowaddress> parameter is supplied alone, the BAR will exclude the
addresses numerically below that IP address. If the <lowaddress> parameter is
supplied with the optional [highaddress] parameter, the BAR will exclude IP
addresses between those two addresses.
[highaddress]
The optional [highaddress] parameter identifies the upper end of the excluded IP
address range. This value is expressed in dotted decimal notation.
Description This command specifies the IP addresses that a DHCP server should not assign to
DHCP clients.
“no” Form no ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified excluded-address range.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip dhcp excluded-address 172.16.1.1 172.16.1.16
ip dhcp ping packets <packet-count>
Summary Modify DHCP verification check setting.
User-Entered <packet-count>
Parameters The number of packets that a DHCP server sends in its PING verification that an
address in the DHCP pool is not in use. This number may be any number from 2 to 10,
or may be set to 0 (zero) to block server PINGs of pool address.
Description This command is used to specify the number of packets a DHCP server sends to a pool
address to verify that the address is not already in use on the network.
“no” Form no ip dhcp ping packets

The “no” form of this command prevents the server from pinging DHCP pool
addresses.
Defaults Packet-count: 2
10-2
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip dhcp ping packets 2
10.3 DHCP Pool Configuration

10.3
DHCP Pool
The commands in this section provide for the configuration and management of Configuration
DHCP address pools and DHCP pool management on the BAR.
ip dhcp pool <name>
Summary Create a DHCP pool.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The alphanumeric name of the DHCP pool to be created on the DHCP server.
Description This command configures a DHCP address pool, identified by <name>, on a DHCP
server and enters DHCP pool configuration mode.
“no” Form no ip dhcp pool <name>

The “no” form of this command deletes a previously configured DHCP address pool,
identified by <name>.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip dhcp pool ELMIRA_PBG
Related Commands show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *} on page 10-9
client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>
Summary Set client unique identifier.
Required Mode DHCP Pool Config
User-Entered <uniqueidentifier>
Parameters The unique-identifier is a valid notation in hexadecimal format, and must be a minimum
of two bytes long.
Description This command specifies the unique identifier for a DHCP client. Although a client
generally uses its MAC address as its identifier when issuing DHCP requests, some
DHCP clients can have a manually configured client identifier.
“no” Form no client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified unique identifier.
Defaults None
10-3
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#client-identifier ab:cd:1d:ab:cd:ef
10.3 Related Commands show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *} on page 10-9
DHCP Pool client-name <name>

Configuration
Summary Name a DHCP client.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The name is a brief string consisting of standard ASCII characters used to identify the
client for reference purposes.
Description This command specifies the name for a DHCP client.
“no” Form no client-name <name>

The “no” form of this command removes the client name.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#client-name SECTION9
default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]
Summary Set up to eight default routers.
User-Entered <address(N)>
Parameters The <address> parameter is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a default
router. Up to eight addresses can be supplied to the command, which will be used as
default routers in the preference order supplied.
Description This command specifies the default router list for a DHCP client.
“no” Form no default-router

The “no” form of this command deletes the entire default-router list.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#default-router 172.16.1.1 172.16.4.1
10-4
dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]
Summary Set up to eight DNS servers.
Required Mode DHCP Pool Config 10.3

User-Entered <address(N)> DHCP Pool
Parameters The <address> parameter is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the DNS Configuration
server that clients will rely on for name resolution. Up to eight addresses can be
supplied to the command, which will be used as DNS servers in the preference order
supplied.
Description This command specifies the Domain Name System (DNS) server for a DHCP client.
At least one DNS server must be set.
“no” Form no dns-server

The “no” form of this command deletes the entire DNS server list.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#dns-server 172.16.1.5 172.16.4.3 192.168.4.7
hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type]
Summary Specify DHCP client address.
User-Entered <hardwareaddress>
Parameters The MAC address of the hardware platform of the client consisting of 6 bytes in
hexadecimal format, each separated by colons.
[type]
The optional type parameter indicates the protocol of the hardware platform. Select 1
to specify traditional Ethernet framing (Ethernet II) or 6 for IEEE 802.n framing (for
Token Ring/Token Bus, for example).
Description This command specifies the hardware address of a DHCP client.
“no” Form no hardware-address <hardwareaddress>

The “no” form of this command removes the specified hardware address of the DHCP
client.
Defaults Type: 1
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#hardware-address 00:00:1d:ab:cd:ef
10-5
host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]
Summary Set IP address and mask for client binding.
10.3 Required Mode DHCP Pool Config
DHCP Pool User-Entered <ipaddress>

Configuration Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a DHCP host.
[<mask>]
The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, identifying the network portion of the
supplied IP address.
[<prefix-length>]
The network mask, specified as a whole number representing the number of bits that
make up the prefix (for example, 24), where prefix-length is an integer from 0 to 32.
Description This command specifies the IP address and an optional network mask for a manual
binding to a DHCP client.
“no” Form no host <ipaddress>

The “no” form of this command removes the host information.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#host 172.16.25.29 24
lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]]
Summary Set length of DHCP address leases.
User-Entered <days>
Parameters The number of 24-hour days that a leased IP address may be held by a DHCP client.
This parameter may be from 0 to 59.
NOTE: Configuring a lease duration beyond the maximum allowable lease (86,400
minutes) will result in an error message.
[hours]
The number of hours, in addition to the number of <days> specified, that an assigned
IP address may be retained. The value of this optional parameter may be from 0 to
1,339.
[minutes]
The duration, in minutes, that DHCP leases may be held. This value may be from 0 to
86399.
10-6
[infinite]
Supplying this parameter in place of values for <days>, [hours], and [minutes] will set
the lease duration for DHCP assigned IP addresses to be infinite until released by the
client.
Description This command configures the duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned
from a DHCP server to a DHCP client.
10.3
DHCP Pool
“no” Form no lease Configuration
The “no” form of this command resets the lease time to its default value of one day.
Defaults Days: 1
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#lease 7 12
network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]
Summary Set DCHP pool address and mask.
User-Entered <networknumber>
Parameters A valid IP address, in dotted decimal notation, identifying a member of the subnet to be
configured.
[<mask>]
The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, identifying the network portion of the
supplied IP address.
[<prefix-length>]
The network mask, specified as a whole number representing the number of bits that
make up the prefix (for example, 24), where prefix-length is an integer from 0 to 32.
Description This command configures a subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool on the
server.
“no” Form no network

The “no” form of this command removes the subnet number and mask information.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#network 172.16.3.0 24
10-7
10.4 DHCP Server Display Commands

The following commands display the DHCP Server address bindings and statistics.
10.4 show ip dhcp binding [<address>]
Summary Show existing DHCP bindings.

DHCP Server
Display Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec
Commands
User-Entered <address>
Parameters This optional parameter restricts the information presented to one IP address entry in
the DHCP bindings table.
Description This command displays MAC address to IP bindings for a specified IP <address> on
the DHCP server. If no IP address is specified, the bindings corresponding to all the
addresses are displayed.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp binding

IP address Hardware Address Lease Expiration Type
----------- ----------------- ----------------- -----
111.222.100.17 00:0a:9f:00:03:1c 00:19:23 Automatic
111.222.100.19 00:0a:9f:00:03:1c 00:19:23 Automatic
Command Output The following information is displayed in response to the command:
IP address The IP address leased by the DHCP client.
Hardware Address The MAC address or client identifier of the leasing client.
Lease Expiration The time remaining on the address lease, in HH:MM:SS format.
Type The manner in which the IP address was assigned to the client
(automatic or static).
Related Commands client-identifier <uniqueidentifier> on page 10-3

hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type] on page 10-5
host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-6
lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]] on page 10-6
network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-7
show ip dhcp global configuration
Summary Show DHCP settings on the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
10-8
Description This command displays system-wide configuration for the DHCP server running on
the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults
Example
None
10.4
DHCP Server
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp global configuration Display
Service DHCP................................... Enable Commands
Number of Ping Packets......................... 2
Excluded Address............................... 111.222.100.1 to 111.222.100.16
Service DHCP Displays the administrative status of the DHCP server service on
the BAR: Enable or Disable.
Number of Ping Packets The maximum number of PINGs that will be sent to verify that an
IP address is not already assigned.
Excluded Address The ranges of IP addresses that the DHCP server service should
not assign to DHCP clients.
Related Commands ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress] on page 10-2

ip dhcp ping packets <packet-count> on page 10-2
service dhcp on page 10-1
show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *}
Summary Show pool configuration information.
User-Entered {<name>}
Parameters If a DHCP pool name is supplied, the CLI presents the configuration information for
that pool.
{*}
The use of the wildcard (asterisk) character in the show dhcp pool configuration
command causes the CLI to provide information on all DHCP pools.
Description This command displays configuration information for a DHCP address pool or for all
address pools configured on the system if * is specified.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
10-9
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp pool configuration *

Pool: offnettop
Pool Type...................................... Dynamic
10.4 Network........................................
Lease Time.....................................
DNS Servers....................................
111.222.100.0 255.255.255.128
1 days 0 hrs 0 mins
172.16.1.5
DHCP Server
Pool: test
Display
Pool Type...................................... Manual
Commands Hardware Address............................... 00:00:1d:ab:cd:ef
Hardware Address Type.......................... ethernet
Host........................................... 172.16.99.99 255.255.255.0
Lease Time..................................... 1 days 0 hrs 0 mins
Command Output The following information is shown for every type of DHCP pool:
Pool The name of the configured pool.
Pool Type The address pool type: Dynamically leased (Dynamic) or statically
configured (Manual).
Lease Time The lease expiration time of the IP Address assigned to the client.
DNS Servers The list of DNS servers available to the DHCP client.
The following additional field is displayed for a Dynamic DHCP address pool:
Network The network number and the mask for the DHCP address pool.
The following additional fields are displayed for a Manual DHCP address pool:
Hardware Address The hardware address of a DHCP client.
Hardware Address Type The protocol of the hardware platform.
Host The IP address and the mask for a manual binding to a DHCP
client.
Related Commands client-identifier <uniqueidentifier> on page 10-3

client-name <name> on page 10-4
default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>] on page 10-4
dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>] on page 10-5
hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type] on page 10-5
host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-6
ip dhcp pool <name> on page 10-3
lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]] on page 10-6
network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-7
10-10
show ip dhcp server statistics
Summary Show running statistics for DHCP operation.

User-Entered None DHCP Server
Parameters Display
Description This command displays DHCP server statistics.
Commands
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp server statistics

Automatic Bindings............................. 2
Expired Bindings............................... 0
Malformed Bindings............................. 0
Messages Received
---------- ----------
DHCP DISCOVER.................................. 13
DHCP REQUEST................................... 13
DHCP DECLINE................................... 0
DHCP RELEASE................................... 0
DHCP INFORM.................................... 2
Messages Sent
---------- ------
DHCP OFFER..................................... 0
DHCP ACK....................................... 0
DHCP NACK...................................... 0
Command Output The CLI command provides a display of the following statistics:
Automatic Bindings The number of IP addresses that have been automatically mapped
to the MAC addresses of hosts that are found in the DHCP
database.
Expired Bindings The number of expired leases.
Malformed Bindings The number of truncated or corrupted messages that were received
by the DHCP server.
10-11
The following statistics are provided for Received Messages:
DHCP DISCOVER The number of DHCP DISCOVER messages that were received by
the server.
10.5 DHCP REQUEST The number of DHCP REQUEST messages that were received by the
server.
DHCP Server DHCP DECLINE The number of DHCP DECLINE messages that were received by the
server.
Clear
Commands DHCP RELEASE The number of DHCP RELEASE messages that were received by the
server.
DHCP INFORM The number of DHCP INFORM messages that were received by the
server.
The following statistics are provided for Sent Messages:
DHCP OFFER The number of DHCP OFFER messages that were sent by the server.
DHCP ACK The number of DHCP ACK (acknowledged) messages that were sent by
the server.
DHCP NACK The number of DHCP NACK (not acknowledged) messages that were sent
by the server.
10.5 DHCP Server Clear Commands

These commands clear the DHCP Server address bindings, and statistics.
clear ip dhcp binding <address | *>
Summary Delete DHCP bindings.
User-Entered <address>
Parameters This parameter specifies a single IP address, in dotted decimal notation, that the
command will delete the bindings for.
<*>
If the wildcard (asterisk) parameter is specified, the bindings for all IP addresses on the
DHCP server are cleared.
Description This command deletes an automatic address binding from the DHCP server database.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear ip dhcp binding 172.16.1.80
Related Commands show ip dhcp binding [<address>] on page 10-8
10-12
clear ip dhcp server statistics
Summary Clear stored DHCP statistics.

User-Entered None DHCP Server
Parameters Clear
Description This command clears DHCP server statistics counters.
Commands
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear ip dhcp binding 172.16.1.80
Related Commands show ip dhcp server statistics on page 10-11
10-13
10.5
DHCP Server
Clear
Commands
10-14
Chapter 11
Session Control
This chapter describes the commands that control the function of the BAR serial
interface (console port) and the operation of Telnet and terminal sessions to and from
the BAR.

The following topics are discussed in this chapter:
Topic on page
Session Control Commands 11-1
Session Monitoring and Display Commands 11-9
11.2 Session Control Commands

The commands in this section configure the settings of the BAR’s console interface and
inbound and outbound Telnet sessions, as well as providing administrative control over
current sessions.
remotecon maxsessions <sessions>
Summary Set the maximum number of remote sessions on the BAR.
User-Entered <sessions>
Parameters A number, from 0 to 5, of the maximum number of remote sessions that can be
simultaneously active on the BAR.
CAUTION: If the maximum number of sessions is set to 0 (zero), CLI management
of the BAR can only be performed through a local console connection.
Description This command specifies the maximum number of remote connection sessions that can
be established.
“no” Form no remotecon maxsessions

The “no” form of this command restores the maximum number of sessions to the
default 5.
Defaults Sessions: 5
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #remotecon maxsessions 4
11.2 Related Commands remotecon timeout <timeout> on page 11-2

show remotecon on page 11-9
transport {output | input} telnet on page 11-5
Session Control show loginsession on page 11-10
Commands
remotecon timeout <timeout>
Summary Set idle timeout for remote sessions.
User-Entered <timeout>
Parameters The maximum time (in minutes) that an inactive remote Telnet session can remain
connected. The range for this parameter is 0 to 160, with a value of 0 indicating an
infinite maximum time.
Description This command sets the remote connection session timeout value, in minutes. Once a
remote Telnet session passes the timeout value, it is deactivated and disconnected.
“no” Form no remotecon timeout

The “no” form of this command restores the remote connection session timeout value
to the default value of 5 minutes.
Defaults Timeout: 5
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #remotecon timeout 60
Related Commands remotecon maxsessions <sessions> on page 11-1

show loginsession on page 11-10
show remotecon on page 11-9
serial baudrate {baud}
Summary Specify the baud setting of the BAR console port.
Required Mode Line Config
User-Entered {baud}
Parameters This value identifies the baud rate of the serial connection. The following bit per second
(bps) values may be set for the serial interface’s operation: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200, 38400, 57600, 115200.
Description This command sets the serial baud rate for the BAR management interface.
“no” Form no serial baudrate

The “no” form of this command restores the default communication rate of 9600.
11-2
Defaults Baud: 9600
Example
11.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #serial baudrate 57600
Related Commands show serial on page 11-10

Session Control
Commands
serial timeout <timeout>
Summary Set idle timeout for BAR local console port.
User-Entered <timeout>
Parameters The maximum time (in minutes) that an inactive console session can remain connected.
The range for this parameter is 0 to 160, with a value of 0 indicating an infinite
maximum time.
Description This command specifies the maximum duration that a local console connection can
remain idle (not sending commands or keystrokes) before it is automatically
disconnected.
“no” Form no serial timeout

The “no” form of this command restores the default serial timeout of 5 minutes.
Defaults Timeout: 5
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #serial timeout 60
Related Commands show serial on page 11-10

show loginsession on page 11-10
session-limit <0-5>
Summary Specify the maximum number of outbound telnet sessions.
User-Entered <0-5>
Parameters The maximum number of outbound telnet sessions, from 0-5.
Description This command sets the maximum number of outbound telnet sessions. A value of 0
indicates that no outbound telnet sessions are allowed.
“no” Form no session-limit

The “no” form of this command restores the default number of outbound sessions (5).
Defaults Maximum sessions: 5
11-3
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #session-limit 3
11.2 Related Commands session-timeout <0-160> on page 11-4

telnet <ip_address> on page 11-6
Session Control
Commands
session-timeout <0-160>
Summary Specify the timeout value for outbound telnet sessions.
User-Entered <0-160>
Parameters The number of minutes an outbound telnet session can be inactive before timing out.
Description This command sets the duration (in minutes) for which an outbound telnet session can
be inactive before timing out and exiting the session. A value of 0 indicates the session
can be indefinite (not timed out).
“no” Form no session-timeout

The “no” form of this command restores the default value of 0 (indefinite).
Defaults Timeout duration: 0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #session-timeout 30
Related Commands session-limit <0-5> on page 11-3

telnet <ip_address> on page 11-6
set prompt <prompt string>
Summary Customize the management screen prompt.
User-Entered <prompt string>

Parameters The alphanumeric string that the Pannaway BAR will display as its identifying prompt.
The string may be up to 64 characters in length. If the prompt string will contain spaces,
the entire string must be enclosed in quotation marks.
Description This command changes the text string that is presented as the command line prompt.
“no” Form None
Defaults Prompt-string: “Pannaway BAR”
11-4
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #set prompt ACME ISP BAR

^
% Invalid input detected at ’^’ marker
(Pannaway BAR) #set prompt “ACME ISP BAR”
(ACME ISP BAR) # 11.2
Session Control
pagination displaymode Commands
Summary Enable or disable pagination of output.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command activates pagination of output (via the “More” prompt).
“no” Form no pagination displaymode

The “no” form of this command disables pagination of output.
Defaults Pagination enabled
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config) #pagination displaymode
transport {output | input} telnet
Summary Activate Telnet session support in the inbound and outbound directions.
User-Entered {output | input}

Parameters The direction in which Telnet support is activated (input for inbound; output for
outbound).
Description This command enables or disables the establishment of Telnet sessions to or from the
BAR. If inbound sessions are enabled, new Telnet sessions can be established until
there are no more sessions available.
“no” Form no transport {output | input} telnet

The “no” form of the command disables inbound or outbound Telnet sessions. In this
case, no new Telnet sessions may be established. An established session remains active
until the session is ended or a network error ends it.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #transport input telnet
11-5

remotecon timeout <timeout> on page 11-2
session-limit <0-5> on page 11-3
session-timeout <0-160> on page 11-4
11.2 telnet <ip_address> on page 11-6
Session Control telnet <ip_address>

Commands
Summary Opens a telnet session to a remote host from within the current terminal or remote
login session.
User Entered <ip_address>

Parameters The IP address of the host with which you want to open a Telnet session.
Description This command opens a Telnet session between a BAR and a remote host. Telnet is
considered insecure communication, because all information is passed across the wire
in plain text (including authentication information).
Example
(Pannaway BAR) # telnet 192.168.199.199

Trying 192.168.199.199...
Connected to 192.168.199.199.
(BAS-BX)
Username: Admin
Password:
disconnect {<sessionID> | all}
Summary Disconnect an active session.
User-Entered <sessionID>
Parameters The session ID number of an active Telnet session on the BAR.
all
Supply this parameter to close all active Telnet sessions.
Description This command closes a specified Telnet session, or all active Telnet sessions.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #disconnect 01
Related Commands show loginsession on page 11-10
11-6
users name <username>
Summary Create a new user account.

User-Entered <username> Session Control
Parameters The name of a new user account to be created on the BAR. The account name can be Commands
up to eight characters long, and can be comprised of alphanumeric characters as well as
the dash (‘-’) and underscore (‘_’). The <username> is not case-sensitive.
Description This command adds a new user account name, if space permits. Up to six user names
can be defined.
“no” Form no users name <username>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified account name.
NOTE: The default “admin” user account cannot be deleted.
Defaults Two user names are provided by default: admin and guest.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users name FIELD
Related Commands users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite} on page 13-10
users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha} on page 13-11
users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]} on page 13-11
users passwd <username>
Summary Set a password for an existing user account.
User-Entered <username>
Parameters The name of an existing user account on the BAR.
Description This command changes the password of the existing user account.
After the <username> parameter is entered, a prompt appears that asks for the user’s
existing password. If no password was previously set, press ENTER.
The system then prompts you to enter a new password, and then provides a
confirmation prompt. If the new password and confirmation entries match, a message
is displayed that indicates the operation was successful.
A user password should not be more than eight characters in length. If a user is
authorized for authentication or encryption is enabled, the password must be the full
eight characters. The username and password are not case-sensitive.
“no” Form no users passwd <username>

The “no” form of this command resets (blanks-out) a user’s existing password. The
“no” form of the command also requires confirmation of the change.
11-7
Defaults None
Example
11.2
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users passwd FIELD
Enter old password:
Session Control Enter new password:******

Commands
Confirm new password:******
Password Changed!
Related Commands users name <username> on page 11-7

show users on page 11-11
network javamode
Summary Allow access to BAR Java management applet functions.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command specifies that the BAR should allow access to the Java applet in the
header frame of the Web interface. When access is enabled, the Java applet can be
viewed from the Web interface.
“no” Form no network javamode

The “no” form of this command disallows access to the Java applet in the header frame
of the Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot use the Java management
applet.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #network javamode
Related Commands show network on page 3-10
clear pass [yes]
Summary Clear all passwords.
User-Entered yes]
Description This command resets all user passwords to the factory defaults without powering off
the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the password reset should proceed.
11-8
“no” Form None
Defaults None
11.3
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear pass
Are you sure you want to reset all passwords? (y/n)y Session
Monitoring and
Passwords Reset! Display
Commands
Related Commands users passwd <username> on page 11-7
11.3 Session Monitoring and Display Commands

The commands in this section provide statistics and configuration information related
to Telnet and serial console connections to the BAR.
show remotecon
Summary Show the BAR remote session support configuration.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays remote connection (Telnet) settings.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show remotecon
Remote Connection Login Timeout (minutes)................. 60

Maximum Number of Remote Connection Sessions.............. 5
Allow New Telnet Sessions................................. Yes
Command Output: The following commands are shown in response to the show remotecon command:
Remote Connection Login Timeout Indicates the number of minutes (0-160) a remote
(minutes) connection session is allowed to remain inactive before
being logged off. A zero means there will be no timeout.
Maximum Number of Remote The number of simultaneous remote connection sessions

Connection Sessions allowed (0-5; the factory default is 5).
Allow New Telnet Sessions Indicates whether remote connection sessions are allowed
(Yes) or disallowed (No) when an existing session is in
progress.

remotecon timeout <timeout> on page 11-2
11-9
show serial
Summary Show the BAR console port settings.
Session User-Entered None

Monitoring and Parameters
Display Description This command displays serial communication settings for the switch.
Commands
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show serial

Serial Port Login Timeout (minutes)............ 5
Baud Rate (bps)................................ 9600
Character Size (bits).......................... 8
Flow Control................................... Disable
Stop Bits...................................... 1
Parity......................................... none
Serial Port Login Timeout Indicates the time, in minutes, of inactivity on a Serial port
(minutes) connection before the connection is closed.
Baud Rate (bps) The default baud rate at which the serial port will try to connect.
Character Size (bits) The number of bits in a character. The number of bits is always 8.
Flow Control Indicates that Hardware Flow-Control is disabled (factory set).
Stop Bits The number of Stop bits per character; this is always set to 1.
Parity The Parity Method used on the Serial Port (always set to None).
Related Commands serial baudrate {baud} on page 11-2

serial timeout <timeout> on page 11-3
show loginsession
Summary Show a summary of active Telnet and console port sessions.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays current Telnet and serial port connections to the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
11-10
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show loginsession
ID User Name Connection From Idle Time Session Time

-- ---------------
01 Admin
02 FIELD
---------------
172.16.1.187
EIA-232
------------
00:00:00
00:02:15
------------
01:06:59
00:45:12
11.3
Session
Command Output: The following information is shown in the log session table: Monitoring and
Display
ID Login Session ID. Commands
User Name The name the user used to login using the serial port or Telnet.
Connection From IP address of the Telnet client machine or EIA-232 for the serial
port connection.
Idle Time Time this session has been idle.
Session Time Total time this session has been connected.
show users
Summary Show the list of configured user accounts.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the configured user names and their settings. This command is
only available for users with read/write privileges. The SNMPv3 fields will only be
displayed if SNMP is available on the system.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show users
SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3

User Name User Access Mode Access Mode Authentication Encryption
---------- ---------------- ----------- -------------- ----------
admin Read/Write Read/Write None None
guest Read Only Read Only None None
11-11
Command Output: The following information is shown for each user account:
User Name The name used to login via the serial port, Telnet or Web.
11.3
User Access Mode Indicates the operator’s access level: Read/Write (able to change
parameters on the switch) or Read Only (only able to view switch
parameters).
Session SNMPv3 Access Mode Displays the SNMPv3 Access Mode. If the value is Read/Write, the
SNMPv3 user can set and retrieve parameters on the system. If the
Monitoring and value is set to Read Only, the SNMPv3 user can only retrieve
Display parameter information. The SNMPv3 access mode may be different
Commands than the CLI and Web access mode.
SNMPv3 Authentication Displays the authentication protocol assigned to the specified login
user.
SNMPv3 Encryption Displays the encryption protocol assigned to the specified login user.

users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite} on page 13-10
users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha} on page 13-11
users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]} on page 13-11
11-12
Chapter 12
HTTP and SSH Configuration
This chapter provides configuration information for Secure Shell and Secure Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol operation on the BAR.

The following information and command groups are described in this chapter:
Topic on page
Secure HTTP Commands 12-1
Secure Shell (SSH) Commands 12-4
12.2 Secure HTTP Commands

The commands in this section configure and administer the Secure Hyper Text Transfer
Protocol (Secure HTTP) on the BAR.
ip http secure-port <portid>
Summary Set Secure Socket Layer Transport (SSLT) port.
User-Entered <portid>
Parameters The port ID number that will be used as the Secure HTTP port. Valid values for this
parameter are from 1 to 65,535.
Description This command is used to set the Secure HTTP port.
“no” Form no ip http secure-port <portid>

The “no” form of the command is used to set the sslt port value back to the default
of 443.
Defaults Portid: 443
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ip http secure-port 571

Related Commands ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1] on page 12-2

ip http secure-server on page 12-2
12.2 ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1]
Secure HTTP Summary Set the version(s) of Secure HTTP supported on the BAR.
Commands
User-Entered [SSL3]
Parameters Enter this parameter to configure the BAR for Secure Socket Layer 3 (SSL3) protocol
support.
[TLS1]
Enter this parameter to set up the BAR to support the Transport Layer Security
protocol.
Description This command is used to set protocol levels (versions). The protocol level can be set to
TLS1, SSL3 or to both TLS1 and SSL3.
“no” Form no ip http secure-protocol

The “no” form of the command is used to remove protocol levels (versions) for secure
HTTP.
Defaults Supports both SSL3 and TLS1
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ip http secure-protocol tls1
Related Commands ip http secure-server on page 12-2

ip http secure-server
Summary Enable Secure HTTP operation on the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command is used to enable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP.
“no” Form no ip http secure-server

The “no” form of the command is used to disable the secure socket layer for secure
HTTP.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ip http secure-server
12-2
Related Commands ip http secure-port <portid> on page 12-1

ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1] on page 12-2
show ip http on page 12-3
ip http server 12.2

Summary Enable browser access to the BAR. Secure HTTP
Commands
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables access to the switch through the Web interface. When access is
enabled, the user can log in to the switch from the Web interface.
“no” Form no ip http server

The “no” form of the command is used to disable access to the switch through the Web
interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot log in to the switch’s Web server.
CAUTION: Disabling the Web interface takes effect immediately. All interfaces are
affected.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ip http server

show ip http on page 12-3
show ip http
Summary Show the HTTP settings for the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the HTTP settings for the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
12-3
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip http
HTTP Mode (Unsecure): Disabled
12.3 HTTP Mode (Secure): Enabled

Secure Port: 443
Secure Shell Secure Protocol Level(s): TLS1 SSL3
(SSH)
Commands Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the show ip http command:
HTTP Mode (Unsecure) Indicates whether the HTTP mode is enabled or disabled.
HTTP Mode (Secure) Indicates whether the administrative mode of secure

HTTP is enabled or disabled.
Secure Port Indicates the port configured for SSLT.
Secure Protocol Level Indicates the secure HTTP protocol level: SSL3, TLS1, or
both SSL3 and TLS1.

12.3 Secure Shell (SSH) Commands

The BAR supports the use of the Secure Shell protocol. The following commands
provide control over the SSH settings of the BAR, and show the SSH configuration of
the BAR.
ip ssh
Summary Enable SSH protocol support.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command is used to enable SSH (Secure Shell protocol for remote
communications).
“no” Form no ip ssh

The “no” form of the command is used to disable SSH.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ip ssh
Related Commands ip ssh protocol [1] [2] on page 12-5

show ip ssh on page 12-5
12-4
ip ssh protocol [1] [2]
Summary Set the supported protocol level for SSH.

User-Entered [1] Secure Shell
Parameters Enter this parameter to configure the BAR for SSH1 protocol support. (SSH)
[2]
Commands
Enter this parameter to configure the BAR for SSH2 protocol support.
Description This command is used to set or remove protocol levels (or versions) for SSH. Either
SSH1, SSH2, or both SSH1 and SSH2 can be set.
“no” Form None
Defaults Both SSH1 and SSH2 supported
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ip ssh protocol 1 2
Related Commands ip ssh on page 12-4

show ip ssh on page 12-5
show ip ssh
Summary Show SSH settings of the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the current SSH settings.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ssh
Administrative Mode Protocol Level(s) SSH Connections

-------------------- ----------------- ---------------
Enabled Versions 1 and 2 0
12-5
Administrative Mode Indicates whether the administrative mode of SSH is enabled or

disabled.
12.3 Protocol Level Indicates the SSH protocol level: version 1, version 2 or both
versions 1 and version 2.
Secure Shell Connections Displays the current SSH connections.

(SSH)
Commands Related Commands ip ssh on page 12-4
ip ssh protocol [1] [2] on page 12-5
12-6
Chapter 13
SNMP Commands
This chapter describes the configuration and monitoring of Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP) settings on the BAR.

The following topics are presented in this chapter:
Topic on page
SNMP Configuration Commands 13-1
SNMP Display Commands 13-12
13.2 SNMP Configuration Commands

The commands in this section control the operation of the Simple Network
Management Protocol on the BAR. This includes the configuration of SNMP
communities, the activation or deactivation of certain traps, and the configuration of
trap destinations.
snmp-server community <name>
Summary Add an SNMP community.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The community name of the new SNMP community. This value may be up to 16 case-
sensitive alphanumeric characters.
Description This command adds (and names) up to six new SNMP communities. A community
name is a name associated with the switch and with a set of SNMP managers that
manage it with a specified privileged level. The case-sensitive name can be up to 16
characters long.
NOTE: Community names in the SNMP community table must be unique. If you
make multiple entries using the same community name, the first entry is kept and
processed and all duplicate entries are ignored.
“no” Form no snmp-server community <name>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified SNMP community name from
the table.
13.2 Defaults
Example
Two community names are configured by default: public and private.
SNMP (Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community TECH

Configuration
Commands
Related Commands snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2
snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3
snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3
snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4
snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5
show snmpcommunity on page 13-12
snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>
Summary Specify allowable IP addresses for a community.
Parameters The client IP address for the SNMP community.
<name>
The name of an existing SNMP community.
Description This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community. The address is the
associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client
IP mask value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that
community to access the device. A value of 0.0.0.0 allows access from any IP address.
Otherwise, this value is ANDed with the snmp-server community mask to determine
the range of allowed client IP addresses. The name is the applicable community name.
“no” Form no snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified SNMP community client IP
address.
Defaults IP address: 0.0.0.0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community ipaddr 172.16.1.187 TECH
Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1

13-2
snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>
Summary Set the client mask for an SNMP community.

User-Entered <ipmask> SNMP
Parameters The network mask that defines the network portion of the SNMP community’s IP Configuration
address. Commands
<name>
Description This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community. The address is the
associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client
IP address value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use
that community to access the device. A value of 255.255.255.255 will restrict access to
only the station specified in the snmp-server community ipaddr command. A value of
0.0.0.0 will allow access from any IP address. Masks between these extremes provide
access to stations in various subnets of the specified IP address. The name is the
applicable community name.
“no” Form no snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified SNMP community client IP
mask.
Defaults Mask: 0.0.0.0
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community ipmask 255.255.255.0 TECH

snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2
snmp-server community mode <name>
Summary Activate an SNMP community.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The name of an existing, but inactive SNMP community.
Description This command activates an SNMP community. If a community is enabled, an SNMP

manager associated with this community manages the switch according to its access
right.
13-3
“no” Form no snmp-server community mode <name>

The “no” form of this command disables the specified SNMP community. If the
community is disabled, no SNMP requests using this community are accepted. In this
case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot manage the switch
13.2 Defaults
until the Status is changed back to Enable.
The default private and public communities are enabled by default. The four undefined
SNMP communities are disabled by default.
Configuration
Commands Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community mode TECH

snmp-server community ro <name>
Summary Set community access to Read Only mode.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters
Description This command restricts SNMP sessions from the named community to viewing
configuration settings only. The access mode is read-only (also called public).
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community ro TECH

13-4
snmp-server community rw <name>
Summary Set community access to Read-Write.

User-Entered <name> SNMP
Parameters The name of an existing SNMP community. Configuration
Commands
Description This command assigns both monitoring (configuration display) and management
(configuration change) permissions to the named group. This access mode is read/write
(also called private).
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community rw TECH

snmp-server enable traps
Summary Enable SNMP traps.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the Authentication failure trap.
“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps

The “no” form of this command disables the Authentication Flag.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps
Related Commands show trapflags on page 13-14
13-5
snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm
Summary Enable the generation of broadcast storm traps.
SNMP User-Entered None

Commands Description This command enables the broadcast storm trap. When enabled, broadcast storm traps
are sent only if the broadcast storm recovery mode setting associated with the port is
enabled.
“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm

The “no” form of this command disables the broadcast storm trap.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm
snmp-server enable traps linkmode
Summary Enable link mode traps.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch. When enabled, link
traps are sent only if the Link Trap flag setting associated with the port is enabled (see
‘snmp trap link-status’ command).
“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps linkmode

The “no” form of this command disables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps linkmode

snmp trap link-status on page 13-9
13-6
snmp-server enable traps multiusers
Summary Enable multi-user traps.

User-Entered None SNMP
Description This command enables Multiple User traps. When the Multiple User Trap is enabled, a
Commands
trap is sent when a user logs in to the terminal interface (EIA 232 or Telnet) and there is
an existing terminal interface session.
“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps multiusers

The “no” form of this command disables the Multiple User Trap.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps multiusers
snmp-server enable traps stpmode
Summary Enable spanning tree protocol traps.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification
traps.
“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps stpmode

The “no” form of the command disables the sending of new root traps and topology
change notification traps.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps stpmode
13-7
snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>
Summary Define an SNMP trap receiving station.
SNMP User-Entered <name>

Configuration Parameters The name of an existing SNMP community.
Commands <ipaddr>
An IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the SNMP trap receiving station.
Description This command adds an SNMP trap destination community, identified by the
combination of a community name and IP address.
“no” Form no snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>

The “no” form of the command deletes the specified SNMP trap community.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmptrap MONITOR 172.16.1.187
Related Commands show snmptrap on page 13-13

snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew>
Summary Set a new IP address for a trap receiving station.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The name of an existing SNMP community.
<ipaddrold>
The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the previous SNMP trap station.
<ipaddrnew>
The new IP address, in dotted decimal notation, for the SNMP trap station.
Description This command assigns a new IP address to a specified trap receipt station with a
previously associated IP address.
NOTE: IP addresses in the SNMP trap receiver table must be unique. If you make
multiple entries using the same IP address, the first entry is retained and
processed. All duplicate entries are ignored.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
13-8
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmptrap ipaddr MONITOR 172.16.1.187 172.16.1.189

13.2
SNMP
Configuration
snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> Commands
Summary Activate the sending of traps to the community.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters The name of an existing SNMP community.
<ipaddr>
An IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the SNMP trap destination.
Description This command enables the sending of SNMP trap to a designated community of
receivers. Enabled trap receivers are active (able to receive traps).
“no” Form no snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>

The “no” form of this command disables the sending of SNMP traps to a designated
community of receivers. Disabled trap receivers are inactive (not able to receive traps).
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmptrap mode MONITOR 172.16.1.187

snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-8
snmp trap link-status
Summary Enable link status traps.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables Link Up/Down traps for the selected interface.
“no” Form no snmp trap link-status

The “no” form of this command disables Link Up/Down traps for the interface.
13-9
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#snmp trap link-status
13.2 Related Commands snmp-server enable traps linkmode on page 13-6

SNMP
Configuration snmp trap link-status all
Commands
Summary Enable the generation of link status traps.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command enables Link Up/Down traps for all interfaces on the BAR.
“no” Form no snmp trap link-status all

The “no” form of this command disables Link Up/Down traps for the interface.
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp trap link-status all
Related Commands snmp-server enable traps linkmode on page 13-6

users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite}
Summary Configure the SNMPv3 access level provided to a user.
Parameters A login name on the BAR.
{readonly | readwrite}
The control setting for the SNMPv3 user: Read Only (can view information) or Read-
Write (can view information and change settings).
Description This command specifies the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login user.
“no” Form no users snmpv3 accessmode <username>

The “no” form of this command sets the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified
login <username> as readwrite for admin user; readonly for all other users.
Defaults Control setting: readwrite for admin user; readonly for all other users
13-10
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users snmpv3 accessmode FIELD readwrite

show users on page 11-11 13.2
SNMP
users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha} Configuration
Commands
Summary Set authentication for SNMPv3 users.
{none | md5 | sha}

The authentication protocol the user will be required to use to log in.
Description This command specifies the authentication protocol to be used for the specified login
user. The valid authentication protocols are none, md5 or sha. If md5 or sha are
specified, the user login password will be used as the snmpv3 authentication password.
NOTE: If the user password is shorter than eight characters, you receive an error
message when attempting to change the authentication protocol to md5 or sha, as
shown in the second example below. The password must be exactly eight
characters for these methods.
“no” Form no users snmpv3 authentication <username>

The “no” form of this command sets the authentication protocol for the specified user
to none (the default setting).
Defaults No authentication
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users snmpv3 authentication FIELD md5
Error! Cannot enable authentication when password is less than 8 characters in

length.

show users on page 11-11
users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]}
Summary Set the encryption method for an SNMPv3 user.
13-11
{none | des [key]}

The encryption type the user will be required to use to log in. If “des” is supplied, an
encryption password of up to 16 characters must also be provided. If the des protocol is
specified but a key is not provided, the user will be prompted for the key.
13.3 Description This command specifies the encryption protocol and key to be used for the specified
login user. The valid encryption protocols are none or des.
SNMP Display
Commands “no” Form no users snmpv3 encryption <username>
The “no” form of this command sets the encryption protocol to none (the default
setting).
Defaults No encryption
Example
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users snmpv3 encryption FIELD des
Enter encryption key: ********
Related Commands
13.3 SNMP Display Commands

The commands shown and described in this section provide information about SNMP
configuration and settings on the BAR.
show snmpcommunity
Summary Show SNMP communities.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays SNMP community information. Up to six SNMP communities
are supported. The SNMP agent of the BAR complies with SNMP Version 1. The
SNMP agent sends traps through TCP/IP to an external SNMP manager based on the
SNMP configuration (the trap receiver and other SNMP community parameters).
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show snmpcommunity

SNMP Community Name Client IP Address Client IP Mask Access Mode Status
------------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------- --------
public 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Read Only Enable
private 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Read/Write Enable
TECH 172.16.1.187 255.255.255.0 Read/Write Enable
13-12
Command Output: The following information is shown for each configured SNMP community:
SNMP Community Name The community string to which this entry grants access. Each
row of this table contains a unique community name.
Client IP Address An IP address (or portion thereof) from which this device will
accept SNMP packets with the associated community. The
requesting entity’s IP address is ANDed with the Subnet Mask
13.3
before being compared to the IP Address. Note that if the Subnet SNMP Display
Mask is set to 0.0.0.0, an IP Address of 0.0.0.0 matches all IP Commands
addresses.
Client IP Mask A mask to be ANDed with the requesting entity’s IP address

before comparison with IP Address. If the result matches with IP
Address then the address is an authenticated IP address. For
example, if the IP Address = 9.47.128.0 and the corresponding
Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 a range of incoming IP addresses
would match, i.e. the incoming IP Address could equal
9.47.128.0 - 9.47.128.255.
Access Mode The access level for this community string (“Read Only” or
”Read/Write”).
Status The status (Enabled/Disabled) of this community access entry.

show snmptrap
Summary Show configured SNMP trap receivers.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays SNMP trap receivers. Trap messages are sent across a network
to these trap receivers. These messages alert the manager to events occurring within the
switch or on the network. The BAR simultaneously supports up to six trap receivers.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show snmptrap
SNMP Trap Name IP Address Status

------------------- ----------------- --------
MONITOR 172.16.1.187 Enable
13-13
SNMP Trap Name The community string of the SNMP trap packet sent to the trap
manager.
13.3 IP Address The IP address of the trap manager device (SNMP network
management station).
SNMP Display Status Indicates whether trap forwarding to the indicated trap manager is
active (enable) or inactive (disable).
Commands
show trapflags
Summary Show the status of trap flags.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays which traps are configured to be enabled (sent) or disabled (not
sent). If a trap condition is enabled and the condition is detected, the switch’s SNMP
agent sends the trap to all enabled trap receivers. The switch does not have to be reset
to implement the changes. Cold and warm start traps are always generated and cannot
be disabled.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show trapflags
Authentication Flag............................ Enable

Link Up/Down Flag.............................. Enable
Multiple Users Flag............................ Enable
Spanning Tree Flag............................. Enable
Broadcast Storm Flag........................... Enable
DVMRP Traps.................................... Disable
OSPF Traps..................................... Disable
PIM Traps...................................... Disable
Command Output: The following information is shown in response to the show trapflags command:
Authentication Flag Indicates whether authentication failure traps will be sent; the
default is enabled.
Link Up/Down Flag Indicates whether link status traps will be sent; the default is
enabled.
Multiple Users Flag Indicates whether a trap will be sent when the same user ID is
logged into the switch more than once at the same time (either via
Telnet or serial port). The default is enabled.
13-14
Spanning Tree Flag Indicates whether spanning tree traps will be sent; the default is
enabled.
Broadcast Storm Flag Indicates whether broadcast storm traps will be sent; the default is
13.3
enabled.
DVMRP Traps Indicates whether DVMRP traps will be sent; the default is disabled.
OSPF Traps Indicates whether OSPF traps will be sent; the default is disabled.
SNMP Display
PIM Traps Indicates whether PIM traps will be sent; the default is disabled. Commands
Related Commands snmp-server enable traps on page 13-5

snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm on page 13-6
snmp-server enable traps linkmode on page 13-6
snmp-server enable traps multiusers on page 13-7
snmp-server enable traps stpmode on page 13-7
13-15
13.3
SNMP Display
Commands
13-16
Chapter 14
Access Control Lists
This chapter describes the commands used to configure Access Control Lists, or Access
Lists, on the BAR. Access Control Lists allow or deny passage of packets through the
Broadband Aggregation Router based on criteria specified during list creation. The
criteria for an Access Control List can be based on the protocols, source locations,
destinations, groups, or subscriber identifications of the packet or message being
filtered.
NOTE: Access Control Lists are implemented in the inbound direction only. The BAR does
not support Access Control Lists for outbound traffic.
14.1 ACL Control Commands

The following commands are used to create a normal or extended ACL list entry, assign
ACL entries to a particular port or all ports on the BAR, and view existing ACL
configurations.
access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | <srcip> <srcmask>}
Summary Create a new normal access control list.
User-Entered <accesslistnumber>
Parameters The number of the Access Control List being created. The acceptable range for normal
Access Control Lists is from 1 - 99.
{deny | permit}
This parameter identifies the type of list being created. If deny is specified, the list will
block access to packets meeting the specified criteria, while allowing all others. If permit
is provided for this parameter, the list will permit access only to packets meeting the
additional criteria, and deny all others.
{every | <srcip> <srcmask>}
The ending parameter provides the criteria for the Access Control List. The parameter
indicates if the Access Control List should filter for every packet, or only those
originating from the network identified by the combination of a Source IP Address
<srcip> and Source Subnet Mask <srcmask> supplied.
Description This command creates a new normal Access Control List on the BAR. This control list
provides a rule for allowing or denying access to the BAR for received traffic.
“no” Form no accesslist <accesslistnumber>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified Access Control List from the
BAR.
14.1 Defaults
Example
None
ACL Control <Pannaway BAR (config)# access-list 1 deny 192.161.10.1 255.255.255.0

Commands
access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <protocolnumber>}
<srcip> <srcmask> [eq {<srcl4portnumber> | <srcportkey>}] <dstip> <dstmask> [eq
{<dstl4portnumber> | <dstportkey>}] [precedence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>]
Summary Create an extended Access Control List entry.
Parameters The number of the Access Control List being created. The acceptable range for
extended Access Control Lists is from 100 - 199.
{deny | permit}
This parameter identifies the type of list being created. If deny is specified, the list will
block access to packets meeting the specified criteria, while allowing all others. If permit
is provided for this parameter, the list will permit access only to packets meeting the
additional criteria, and deny all others.
{every | icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <protocolnumber>}
The selection provided in this parameter indicates the type of protocol that the filter is
examining packets from. If “every” is selected, the ACL will permit or deny every
packet, regardless of origin. If one of the named protocols (ICMP, IGMP, IP, TCP, or
UDP) or the IANA-assigned well-known protocol number (from 0-255) is specified,
the ACL will permit or deny packets from the specified protocol.
<srcip>
The IP address, in Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN), of a source station on the
network the extended ACL applies to.
<srcmask>
The mask, in DDN, that identifies the network portion of the source IP address the
ACL applies to.
{<srcL4portnumber> | <srcportkey>}
The Layer 4 port number (an integer from 0 to 65,535 representing a well-known port
number), or the source port keyword (options are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, smtp,
snmp, Telnet, tftp, and www) that will be filtered by the ACL.
<dstip>
The IP address, in DDN, of the destination station that the extended ACL will control
traffic to.
<dstmask>
The subnet mask, in DDN format, that identifies the network portion of the
destination IP address specified for the ACL.
14-2
{<dstL4portnumber> | <dstportkey>}
The Layer 4 port number (an integer from 0 to 65535 representing a well-known port
number), or the destination port keyword (options are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, smtp,
snmp, telnet, tftp, and www) that will be filtered by the ACL.
[precedence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>]
The Service Type that the ACL will filter traffic for. The <precedence> parameter is an
IP preference value from 1 to 7. The <tos> is a Type of Service in hexadecimal format
14.1
ACL Control
(from 00 to FF), accompanied by the TOS’ mask value (also in hexadecimal format). A Commands
Differentiated Service Control Point can be selected as an option, in which case the
DSCP number, an integer from 0 to 63, must be supplied.
Description This command creates an extended Access Control List on the BAR. The Access
Control List provides a number of criteria for filtering traffic received by the BAR,
which are used to determine if the traffic should be permitted or denied.
“no” Form no access list <accesslistnumber>

The “no” form of this command deletes the specified extended Access Control List.
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR (config)#access-list 125 deny ip 172.16.99.55 255.255.0.0 eq telnet

172.16.99.1 255.255.0.0 eq telnet
ip access-group <accesslistnumber> {in | out}
Summary Attach an Access Control List to the current interface.
Parameters The number of the normal or extended Access Control List being assigned to the
interface. The acceptable range for this parameter is from 1 - 199, and the number
provided must match an existing Access Control List on the BAR.
NOTE: The same Access Control List can be assigned to more than one interface,
but each interface may only have one active ACL at a time. If an ACL is assigned to
a port with an existing ACL, the new assignment is discarded and an error message
is returned.
{in | out}
The selection of what type of traffic the Access Control List applies to; inbound or
outbound.
Description This command attaches the specified Access Control List to the currently selected
interface of the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR (Interface 0/3)#ip access-group 101 in
14-3
ip access-group all <accesslistnumber> in
Summary Assign a single Access Control List to all BAR interfaces.
ACL Control User-Entered <accesslistnumber>

Commands Parameters The number of the normal or extended Access Control List being assigned to the
interface. The acceptable range for this parameter is from 1 - 199, and the number
provided must match an existing Access Control List on the BAR.
NOTE: Each interface may only have one active ACL at a time. If an ACL is
assigned to a port with an existing ACL, the new assignment is discarded and an
error message is returned.
Description This command assigns a single Access Control List to all BAR interfaces.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
<Pannaway BAR (config) #ip access-group all 101 in
show ip access-lists <accesslistnumber>
Summary Show the configuration of an existing ACL.
Parameters The number of an existing normal or extended Access Control List on the BAR. The
acceptable range for this parameter is from 1 - 199.
Description Submitting this command causes the BAR to display a table of the Access Control List’s
configuration and settings.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
14-4
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show ip access-lists 100

ACL ID: 100
Direction: inbound
Interface: 0/1
Match Precedence 1
14.1
Action......................................... deny ACL Control
Match All...................................... FALSE
Commands
IP DSCP........................................ 0x1
Match Precedence 2
Action......................................... deny
Match All...................................... FALSE
IP Precedence.................................. 1
Match Precedence 3
Action......................................... deny
Match All...................................... FALSE
IP TOS......................................... TOS Bits: 0xff TOS Mask: 0xff
Match Precedence 4
Action......................................... deny
Match All...................................... FALSE

Destination L4 Port Keyword.................... 80(www/http)
Match Precedence 5
Action......................................... deny
Match All...................................... FALSE
Destination L4 Port Keyword.................... 100
IP DSCP........................................ 0x14
ACL ID The index assigned to the ACL list entry.
Match Precedence The order in which the rule is applied.
Action The action associated with the rule: deny (discard packet) or
permit (allow packet).
Protocol The protocol to filter for the rule.
Source IP Address The source IP address specified in the rule.
Source IP Mask The associated subnet mask for the source IP.
Source L4 Port Keyword The keyword identifying the source filtering port (if used).
Source L4 Port The layer-4 port number identifying the filtered source port (if
used).
Destination IP Address The destination IP address specified in the rule.
Destination IP Mask The associated subnet mask for the destination IP.
Destination L4 Port Keyword The keyword identifying the destination filtering port (if used).
Destination L4 Port The layer-4 port number identifying the filtered destination port
(if used).
14-5
IP Precedence If used, the IP precedence setting (1– 7).
IP TOS If used, the settings for TOS Bits and TOS Mask (displayed
and set in hexadecimal).
14.1 IP DSCP If used, the setting of the IP DSCP bits (displayed in

hexadecimal, although set in decimal).
ACL Control
Commands
14-6
Chapter 15
Device Utilities
This chapter provides information and descriptions of various commands that control
the general configuration and characteristics of the BAR.
The BAR provides commands that offer control over BAR operation and
configuration, but which are not concerned with a particular network protocol or
operational aspect. These commands are presented and described in this chapter.
15.1 Utility Commands

The commands in this section provide control over the configuration, memory, and
operation of the BAR, show general configuration information, and clear or display
logged data.
System Use the following commands to set and display the SNMP System Group information
Identification for the BAR. The SNMP MIB-II System Group settings provide information that is
Commands used by a network or element management system (such as Pannaway’s Broadband
Access Manager) to identify an IP network device within its community.
snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>}
Summary Assign custom name, location, and contact information to the BAR.
User-Entered <name>
Parameters An alphanumeric name, up to 31 characters in length (including any spaces), that will be
used to identify the BAR to management sessions and logs.
NOTE: You must surround any descriptive string in quotation marks (“ ”) to use
spaces in entry. If you enter a space in the text string without using surrounding
quotes, you get an invalid input error.
<location>
A description of the location (address, office, rack, or other location) that the BAR
resides in. This field may be up to 31 characters in length, and is subject to the same
restrictions as the <name> parameter, described above.
<contact>
A name, email address, or telephone number of the primary service contact for the
BAR or the facility. This field may be up to 31 characters in length, and is subject to the
same restrictions as the <name> parameter, described above.
Description This command sets the name and the physical location of the switch, and the
organization responsible for the network.
“no” Form None
15.1 Defaults
Example
None
Utility
Commands (Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server sysname “BAR_Rk2_Sh1”
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server contact 603 766 1234

^
% Invalid input detected at '^' marker.
(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server contact "603 766 1234"
Related Commands show sysinfo on page 15-10
General System Use the commands in this section to control the configuration and start-up settings of
Commands the BAR, clear various counters and logs, control log-in sessions, transfer files to and
from the BAR, and execute system utilities such as PING and traceroute.
clear config [yes]
Summary Reset BAR to factory defaults.
User-Entered yes]
Description This command resets all configuration to the factory defaults without powering off the
switch. The switch is automatically reset when this command is processed. You are
prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear config
Are you sure you want to clear the configuration? (y/n)
clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes]
Summary Clear the counters on an interface or all interfaces.
15-2
User-Entered [<slot/port> | all]

the BAR.
[yes]
Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting 15.1
you to confirm your action. Utility
Commands
Description This command clears the statistics for a specified <slot/port> or for all the ports or for
the entire switch based upon the argument. You are prompted to confirm the reset of
statistics.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear counters all
Are you sure you want to clear ALL port stats? (y/n)y
ALL Port Stats Cleared.
clear traplog [yes]
Summary Clear BAR trap log.
User-Entered [yes]
Description This command clears the trap log.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clear traplog yes
Related Commands show logging on page 15-8
copy <source-location> <destination-location> [yes]
Summary Copy files to or from the BAR.
15-3
User-Entered <source-location>
Parameters The <source-location> value is a local TFTP or Xmodem Uniform Resource Locator
(URL) or a memory location in the BAR. The values of the <source-location>
parameter vary depending on the type of copy operation.
15.1 If you will be uploading a file to the BAR:

i If uploading a file to the BAR from a TFTP server, the <source-location>
Utility parameter must be a valid URL containing the IP address of the TFTP server,
Commands the directory path to the file to be uploaded, and the full name of the file to be
uploaded.
i If uploading a file to the BAR with an Xmodem transfer through the BAR serial
port, the <source-location> parameter “xmodem” should be provided. The
BAR will respond to the command by waiting for an Xmodem SEND
operation from the management terminal.
If you will be downloading a file from the BAR:
If downloading a file from the BAR to a URL, the following can be specified as
the source location for downloading data from the BAR:
nvram:startup-config Copies the current startup configuration file of the BAR.
nvram:error-log Copies the error log stored on the BAR.
nvram:msglog Copies the contents of the BAR message log.
nvram:traplog Copies the current BAR trap log contents.
<destination-location>
The <destination-location> value is a local TFTP or Xmodem URL or a memory
location in the BAR. The values of the <destination-location> parameter vary
depending on the type of copy operation.
If you will be uploading a file to the BAR:
i If uploading a previously saved configuration file or a firmware image to the
BAR, the destination-location value is one of the following locations:
nvram:startup-config Upload the file at the URL to replace the BAR startup configuration file.
system:image Copy the file to the BAR’s system code image.
i If uploading SSH key files to the BAR, the following locations may also be
specified:
nvram:sshkey-rsa Copy the file to the BAR’s RSA key.
nvram:sshkey-rsa2 Copy the file to the BAR’s RSA 2 key.
nvram:sshkey-dsa Upload the file to the BAR as a DSA key.
nvram:sslpem-root Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server root
certificate.
nvram:sslpem-server Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server certificate.
nvram:sslpem-dhweak Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server DH-weak
certificate.
nvram:sslpem-strong Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server DH-strong
certificate.
15-4
If you will be downloading a file from the BAR:

i If downloading a file from the BAR, the <destination-location> value is a
TFTP URL on the network that the BAR file will be copied to.
[yes]
Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting
15.1
Utility
Description The copy commands upload and download various log and configuration files to/from Commands
the BAR. Local URLs can be specified using TFTP or Xmodem. The command can
also be used to download the startup config or code image by specifying the source as a
URL and destination as a memory location in the BAR.
The system will notify you of the success or failure of the copy operation following the
transfer.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #copy nvram:startup-config tftp://172.16.1.187/BAR_Config
Mode........................................... TFTP
Set TFTP Server IP............................. 172.16.1.187
TFTP Path...................................... ./
TFTP Filename.................................. BAR_Config
Data Type...................................... Config File
Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y
TFTP config transfer starting
File transfer operation completed successfully.
(Pannaway BAR) #copy xmodem system:image
Mode........................................... XMODEM
Data Type...................................... Code
Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y

Ready to RECEIVE File tempcode.bin in binary mode
Send several Control-X characters to cancel before transfer starts.
CKCKCK
File transfer operation completed successfully.
logout
Summary End management session.
User-Entered None
Parameters
15-5
Description This command closes the current Telnet connection or resets the current serial
connection.
NOTE: Save any configuration changes before exiting the session. The system will
15.1
provide a prompt if any unsaved changes have been made during the session
being ended.
Utility “no” Form None

Commands
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #logout
The system has unsaved changes.

Would you like to save them now? (y/n) y
Connection to host lost.
traceroute <ipaddr> [port
Summary Send a traceroute command to a station from the BAR.
Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a host or interface on the network for
which you want to determine route hops.
[port]
The optional port parameter is the UDP port used as the destination of packets sent as
part of the traceroute. This port should be an unused port on the destination system, in
the range of 0 (zero) to 65,534, with a default of 33,434.
Description This command is used to discover the routes that packets actually take when traveling
to their destination through the network on a hop-by-hop basis.
“no” Form None
Defaults port = 33434
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #traceroute 172.16.1.4
Tracing route over a maximum of 20 hops
1 10.1.6.1 0 ms 0 ms 10 ms
2 172.17.3.1 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
3 172.16.1.4 0 ms 10 ms 0 ms
15-6
reload [yes]
Summary Perform a hard (power cycle) reset of the BAR.

User-Entered [yes] Utility
Parameters Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting Commands
Description This command resets the switch. The switch uses the stored configuration to initialize
the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed. A successful
reset is indicated by the LEDs on the switch.
CAUTION: A reset of the BAR will interrupt all active sessions AND all active
connections to the BAR’s network interfaces.
Only saved configurations are loaded after a reset. The system will prompt you to
save if there are unsaved changes in the BAR’s memory.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #reload
The system has unsaved changes.

Would you like to save them now? (y/n) y
Configuration Saved!
System will now restart!
ping <ipaddr>
Summary Send a PING to a station from the BAR.
Parameters The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a host or interface on the network.
Description This command checks if another host is on the network and listens for responses. To
use this command, configure the BAR for a network (in-band) connection. The source
and target devices must have the ping utility enabled and running on top of TCP/IP.
The switch can be pinged from any IP workstation with which the switch is connected
through the default VLAN (VLAN 1), as long as there is a physical path between the
switch and the workstation. The terminal interface sends three pings to the target
station.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
15-7
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #ping 172.16.1.187
Send count=3, Receive count=3 from 172.16.1.187
15.1 show logging

Utility
Commands
Summary Show the contents of the BAR trap log.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the trap log maintained by the switch.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show logging

Number of Traps Since Last Reset............... 5
Number of Traps Since Log Last Viewed.......... 5
Log System Up Time Trap

--- ------------------------ -------------------------------------------------
0 0 days 00:00:28 Cold Start: Unit: 0
1 0 days 00:00:23 Link Up: Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 11
2 0 days 00:00:22 Link Up: Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 12
3 0 days 00:00:21 Link Down: Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 12
Command Output The following information is shown in the trap log:
Number of Traps Since Last The number of traps that have occurred since the last reset of
Reset this device.
Number of Traps Since Log The number of traps that have occurred since the traps were
Last Viewed last displayed. Getting the traps by any method (terminal
interface display, Web display, upload file from switch etc.) will
result in this counter being cleared to 0.
Log The sequence number of this trap.
System Up Time The relative time since the last reboot of the switch at which
this trap occurred.
Trap A summary of the trap type and location.
Related Commands clear traplog [yes] on page 15-3
show memory utilization
Summary Show memory usage on the BAR.
15-8
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays used and available system memory on the BAR.
“no” Form
Defaults
None
None
15.1
Utility
Example Commands
(BAR) #show memory utilization
status bytes blocks avg block max block

------ ---------- --------- ----------- -----------
current
free 63886112 25 2555444 63854696
alloc 36882312 12995 2838 -
Output The following output is displayed for free memory and allocated memory:
Bytes The number of free or allocated bytes.
Blocks The number of free or allocated memory blocks.
Avg Block The average free or allocated memory block size
Max Block The maximum free or allocated memory block size
show processes cpu
Summary Show CPU utilization of the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the percentage of CPU processing used during the past 5
second, 1 minute, and five minute intervals.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(BAR) #show processes cpu

Total CPU Utilization:
Switch CPU 5 sec 1 min 5 min

-------------------------------------------------
1 1 0% 2% 2%
15-9
show running-config
Summary Display the settings of the BAR.
Utility User-Entered None

Commands Parameters
Description This command is used to display the current setting of different protocol packages
supported on switch. This command displays only those parameters with values that
differ from their default. The output is displayed in the script format, which can be used
to configure another switch with same configuration.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show running-config
!Current Configuration:
!
remotecon timeout 60
network protocol dhcp
vlan database
exit
configure
!System Description "Pannaway BAR"
!System version 1.0.3
!
exit
...
ip http secure-port 443
no ip ssh
Command Output Varies with configuration settings of switch.
Related Commands copy <source-location> <destination-location> [yes] on page 15-3
show sysinfo
Summary Display BAR information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays switch information.
“no” Form None
15-10
Defaults None
Example
15.1
(Pannaway BAR) #show sysinfo
System Description............................. Pannaway BAR

System Name....................................
System Location................................ Utility
System Contact................................. Commands
System Object ID............................... pannawaybar
System Up Time................................. 46 days 22 hrs 2 mins 28 secs
MIBs Supported:
RFC 2819 - RMON-MIB Remote Network Monitoring Management

Information Base
IEEE8021-PAE-MIB Port Access Entity module for managing IEEE
802.1X.
FASTPATH-RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB LVL7 FastPath Radius MIB
RADIUS-ACC-CLIENT-MIB RADIUS Accounting Client MIB
RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB
RFC 1724 - RIPv2-MIB RIP Version 2 MIB Extension
RFC 1850 - OSPF-MIB OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base
RFC 2787 - VRRP-MIB Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual
Router Redundancy Protocol
FASTPATH-ROUTING-MIB FASTPATH Routing - Layer 3
FASTPATH-QOS-MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS Support
FASTPATH-QOS-ACL-MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS ACL
RFC 3289 - DIFFSERV-MIB Management Information Base for the
Differentiated Services Architecture
FASTPATH-QOS-DIFFSERV-EXTENSIONS- FASTPATH Flex QOS DiffServ Private MIBs’
MIB definitions
FASTPATH-QOS-DIFFSERV-PRIVATE-MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS DiffServ Private MIBs’
definitions
RFC 2932 - IPMROUTE-MIB IPv4 Multicast Routing MIB
RFC 2933 - IGMP-MIB Internet Group Management Protocol MIB
RFC 2934 - PIM-MIB Protocol Independent Multicast MIB for IPv4
DVMRP-MIB Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol MIB
IANA-RTPROTO-MIB IANA IP Route Protocol and IP MRoute Protocol
Textual Conventions
FASTPATH-MULTICAST-MIB FASTPATH Flex Multicast Routing Private MIB
System Description Factory-set descriptor of the Pannaway switch model.
System Name Custom name used to identify the switch. The factory default is blank.
System Location Text used to identify the location of the switch. May be up to 31 alpha-
numeric characters. The factory default is blank.
System Contact Text used to identify a contact person for this switch. May be up to 31
alpha-numeric characters. The factory default is blank.
System ObjectID The base object ID for the switch’s enterprise MIB.
System Up Time The time in days, hours and minutes since the last switch reboot.
MIBs Supported A list of MIBs supported by this agent.
Related Commands snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>} on page 15-1
15-11
show eventlog
Summary Display the contents of the event log.
Utility User-Entered None

Commands Parameters
Description This command displays the event log, which contains error messages from the system.
The event log is not cleared on a system reset.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show eventlog

File Line TaskID Code d h m s
EVENT> bootos.c 333 03FFFE00 AAAAAAAA 0 0 0 1
File The file in which the event originated.
Line The line number of the event.
Task Id The task ID of the event.
Code The event code.
Time The time this event occurred.
show msglog
Summary Display the contents of the system message log.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays the message log maintained by the switch. The message log
contains system trace information. The message log contains a maximum of 256 entries
that wrap.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
15-12
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show msglog

2 days 22:31:48 File: dhcp_support.c : Line: 309 : dhcp_bind(): networkPort
dhcpstate failed
2 days 22:28:54 File: dhcp_support.c : Line: 309 : dhcp_bind(): networkPort
dhcpstate failed 15.1
Command Output: The information presented in the event log is an unformatted series of stored messages.
Utility
Commands
show hardware
Summary Show the interfaces and inventory of the BAR.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description This command displays inventory information for the BAR.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #show hardware
Vendor..........................................Pannaway Technologies
System Description............................. Pannaway BAR
Product Type....................................BAR
Serial Number.................................. 4024310077a20
CLEI code......................................
Part Number.....................................BAR-GE12
HW Version......................................rev 0A
Manufacturer....................................0xbc
Burned In MAC Address...........................00:0A:9F:50:00:78
Firmware Version............................... 1.1.0
Boot code Version...............................1.2.31
Command Output: The following information is shown on the show hardware screen:
Vendor Pannaway Technologies.
System Description Factory-set descriptor of the Pannaway switch model.
Product Type Specifies the product family.
Serial Number The unique serial number for this switch.
CLEI code Common Language Equipment Identifier code for the BAR.
Part Number Manufacturing part number.
HW Version Hardware version level of the device.
Manufacturer Manufacturer descriptor field.
15-13
Burned in MAC Address Universally assigned network address.
Firmware Version The release.version.revision number of the code currently running

on the switch.
15.2 Boot code Version The version number of the boot code currently running on the
switch.
System Clock
Commands 15.2 System Clock Commands
The following commands allow you to set and view the system clock at the BAR,
including the Daylight Savings setting. The time can be set manually, or can be set
automatically via the Network Time Protocol (NTP).
Manual System Use the following command to set the BAR’s system clock manually.
Clock Setting
NOTE: When the BAR is manually set, it displays its system clock in Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (CUT) unless a time zone is set.
clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second>
Summary Set the system date and time.
User-Entered <Year>
Parameters The four-digit date indicating the current year.
NOTE: All parameters supplied for the system clock setting must be separated from
one another with colons (:) in order to be accepted by the BAR.
<Month>
The two-digit number (01 to 12) of the current calendar month.
<Day>
The two-digit number (01 to 31) of the day of the specified month.
<Hour>
The two-digit hour, in 24-hour format (00 to 24) indicating the present hour.
<Minute>
A two-digit number (from 00 to 59) representing the current minute.
<Second>
A two-digit number (from 00 to 59) representing the current second.
Description This command changes the BAR clock setting to the specified value.
“no” Form None
Defaults None
15-14
Example
(Pannaway BAR) #clock set 2004:07:04:18:38:00
Related Commands clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>
on page 15-19
clock daylight-savings enable on page 15-20
15.2
show clock on page 15-20 System Clock
Commands
Automatic System Use the following command to set the BAR’s system time automatically via a Simple
Clock Setting Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server. The following commands allow you to
configure SNTP servers, as well as the client operation of the BAR with respect to the
server.
NOTE: When the BAR is set to NTP, it displays its system clock in Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (CUT) unless a time zone is set.
sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast>
Summary Enables SNTP client on the BAR in unicast or broadcast mode.
User-Entered <broadcast | unicast>

Parameters The operating mode of the SNTP client:
• If set to unicast, the BAR must be configured with an SNTP server address to
which it will send poll messages to retrieve its system time settings.
• If set to broadcast, the BAR listens for broadcast SNTP messages at a given
interval, and then resets its clock accordingly.
Description Sets the operational mode of the system’s SNTP client with respect to an SNTP server.
NTP is a protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with
reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. Once the clock is set,
the BAR – acting as the SNTP Client – will re-synchronize its clock with the server in
either unicast mode (active polling) or broadcast mode (passive update).
i If the client mode is set to unicast, you must also specify the SNTP servers that
the BAR will poll to retrieve its system clock settings. You can optionally set the
poll interval, number of retries, and poll timeout for the unicast SNTP client on
the BAR.
i If the client mode is set to broadcast and there is an SNTP broadcast server on
the network, no other configuration is required for the BAR to retrieve system
clock settings. You can optionally change the interval at which the BAR listens
for broadcast updates.
“no” Form no sntp client mode

Stops the NTP client function of the BAR. The BAR’s built-in system clock will remain
set to the last known NTP time setting until it is either manually reset, or SNTP is
re-enabled.
Defaults SNTP client disabled.
15-15
Example .
(BAR) (Config)#sntp client mode unicast
15.2 Related Commands sntp broadcast client poll-interval <6-10> on page 15-16
sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10> on page 15-17
sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17
System Clock sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18
Commands sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value} on page 15-18
show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21
sntp client port <port_value>
Summary Sets the TCP/UDP port on which the SNTP client will listen for SNTP broadcasts, and
transmit SNTP unicast requests.
User-Entered <port_value>
Parameters The Transmit and Receive TCP/UDP port value, in the range of 1-65,535.
Description Sets the operational mode of the system’s SNTP client with respect to an SNTP server.
NTP is a protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with
reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. Once the clock is set,
the BAR – acting as the SNTP Client – will re-synchronize its clock with the server in
either unicast mode (active polling) or broadcast mode (passive update).
“no” Form no sntp client port

Restores the default SNTP TCP/UDP port value of 123.
Defaults 123 (the well-known port for NTP)
Example .
(BAR) (Config)#sntp client port 10500
Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15
sntp broadcast client poll-interval <6-10>
Summary When the SNTP client is in broadcast mode, sets the interval at which the client wakes
to listen for broadcast packets.
User-Entered <6-10>
Parameters The interval value setting expressed as a power of 2 in the range of 26 to 210 (an actual
interval of 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 seconds).
Description Sets the interval at which the SNTP client (in broadcast mode) listens for broadcast
packets and updates its system clock accordingly.
15-16
“no” Form no sntp broadcast client poll-interval

Restores the default broadcast poll-interval setting of 6.
Defaults 6 (64 seconds)
Example .
(BAR) (Config)#sntp broadcast client poll-interval 8

15.2
System Clock
Commands
sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10>
Summary When the SNTP client is in unicast mode, sets the interval at which the client transmits
a unicast poll to the SNTP server.
User-Entered <6-10>
Description Sets the interval at which the SNTP client (in broadcast mode) transmits a unicast poll
to the specified SNTP server(s) and updates its system clock accordingly.
“no” Form no sntp unicast client poll-interval

Restores the default unicast poll-interval setting of 6.
Defaults 6 (64 seconds)
Example .
(BAR) (Config)#sntp unicast client poll-interval 10

sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18
sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value} on page 15-18
sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10>
Summary When the SNTP client is in unicast mode, sets the number of poll retries which the
client will use before switching to another server (or waiting until the next poll interval).
User-Entered <6-10>
15-17
Description Sets the number of server retries that the SNTP client uses after the first failed poll. If
all retries expire, the SNTP client attempts the second or third server in order. If there is
no response after all servers and retry attempts have been exhausted, the BAR
maintains its current clock setting until the next successful SNTP client poll attempt.
15.2 “no” Form no sntp unicast client poll-retry

Restores the default unicast poll-retry setting of 1.
System Clock
Commands Defaults 1 retry
Example .

sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30>
Summary When the SNTP client is in unicast mode, sets the response timeout value at which a
poll is considered unsuccessful and a retry poll is sent (or polling expires).
User-Entered <1-30>
Parameters The timeout value, ranging from 1-30 seconds.
Description Sets the duration of the response timeout after which the SNTP client sends another
poll (if more retries are configured) or halts polling the current SNTP server until the
next interval.
“no” Form no sntp unicast client poll-timeout

Restores the default unicast poll-timeout setting of 5 seconds.
Defaults 5 seconds
Example .

sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value}
Summary Configures the SNTP server to which the SNTP client sends an SNTP request (when in
Unicast mode).
15-18
User-Entered <ip_address>
Parameters The IP address of a known time server.
{priority value}
15.2
The optional server priority in a range of 1-3 (up to the total number of SNTP servers).
Description
Identifies an SNTP time server to which the BAR can send SNTP requests to update its
system clock settings. Up to three time servers can be configured for the BAR. If a poll System Clock
cycle to the primary server fails (all poll retries have been exhausted), the optional Commands
second and third servers are polled.
If no priority server is defined, all servers are considered equal in priority and after a
failed poll cycle, the next server is polled in the order that it was added to the
configuration. If an optional priority order is defined, servers are polled in the given
priority order.
“no” Form no sntp server <ip_address>

Deletes the specified SNTP server.
Defaults None
Example .
(BAR) (Config)#sntp server 192.43.244.18 2

Timezone and The following commands apply to the system clock setting, whether it is manually set or
Daylight Savings retrieved via NTP:
clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>
Summary Sets the system’s time zone, based upon official United States time.
User-Entered <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>

Parameters The US time zone to be set at the BAR.
Description Set the system’s time zone setting. Any clock setting of UCT (coordinated universal
time or GMT) retrieved via an NTP server is converted to the local time zone setting.
Note also that the clock time zone must be set before enabling daylight savings via the
“clock daylight-savings enable” command described below.
Defaults No time zone set.
Example .
(BAR) (Config)# clock timezone eastern
15-19
Related Commands clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second> on page 15-14

sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15
show clock on page 15-20
15.2 clock daylight-savings enable

System Clock
Commands Summary Activates daylight savings time for the system clock.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description Set the system clock to automatically adjust itself for daylight savings, based on the
current system clock setting. Note also that the clock time zone must be set before
enabling daylight savings via the “clock timezone” command described above.
Defaults Daylight savings time disabled.
“no” Form no clock daylight-savings enable

Restores the default setting of daylight savings mode disabled.
Example .
(BAR) (Config)# clock daylight-savings enable

on page 15-19
show clock on page 15-20
Clock and SNTP The following commands display system clock information and SNTP server
Display Commands information.
show clock
Summary Display the current time settings information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description Displays the system’s real time clock setting. It also displays the clock time zone setting
and configured daylight savings setting, as well as the time of the last administrative or
NTP server update.
NOTE: When the BAR is set to NTP, it displays its system clock in Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (CUT) unless a time zone is set.
15-20
Example .
(BAR) #show clock
Local Time: MON NOV 21 22:00:45 2005

Timezone: Eastern Standard Time
DST rule: United States daylight-savings time
DST will start Apr 2, 2006
15.2
System Clock
Time set at last startup on MON NOV 21 21:58:58 2005
Commands
Command Output The system clock setting in Day, Month, Date, MM:HH:SS Year format, along with
Timezone information, Daylight Savings Time usage, and the last time that the system
clock was last started.

on page 15-19
show sntp [client | server ]
Summary Displays SNTP information, including detailed SNTP server and client information.
User-Entered None
Parameters
Description Displays information about the latest SNTP server updates, as well as optional SNTP
server and client information.
Example .
(BAR) #show sntp
Last Update Time: OCT 27 12:57:27 2005

Last Unicast Attempt Time: OCT 27 12:57:27 2005
Last Attempt Status: Success
Broadcast Count: 0
(BAR) #show sntp client
Client Supported Modes: unicast broadcast

SNTP Version: 4
Port: 123
Client Mode: unicast
Unicast Poll Interval: 6
Poll Timeout (seconds): 15
Poll Retry: 2
15-21
(BAR) #show sntp server
Server IP Address: 129.6.15.28

Server Type: ipv4
15.2 Server
Server
Server
Server
Stratum:
Reference Id:
Mode:
Maximum Entries:
1
NTP Ref: ACTS
Server
3
System Clock
Server Current Entries: 2
Commands
SNTP Servers
------------
IP Address: 129.6.15.28
Address Type: IPV4
Priority: 1
Version: 4
Port: 123
Last Update Time: OCT 27 12:58:32 2005
Last Attempt Time: OCT 27 12:58:32 2005
Last Update Status: Success
Total Unicast Requests: 58
Failed Unicast Requests: 0
IP Address: 192.43.244.18
Address Type: IPV4
Priority: 1
Version: 4
Port: 123
Last Attempt Time: JAN 01 00:00:00 1970
Last Update Status: Other
Total Unicast Requests: 0
Failed Unicast Requests: 0
Command Output If the command is executed without the optional client or server commands, the
following output is displayed:
Last Update Time Time of last clock update.
Last Attempt Time Time of last transmit query (in unicast mode).
Last Attempt Status Status of the last SNTP request (in unicast mode) or unsolicited
message (in broadcast mode).
Broadcast Count Current number of unsolicited broadcast messages that have been
received and processed by the SNTP client since last reboot..
15-22
If the optional Client parameter is specified, the following information is displayed.
Client Supported Modes Supported client modes: unicast or broadcast.
15.2
SNTP Version The highest SNTP version the client supports.
Port SNTP Client Port (TCP/UDP port).
Client Mode Currently configured SNTP client mode. System Clock

Unicast Poll Interval Poll interval value for SNTP clients in seconds as a power of two. Commands
For an example, 6 indicates 62 or 36 seconds.
Poll Timeout (seconds) Poll timeout value in seconds for SNTP clients.
Poll Retry Poll retry value (attempts) for SNTP clients.
If the optional Server parameter is specified, the following information is displayed.
Server IP Address IP address of the currently active SNTP server.
Server Type Address type of the server.
Server Stratum Claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.
Server Reference ID Reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid
packet.
Server Mode SNTP Server mode.
Server Max Entries Total number of SNTP Servers allowed.
Server Current Entries Total number of SNTP configured.
For each configured server
IP Address IP Address of configured SNTP Server.
Address Type Address Type of configured SNTP server.
Priority IP priority type of the configured server.
Version SNTP Version number of the server. The protocol version used to
query the server in Unicast mode.
Port Server port number (TCP/UDP port).
Last Update Time Last server attempt time for the specified server.
Last Update Status Last server attempt status for the server.
Total Unicast Requests Number of requests to the server.
Failed Unicast Requests Number of failed requests from server.

15-23
15.2
System Clock
Commands
15-24
Appendix A
List of CLI Commands
This Appendix provides an alphabetical list of all the CLI commands provided in this
document. It may be used as a quick reference for locating commands, or as a very brief
reminder of the format and parameters of the several commands available on the
BAR CLI.
telnet <ip_address>: 11-6
1583compatibility: 7-1
access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | <srcip> <srcmask>}: 14-1
access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <protocolnumber>} <srcip> <src-
mask> [eq {<srcl4portnumber> | <srcportkey>}] <dstip> <dstmask> [eq {<dstl4portnumber> | <dstportkey>}] [prece-
dence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>]: 14-2
addport <logical slot/port>: 4-5
area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt}: 7-2
area <areaid> default-cost <cost>: 7-2
area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate [<metric>] {comparable | non-comparable}: 7-3
area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute: 7-4
area <areaid> nssa no-summary: 7-4
area <areaid> nssa translator-role {always | candidate}: 7-5
area <areaid> nssa translator-stab-intv <stabilityinterval>: 7-6
area <areaid> nssa: 7-3
area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask> {summarylink | nssaexternallink} [advertise | not-advertise]: 7-6
area <areaid> stub summarylsa: 7-7
area <areaid> stub: 7-7
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication {none | simple <key> | encrypt <key> <keyid>}: 7-8
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval>: 7-9
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval>: 7-10
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval>: 7-10
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay>: 7-11
area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor>: 7-8
arp <ipaddress> <macaddr>: 5-9
arp cachesize <entries>: 5-10
arp dynamicrenew: 5-10
arp purge <ipaddr>: 5-11
arp resptime <resp-timeout>: 5-11
arp retries <retries>: 5-12
arp timeout <seconds>: 5-12
auto-negotiate all: 3-2
auto-negotiate: 3-1
auto-summary: 6-1
bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode: 5-16
bootpdhcprelay disable: 5-16
bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <hops>: 5-17
bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <min-wait>: 5-17

bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number> <ipaddress>: 5-18
bridge aging-time <age-time> [<fdbid> | all]: 3-5
classofservice dot1pmapping <userpriority> <trafficclass>: 4-28
clear arp-cache [gateway]: 5-13
clear config [yes]: 15-2
clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes]: 15-2
clear igmpsnooping [yes]: 4-27
clear ip dhcp binding <address | *>: 10-12
clear ip dhcp server statistics: 10-13
clear pass [yes]: 11-8
clear port-channel [yes]: 4-7
clear traplog [yes]: 15-3
clear vlan [yes]: 4-15
client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>: 10-3
client-name <name>: 10-4
clock daylight-savings enable: 15-20
clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second>: 15-14
clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>: 15-19
copy <source-location> <destination-location> [yes]: 15-3
default-information originate [always] [metric <value>] [metric-type {1 | 2}]: 7-12
default-information originate: 6-2
default-metric <metric>: 6-2
default-metric <value>: 7-12
default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]: 10-4
delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-6
deleteport <logical slot/port>: 4-5
deleteport all: 4-6
disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace: 9-16
disconnect {<sessionID> | all}: 11-6
distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2} <preference-value>: 7-13
distance rip <distance>: 6-3
distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected}: 6-3
distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected}: 7-15
dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]: 10-5
enable: 6-4
enable: 7-13
encapsulation [ethernet | snap]: 5-2
exit-overflow-interval <o-interval>: 7-14
external-lsdb-limit <l-limit>: 7-14
hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type]: 10-5
host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]: 10-6
hostroutesaccept: 6-4
ip access-group <accesslistnumber> {in | out}: 14-3
ip access-group all <accesslistnumber> in: 14-4
ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask>: 5-1
ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]: 10-2
ip dhcp ping packets <packet-count>: 10-2
ip dhcp pool <name>: 10-3
ip dvmrp metric <metric>: 9-7
ip dvmrp trapflags: 9-3
ip dvmrp: 9-2
ip dvmrp: 9-8
ip http secure-port <portid>: 12-1
ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1]: 12-2
A-2
ip http secure-server: 12-2

ip http server: 12-3
ip igmp last-member-query-count <count>: 9-8
ip igmp last-member-query-interval <lmqinterval>: 9-9
ip igmp query-interval <query-interval>: 9-9
ip igmp query-max-response-time <max-time>: 9-10
ip igmp robustness <robustness>: 9-10
ip igmp startup-query-count <count>: 9-11
ip igmp startup-query-interval <interval>: 9-11
ip igmp version <version>: 9-12
ip igmp: 9-1
ip irdp address <ipaddress>: 5-3
ip irdp holdtime <time>: 5-5
ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval>: 5-4
ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval>: 5-4
ip irdp preference <irdp-preference>: 5-5
ip irdp: 5-3
ip mcast boundary <groupipaddr> <mask>: 9-12
ip multicast staticroute <sourceipaddr> <mask> <rpfipaddr> <metric> <slot/port>: 9-3
ip multicast ttl-threshold <ttlvalue>: 9-13
ip multicast: 9-2
ip netdirbcast: 5-6
ip ospf areaid <areaid>: 7-17
ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}: 7-18
ip ospf cost <cost>: 7-18
ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval>: 7-19
ip ospf hello interval <h-interval>: 7-19
ip ospf priority <priority>: 7-20
ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval>: 7-21
ip ospf transmit-delay <delay>: 7-21
ip ospf: 7-17
ip pimdm mode <slot/port>: 9-13
ip pimdm query-interval <dmq-interval>: 9-14
ip pimdm: 9-4
ip pimsm cbsrpreference <preference>: 9-14
ip pimsm datathreshrate <d-threshold>: 9-5
ip pimsm message-interval <msg-interval>: 9-5
ip pimsm mode: 9-15
ip pimsm query-interval <smq-interval>: 9-15
ip pimsm spt-threshold <spath-threshold>: 9-6
ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask>: 9-7
ip pimsm: 9-4
ip pim-trapflags: 9-6
ip rip authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}: 6-7
ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none}: 6-8
ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none}: 6-8
ip rip: 6-6
ip ssh protocol [1] [2]: 12-5
ip ssh: 12-4
ip vrrp <vrID> authentication {none | simple <key>}: 8-3
ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr>: 8-2
ip vrrp <vrID> mode: 8-5
ip vrrp <vrID> preempt: 8-3
ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value>: 8-4
ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise <adv-interval>: 8-4
A-3
ip vrrp <vrID>: 8-2

ip vrrp: 8-1
lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]]: 10-6
logout: 15-5
macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-16
macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-16
macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-17
macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-18
macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-18
monitor session mode: 4-31
monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port>: 4-30
mrinfo <ipaddr>: 9-16
mstat <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]: 9-17
mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]: 9-17
mtu <mtu-size>: 3-6
network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]: 10-7
network javamode: 11-8
network mac-address <macaddr>: 3-7
network mac-type {local | burnedin}: 3-6
network mgmt_vlan <vlanid>: 4-7
network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>]: 3-8
network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes]: 3-7
pagination displaymode: 11-5
ping <ipaddr>: 15-7
port lacpmode all: 4-20
port lacpmode: 4-19
port-channel <name>: 4-2
port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-3
port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-4
port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name>: 4-3
port-channel staticcapability: 4-1
protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>: 4-22
protocol vlan group <groupid> : 4-23
protocol vlan group all <groupid>: 4-23
redistribute {bgp | static | connected} [metric <metricvalue>]: 6-5
redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric <metrictype>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag <tagvalue>]
[subnets]: 7-15
redistribute ospf [metric <metricvalue>] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external-
2]]: 6-5
reload [yes]: 15-7
remotecon maxsessions <sessions>: 11-1
remotecon timeout <timeout>: 11-2
router-id <router_id>: 7-16
routing: 5-2
serial baudrate {baud}: 11-2
serial timeout <timeout>: 11-3
service dhcp: 10-1
session-limit <0-5>: 11-3
session-timeout <0-160>: 11-4
set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval>: 4-26
set igmp interfacemode all: 4-25
set igmp maxresponse <response-interval>: 4-25
set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time>: 4-26
set igmp: 4-24
set prompt <prompt string>: 11-4
A-4
show arp : 5-13

show arp brief: 5-15
show arp switch: 3-30
show bootpdhcprelay: 5-18
show classofservice dot1pmapping <slot/port>: 4-29
show clock: 15-20
show eventlog: 15-12
show forwardingdb agetime [fdbid | all] : 3-40
show hardware: 15-13
show igmpsnooping: 4-31
show interface {<slot/port> | switchport}: 3-31
show interface ethernet {<slot/port> | switchport}: 3-32
show ip access-lists <accesslistnumber>: 14-4
show ip dhcp binding [<address>]: 10-8
show ip dhcp global configuration: 10-8
show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *}: 10-9
show ip dhcp server statistics: 10-11
show ip dvmrp interface <slot/port>: 9-19
show ip dvmrp neighbor: 9-20
show ip dvmrp nexthop: 9-21
show ip dvmrp prune: 9-22
show ip dvmrp route: 9-22
show ip dvmrp: 9-18
show ip http: 12-3
show ip igmp groups <slot/port> [detail]: 9-23
show ip igmp interface <slot/port>: 9-25
show ip igmp interface membership <multiipaddr>: 9-26
show ip igmp interface stats <slot/port>: 9-26
show ip igmp: 9-24
show ip interface <slot/port>: 5-6
show ip interface brief: 5-8
show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all]: 5-8
show ip mcast boundary {<slot/port> | all}: 9-28
show ip mcast interface <slot/port>: 9-28
show ip mcast mroute {detail | summary}: 9-29
show ip mcast mroute group <groupipaddr> {detail | summary}: 9-30
show ip mcast mroute source <sourceipaddr> [<groupipaddr>] {detail | summary}: 9-32
show ip mcast mroute static [<sourceipaddr>]: 9-33
show ip mcast: 9-27
show ip ospf area <areaid>: 7-24
show ip ospf database: 7-26
show ip ospf interface <slot/port>: 7-31
show ip ospf interface brief: 7-33
show ip ospf interface stats <slot/port>: 7-34
show ip ospf neighbor [<ipaddr>] <slot/port>: 7-35
show ip ospf neighbor brief {<slot/port> | all}: 7-37
show ip ospf range <areaid>: 7-27
show ip ospf stub table: 7-28
show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor>: 7-28
show ip ospf virtual-link brief: 7-30
show ip ospf: 7-22
show ip pimdm interface <slot/port>: 9-34
show ip pimdm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}: 9-35
show ip pimdm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}: 9-36
show ip pimdm: 9-34
A-5
show ip pimsm candrptable: 9-37

show ip pimsm componenttable: 9-38
show ip pimsm interface <slot/port>: 9-38
show ip pimsm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}: 9-39
show ip pimsm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}: 9-39
show ip pimsm rp {<groupaddress> <groupmask> | candidate | all}: 9-40
show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress>: 9-41
show ip pimsm staticrp: 9-41
show ip pimsm: 9-36
show ip rip interface <slot/port>: 6-11
show ip rip interface brief: 6-10
show ip rip: 6-9
show ip ssh: 12-5
show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID>: 8-6
show ip vrrp interface brief: 8-7
show ip vrrp interface stats <slot/port> <vrID>: 8-8
show ip vrrp: 8-5
show logging: 15-8
show loginsession: 11-10
show mac-address-table igmpsnooping: 4-32
show mac-address-table multicast [<macaddr> | all]: 4-33
show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all}: 4-34
show mac-address-table staticfiltering: 4-34
show mac-address-table stats: 4-35
show mac-addr-table [<macaddr> | all]: 3-39
show memory utilization: 15-8
show monitor: 4-36
show mrinfo: 9-42
show msglog: 15-12
show mstat: 9-42
show mtrace: 9-43
show network: 3-10
show port {<slot/port> | all}: 4-36
show port protocol {<groupid> | all}: 4-38
show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-39
show port-channel brief: 4-40
show processes cpu: 15-9
show remotecon: 11-9
show running-config: 15-10
show serial: 11-10
show snmpcommunity: 13-12
show snmptrap: 13-13
show sntp [client | server ]: 15-21
show spanning-tree [brief]: 3-21
show spanning-tree interface <slot/port>: 3-23
show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid>: 3-24
show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port>: 3-25
show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/port> | all}: 3-27
show spanning-tree mst summary: 3-28
show spanning-tree summary: 3-29
show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid>: 3-30
show storm-control: 3-11
show sysinfo: 15-10
show trapflags: 13-14
show users: 11-11
A-6
show vlan <vlanid>: 4-41

show vlan brief: 4-42
show vlan port {<slot/port> | all}: 4-43
shutdown all: 3-4
shutdown: 3-4
snmp trap link-status all: 13-10
snmp trap link-status: 13-9
snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>}: 15-1
snmp-server community <name>: 13-1
snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>: 13-2
snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>: 13-3
snmp-server community mode <name>: 13-3
snmp-server community ro <name>: 13-4
snmp-server community rw <name>: 13-5
snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm: 13-6
snmp-server enable traps linkmode: 13-6
snmp-server enable traps multiusers: 13-7
snmp-server enable traps stpmode: 13-7
snmp-server enable traps: 13-5
snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>: 13-8
snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew>: 13-8
snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>: 13-9
sntp broadcast client poll-interval <6-10>: 15-16
sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast>: 15-15
sntp client port <port_value>: 15-16
sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value}: 15-18
sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10>: 15-17
sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10>: 15-17
sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30>: 15-18
spanning-tree {<logical slot/port> | all} {off | 802.1d | fast}: 3-12
spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port> | all}: 3-13
spanning-tree configuration name <name>: 3-13
spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level>: 3-14
spanning-tree edgeport: 3-14
spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>: 3-15
spanning-tree forward-time <f-time>: 3-15
spanning-tree hello-time <h-time>: 3-16
spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age>: 3-16
spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto} : 3-17
spanning-tree mst <mstid> port-priority <priority-value>: 3-18
spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>: 3-18
spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority>: 3-19
spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>: 3-19
spanning-tree port mode all: 3-20
spanning-tree port mode: 3-20
spanning-tree: 3-12
speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} : 3-2
speed all <portspeed>: 3-3
split-horizon {none | simple | poison}: 6-6
storm-control broadcast: 3-9
storm-control flowcontrol: 3-9
traceroute <ipaddr> [port’: 15-6
transport {output | input} telnet: 11-5
trapflags: 7-16
users name <username>: 11-7
A-7
users passwd <username>: 11-7

users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite}: 13-10
users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha}: 13-11
users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]}: 13-11
vlan <vlanid>: 4-8
vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all}: 4-8
vlan ingressfilter: 4-9
vlan name <vlanid> <name>: 4-9
vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid>: 4-10
vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid>: 4-11
vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all}: 4-11
vlan port ingressfilter all: 4-12
vlan port priority all <priority>: 4-28
vlan port pvid all <vlanid>: 4-13
vlan port tagging all <vlanid>: 4-13
vlan priority <priority>: 4-29
vlan protocol group <groupname>: 4-20
vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>: 4-21
vlan protocol group remove <groupid>: 4-21
vlan pvid <vlanid>: 4-14
vlan tagging <vlanid>: 4-14
A-8
Index
Page numbers in this index that are presented in boldface type indicate references to CLI commands in the text.
heading format 10
A disconnecting sessions 6
Address pools error messages 7
DHCP 3 local connection 2
Addressing modes 4–7
auto-configuration 7 mode structure 4
MAC address 6 privileged exec, enabling 6
Arguments prompt suffixes 6
see CLI, parameters starting mode 2
ARP modes, changing 6
in protocol-based VLANs 21 modes, exiting 7
Auto-completion 8 parameters 3, 10
passwords, setting 7
prompt, customizing 4
B user accounts, creating 7
values 3
Baud rate 2, 3, 4
Clock 14
BGP, CLI configuration mode 5
Color-coding, use of to identify CLI commands 10
BootP 7
Commands - see CLI
Braces, meaning in command descriptions 10
Community - see SNMP
Brackets, meaning in command descriptions 10
Configuration, reloading 7
Bridge - see Switching
Configuration, reset to default 2
Broadcast storms 9
Console
BWprovisioning
session timeout 2
see CLI modes
settings 2
Console port 1
baud rate 2, 3, 4
C timeout 3
Cautions 4 Contact information, assigning to BAR 1
CBSR - see Multicast, PIM-SM
Class map - see CLI modes
Clearing configuration 2 D
CLI
Date 14
auto-completion of commands 8
daylight savings time 20
command format 10
Default routers, in DHCP service 4
commands 3
Default, restoring BAR to default configuration 2
"no" variants 3
DHCP 7
address pools I
creating 3 Idle timeout 3
excluding 2 IGMP - see Multicast
Index address pools, assigning addresses 7

bindings, clearing 12
client identifiers, specifying 3
Image file, copying 3
In-band management 2
Interface config - see CLI modes
client names, setting 4 Interfaces, identifying 9
default routers, configuring 4 Interfaces, slot and port identification of 9
DNS servers, specifying 5 IP (in protocol-based VLANs) 21
host address binding 6 IPX (in protocol-based VLANs) 21
lease duration 6
service, enabling 1
verification PING settings 2 K
DHCP Pool Configuration Mode 5
Keys, terminal key bindings 8
DNS, specifying for DHCP service 5
Downloading 3
DVMRP - see Multicast
L
LACP - see VLAN
E LAGs - see VLAN, port-channels
Line config - see CLI modes
Enable password 6
Link trap notification
Error messages 7
port-channels 4
Ethernet, auto-negotiation 1
Local management 2
Location, custom, assigning to BAR 1
Logging out 7, 5
F Logs
File transfer, copying 3 clearing 3
Full-duplex (Ethernet port setting) 2 displaying 8
G M
Gigabit Ethernet MAC address
auto-negotiation 1 filtering, see VLAN
see also ports, Ethernet modifying 6
Global Config Manuals, related documents 3
see CLI modes MTU, setting length 6
Multicast
boundaries, specifying 12
H DVMRP
Half-duplex (Ethernet port setting) 2 activating 8
Help metric, setting 7
showing key bindings 8 mode, activating 2
system help capabilities 8 forwarding mode, activating 2
Technical Support 5 IGMP
activating 1
host query interval 9
last member query count 8
last member query interval 9
response time (maximum) 10
robustness metric, setting for an
interface 10
Index-2
startup queries, specifying for an auto-negotiate 1

interface 11 port speed 2
version, specifying 12 MAC address, modifying 6
join 5 shutting down 4
PIM-DM
activating 4
enabling 13
Ports, identifying in CLI commands 9
PPPoE (in protocol-based VLANs) 21
Private (SNMP access mode) - see Read-write
Index
query interval 14 Privileged Exec - see CLI modes
PIM-SM Prompt
activating 4 identifying modes 6
CBSR preference, setting 14 see also CLI
data threshold rate, setting 5 Protocol-based VLAN - see VLAN
enabling 15 Protocols, adding to protocol groups 21
join/prune interval, setting 5 Public (SNMP access mode) - see Read only
query interval, setting 15
rendezvous point, defining 7
shortest path threshold, setting 6 R
prune 5
Read-only (SNMP community setting) 4
reverse path forwarding routes, creating 3
Read-write (SNMP community setting) 5
TTL threshold, setting for an interface 13
Remote management 2
Reset
system 7
N terminal session 7
Name, assigning to BAR 1 RIP (CLI configuration mode) 5
No form commands 3 Router Config - see CLI modes
Notes 4 Router Config BGP Mode 5
NSSA - see Routing, OSPF Routing
OSPF
1583, configuring compatibility 1
O activating 13
areas, assigning interfaces to 17
OSPF
authentication 18
CLI configuration mode 5
authentication types 2
see also Routing, OSPF
authentication, for virtual links 8
compatibility 1
cost, assigning to interfaces 18
P dead interval timer configuration of 9
Parameters - see CLI, parameters dead interval, configuring 19
Passwords, clearing 8 default cost 2
Physical ports 9 default metric, configuring 12
PIM-DM - see Multicast distribute lists, creating 15
PIM-SM - see Multicast enabling 17
PING encrypted authentication 2
DHCP, use of for verification 2 exit overflow interval 14
utility 6, 7 hello interval, configuration of 10
Pipe ( | ) symbol, meaning in command hello interval, configuring 19
descriptions 10 intervals 9, 10, 14, 19, 21
Policy class - see CLI modes monetary cost - see Routing, OSPF, default
Policy map - see CLI modes cost
Port-channels, see VLAN NSSA
Ports area range, creating in NSSA 6
console, settings and control 1 configuring 3
Ethernet default route metrics 3
Index-3
redistribution of learned routes 4

stability interval, of border S
router 6 Secure HTTP
summary advertisement 4 browser access, enabling 3
Index translator role, specifying 5

overflow state limit 14
preference value for routes, setting 13
enabling operation 2
version, setting 2
Secure shell
priority value, specifying for an enabling 4
interface 20 protocol level, setting 5
redistribute lists, creating 15 Serial port
retransmit interval, configuration of 10 baud rate 2, 3, 4
retransmit interval, configuring 21 see also Console port
route advertisement, configuring Service and Support
behavior 12 contacting 5
router ID, configuring 16 obtaining documents 4
stub area Service Convergence Network 5
creating 7 Session reset 7
LSA summary mode 7 Slot/Port combinations 9
transmit delay 21 SNMP
transmit delay, for virtual links 11 activation of trap messaging 9
virtual links, creating 8 community mode, activating 3
RIP community, adding 1
access list distribution 3 IP addresses, allowing for communities 2
authentication, configuring 7 read-write access, by communities 5
auto-summarization, enabling 1 traps
control packets, setting version 8 broadcast storm 6
default advertising, enabling 2 enabling 5
distance value, setting 3 link mode 6
enabling 4, 6 multi-user 7
horizon, selecting 6 receiving station, changing address 8
metric, configuring default 2 receiving stations, defining 8
preference value, setting 3 spanning tree protocol 7
redistribution 5 V3
VRRP access levels 10
address, assigning to virtual router 2 authentication method 11
advertised value (of timers), setting 4 encryption method 11
authentication 3 SNMP System Group 1
enabling 1 Special characters, use in command descriptions 10
preemption mode, enabling 3 SSLT port, setting 1
priority values, assigning 4 Startup file, copying 3
virtual router, activating on an Stub areas - see Routing, OSPF
interface 5 Switching
virtual router, creating 2 aging timeout 5
Routing interfaces, identifying virtual ports in interface MAC address configuration 6
commands 9 setting MTU size 6
RPF - see Multicast system clock
daylight savings 20
setting via SNTP 15, 16
time zone setting 19
Index-4
removing ports from 5

T protocol groups, creating 20
Telnet 1 protocol-based VLAN 20–24
enabling 6 protocol-based VLAN, assigning interfaces 23
Telnet, enabling support 5
Terminal
key bindings 8
protocol-based VLAN, assigning VLANs to 22
removing ports (from port-channel) 5
selecting frame acceptance mode 8
Index
see also Console tagging, enabling 13, 14
Terminal Emulator, settings 2 VRRP - see Routing, VRRP
Time 14
time
daylight savings 20
time zone setting 19
Tips 4
Tokens - see CLI, parameters
U
Uploading 3
User Exec - see CLI modes
Users
creating 7
passwords 7
V
Virtual ports 9
VLAN
(CLI mode) -see CLI modes
adding ports (to port-channel) 5
clearing configurations 15
creating 8
frame acceptance, configuring 11
IDs, changing 13, 14
ingress filtering, activating 9
ingress filtering, enabling 12
LACP 19–20
LAGs - see VLAN, port-channels 1
MAC address filtering 16–19
names, assigning 9
network management VLAN, setting 7
participation mode, setting 10, 11
port-channel
activating 3
adding ports to 5
clearing 7
creating 2
deleting interfaces from 6
deleting ports from 6
enabling support 1
naming 3
Index-5
Index
Index-6

Bar Admin Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bar Admin Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bar Admin Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BAR Administration Guide

Copyright Copyright © 2005 by Pannaway Technologies, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Revision History Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Router Administration Guide

Part Number: 850-0000011-03 (A)

Revision A drafted: 11/10/2005

Standard Limited Warranty

IN NO EVENT SHALL PANNAWAY TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR

Return and Repair Policy

CHAPTER 2: USING THE BAR CLI

CHAPTER 3: SWITCH CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

CHAPTER 4: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

CHAPTER 5: PROTOCOL INDEPENDENT ROUTING COMMANDS

CHAPTER 6: RIP ROUTING COMMANDS

CHAPTER 7: OSPF ROUTING COMMANDS

CHAPTER 8: VRRP ROUTING COMMANDS

CHAPTER 9: MULTICAST COMMANDS

CHAPTER 10: DHCP SERVER COMMANDS

CHAPTER 11: SESSION CONTROL

CHAPTER 12: HTTP AND SSH CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 13: SNMP COMMANDS

CHAPTER 14: ACCESS CONTROL LISTS

CHAPTER 15: DEVICE UTILITIES

APPENDIX A: LIST OF CLI COMMANDS

Figure 1-1. The Pannaway BAR-GE12

This chapter contains the following sections:

1.2 About This Manual

Using This Manual

1.2 About This Manual

Manual Contents This manual contains the following chapters:

1.3 Using This Manual

1.4 Management and Administration Overview 1.4

1.5 Getting Technical Support

We stand ready at all times to assist you in maintaining your network.

2.1 Contents of this Chapter

Accessing CLI management 2-2

Entering Commands 2-3

Using “no” Form Commands 2-3

Navigating Command Modes 2-4

Understanding Errors 2-7

Getting System Help 2-8

Identifying Interfaces 2-9

CLI Documentation Conventions 2-10

2.2 Accessing CLI management

2.3 Entering Commands

2.4 Using “no” Form Commands

2.5 Navigating Command Modes

Figure 2-1. BAR CLI Modes

The BAR CLI provides the following command modes:

VLAN This mode groups all the commands pertaining to VLANs.

Table 2-1. Command Line Interface Modes

Command Mode Access Method Prompt suffix

User Exec This is the first level of access. >

Privileged Exec From the User Exec Mode, #

VLAN From the Privileged Exec (Vlan)#

Global Config From the Privileged Exec (Config)#

Interface Config From the Global Configuration (Interface-"s/p")#

Line Config From the Global Configuration (line)#

Policy Map From the Global Configuration (Config-policy-map)#

Policy Class From the Policy Map mode (Config-policy-classmap)#